BSC6900 UMTSV900R017C10 LMT User Guide Issue 02 Date 2015-05-08 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2015. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied. Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China Website: http://www.huawei.com Email:
[email protected] Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide About This Document About This Document Overview This document describes the functions and relevant components of the BSC6900 Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT). It also provides instructions for performing basic operation and maintenance (OM) tasks of theBSC6900. Product Versions The following table lists the product version and the solution version related to this document. Product Name Product Version Solution Version BSC6900 V900R017C10 RAN17.1 Intended Audience This document is intended for: l Network engineers l System engineers l Field engineers Organization 1 Change History This section provides information about the changes in different document versions. There are two types of changes, including function changes and editorial changes. Function changes refer to changes in functions of a specific product version. Editorial changes refer to changes in wording or addition of information that was not described in the earlier version. 2 Introduction to LMT The Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) is a web-based application that provides a graphical user interface (GUI) to simplify operation and maintenance of the BSC6900. Using the LMT, Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide About This Document you can manage alarms, view message tracing results, monitor performance, and maintain devices. You can also run man-machine language (MML) commands and view command results on the LMT. 3 Operation Rights Management This chapter describes principles of managing operation rights, user accounts, and command groups. 4 Running MML Commands This chapter describes how to run MML commands on the LMT for operation and maintenance of the BSC6900. 5 Alarm/Event Management This section describes how to use the LMT to manage BSC6900 alarms/events. Alarm/event management helps you analyze alarms/events efficiently, thereby facilitating troubleshooting. 6 Log Management This section describes how to use the LMT to manage the BSC6900 logs, which can be saved in .txt and .csv files. Only user admin, ADMINISTRATOR-level users, and authorized CUSTOM-level users can manage the logs. 7 Trace Management This chapter describes how to manage message tracing on the BSC6900. A maximum of 64 trace tasks can be started simultaneously on the same LMT, and a maximum of 6 trace tasks can be started simultaneously for the same parameter of a trace item. When OMU boards perform an active/standby switchover, monitoring cannot be restarted until 30 minutes after the switchover. 8 Performance Monitoring This chapter describes how to monitorBSC6900 performance. A maximum of 64 monitoring tasks can be started simultaneously on the LMT. If OMU boards are switched over, performance monitoring can be restarted 30 minutes after the switchover. 9 Device Panel This chapter describes how to manage the BSC6900 using the device and emulation panels. You can use these panels to query information about boards, ports, links, and alarms. 10 FMA This function helps users handle network faults. It includes the following functions: Fault Diagnosis, Hierarchical Delimitation and Information Collection. The fault diagnosis and hierarchical delimitation functions analyze faults only within eight hours from the fault rectification to the current time. 11 BSC Maintenance This chapter describes how to maintain BSC equipment, back up and restore data, and implement fast fault diagnosis. 12 FAQ This chapter describes some frequently asked questions (FAQs) and the corresponding solutions. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide About This Document Conventions Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance deterioration, or unanticipated results. NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal injury. Calls attention to important information, best practices and tips. NOTE is used to address information not related to personal injury, equipment damage, and environment deterioration. General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Description Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root. Italic Book titles are in italics. Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New. Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide About This Document Convention Description Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Italic Command arguments are in italics. [] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. { x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected. [ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected. { x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected. [ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected. GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Description Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. > Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder. Keyboard Operations The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Format Description Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab. Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt +A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently. Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn. Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v . vi . Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide Issue 02 (2015-05-08) About This Document Action Description Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer. Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer. Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position. Ltd. .................42 Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..................................................................................40 3..............................................................................8....19 2.................2 Management of User Accounts........................................23 2........................41 3..............2 LMT Offline MML........................29 2.............................................................................................................................39 3........23 2.............................................................................42 3.................................................................................. vii ........................................3...8 LMT Software.36 3................6 TrafficRecording Review Tool............5 File Manager.................................1.....2..............................................................................................................................................................3 FTP Client...........................21 2...........................38 3..........6 2..................................3 Deleting an External User Account....................................................................................................................2 Logging In to and Logging Out of the LMT..............6 Operation Time Limits.............................................................................................................. Ltd.............................................BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide Contents Contents About This Document....................................................................................................................................................37 3............................................................1..............................................................1 Principles of Operation Rights Management.......................................................3 Command Groups...............7 User-defined Command Group................................1 2 Introduction to LMT......5 Operation Rights.......................31 2..............................................................................................1.....2 User Passwords.......................................................................................................................................................3 Management of User Passwords......................................................................................................................................8.......................4 Obtaining Documentation Packages....1..............ii 1 Change History..................................................................................40 3....................................................................................................................................................38 3................................2..............................25 2...............................32 2.....1................................................................2 Modifying an External User Account...................................................................4 User Types...............................8....................................................................................................................1 Installing LMT Offline Tools...............6 FTP Server......................33 3 Operation Rights Management................................................................4 Convert Management System................36 3.....1 Configuration Requirements of the LMT PC...............1 Creating an External User Account.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1 Concepts Related to Operation Rights Management.3 Components of the LMT Main Page...........................................................................................36 3....................................................................4 2..........................................................................................................................................15 2.........35 3..................8...................2..........................................................1 Defining Login Password Policies.....................................................................8...................12 2.........................................41 3................................................................................................................8......................................................................................................8 2.............................................................................16 2................................................................................................................................................1.........................................5 Performance Browser Tool........................................................................... ............................................................9 Undoing/Redoing Multiple Data Configuration Actions.......................43 3.........................................................................................................................................................................2 Renaming Command Groups.................................60 5 Alarm/Event Management..............................................2 Alarm Severity.........................................................................................2 Managing Alarm Logs..................................................................4.........................4 Managing the Alarm Masking Switch of Derived Alarms..............59 4.............68 5...................................................................................................69 5.....................................................................................................4 Data Configuration Rollback............................................51 4......................................................................................4..........................................................47 4.......................................................BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide Contents 3................................1 Setting Storage Limitations of Alarm Logs.....43 3...........................1............................................................................53 4...............................................................................44 4 Running MML Commands....1 Immediate Batch Processing of MML Commands.............48 4............................................................................................3 Querying an Alarm Masking Condition.....................................................58 4.........52 4..................1.....................................47 4...2 Querying the Alarm Masking Switch of Derived Alarms..............................................................................3...........................................4 Setting MML Parameters......................................................................................................42 3..............1.......7 Obtaining Data Configuration Rights............................................................69 5.........................................1..........43 3................................................................................................................................. viii .........4 Management of Command Groups.......................................................................................2...............1..........................1 Alarm Type............................................55 4......2....................1.................................................................3 Data Configuration Rights......................................................3...................2 Scheduled Batch Processing of MML Commands...........................3..........54 4.........................................................................................67 5....................4.......................................................................69 5........................................2 Querying Login Password Policies..................................................................................................................................43 3...3 Managing Alarm Masking Conditions.....................................3 Alarm-Event Type..........................2 Components of the MML Command Window........................57 4........58 4.........................................................63 5....3 Changing Commands in a Command Group................3.......................................................................1 Concepts Related to MML Commands...3....................................................1 Querying a Command Group........2 Deleting an Alarm Masking Condition.....................68 5...........................................5 Querying Data Configuration Modes.......................6 Querying Data Configuration Rights.............................................................45 4.......................................................................70 Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co...........2 Querying Storage Limitations of Alarm Logs.42 3.................................................................................................................................1........................................50 4................................................................................................................................................................................4 Alarm Flag.......................1 Introduction to MML Commands................................................63 5.....................................................................................................4.............................................................................................5 Alarm Box.............70 5....................................56 4...............4.........................................................................................8 Undoing/Redoing a Single Data Configuration Action......50 4........................................................................................65 5................................................1........................................................3 Batch Processing of MML Commands....................................2 Running a Single MML Command......................................................................................................................62 5....................................................................................................66 5................................................64 5.......................................................................................................................................................................3....3 Changing the Password of the Active User Account.............................................................3..............................................67 5................... Ltd.......1 Concepts Related to Alarm Management....4 Changing the Password of an External User Account.3...........................................................................................3.................1 Creating an Alarm Masking Condition......1....................3 Syntax Check.................................................68 5.64 5.......................................................1 Enabling/Disabling the Alarm Masking Switch of Derived Alarms............ .....................4 AC Tracing...........................................2..........................................74 5........3 Device Commissioning...................................................................2.....70 5.......2........................................................................................ ix ................6 Collecting Logs.......................1...................................81 6.....................................................................5.........5 Obtaining Running Logs.............77 5........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................2 Basic Tracing Operations...................................90 7....................................................4 Querying the Alarm Suppression Level of the Alarm Box.......................................78 5.....................................3...............95 7.....5.........5..................................79 5..............................................................................................................79 5............5..91 7......................................1 Tracing OS Messages......................................................................................................................................................1 Browsing Alarms/Events...............................3..........93 7....................................................................5.....................................................74 5.............................................................................................3.........................................82 6..........................5...100 7.........4 Querying Alarm/Event Configuration..........................................2 Emergency Diagnosis......................................................................................................................9 Refreshing the Alarm/Event Window....................................................78 5..............98 7.......2............................................4 Tracing Specifications......95 7.......................................................................................6 Setting Display Attributes for Alarms/Events....................1................................................5 Filtering Alarms/Events...................BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide Contents 5............................................................................107 Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co...................4 Obtaining Operation/Security Logs.98 7...........................................................................93 7........................................................................................6.......................73 5...................6...............................................................................................................8 Deleting Alarms/Events.............................................................80 6 Log Management..........................................83 6............................3 Saving Traced Messages........................................................................................................................................................................................5...............................................................................7 Manually Clearing an Alarm/Event...............................101 7..........................6 Managing the Alarm Box........................................................................................................................................3 Querying Operation/Security Logs...........................2..........2 Management of Tracing Operation Rights....5..........................................................92 7...................................5.85 7 Trace Management...........................................................................3...........................................................................................82 6........................................1 Concepts............................................................99 7.............................................5 DHCP Tracing............................71 5....................................70 5....................5 Monitoring Alarms.....................................................................................................3....................1 Browsing Traced Messages Online............................................................................................................................................................................................................................1 Querying Alarm Box Information.................................................................................................................2 Querying Alarm/Event Logs................................84 6........................................................................................72 5...2 Querying the Number of Alarms of a Specific Severity................................82 6......97 7.............................................99 7................................................................................................................ Ltd.........................................................................77 5...............1..............................................................................................................................1............................................................92 7....................................................................3 Querying Suggestions on Alarm/Event Handling.............2....................................................................................................................................................................................6 Managing the Trace File..............................................................................4 Browsing Traced Messages Offline.................................................................1 Logs.2 Viewing the Interpretation of Traced Messages...................6................3 Capturing Packets.79 5.............1 Tracing Principles................................................5 Managing Tracing Tasks..............................................................................91 7.................................................................3 Tracing Mode.....................................................................................................................................3 Performing Operations on the Alarm Box.............................6............................................92 7....................106 7.......................................2 Setting Log Storage Limitations. ..................................4............3 Saving Monitoring Data...................10 Tracing IOS Messages...........................................................................................................................................................2 Starting the Device Panel...............................................................5 Tracing Messages on the Uu Interface........................115 7...........173 8.......................4............3............11 Tracing Iur-p Messages..............1 Tracing Messages on the Iu Interface.................................................................................................................................................1 Concepts..........................................2.........................................................4.............................147 8.............................................................................................................134 7.........................................3..................122 7...........2..............4 Querying the CPU/DSP Usage...............................111 7....................................................................................................1................148 8..............................................9 Tracing Cell Messages...195 8...............................................................3 Monitoring System Resources...................................................................................................................145 8 Performance Monitoring...............................2..149 8......................12 Tracing Messages on the Sr Interface..............1........................................................................................158 8...............................4 Tracing Messages on the Iub Interface...................................................6 Querying the BSC Board Information.............................................121 7...................................................4.........148 8...............4....................................................................................4.....119 7...........................................................150 8..............159 8.......................................................................4..............................................................................3....................................7 Message Settings................................2 Setting Chart Display Mode..............................................................1...........................................151 8...........................................................173 8......................................................................................................................................................150 8..........................................................................159 8...........1......................................................................................................................................................................................BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide Contents 7.......4......................................................................1 Monitoring Board CPU/DSP Usage......................109 7............4......................................................................................................................................................4..............................................................109 7............3 Common Monitoring...............................................4.........201 Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co............................153 8...........................................................................198 9...............................................................................1 Browsing the Monitoring Results Online.................................................4 Monitoring BER..................................4........................152 8....................................................................................................143 7...................................................1 Introduction to the Device Panel........................197 9....................................................................198 9...1...........................................................152 8..199 9....................1...................................................................2 Operation Rights Control...................................3............1 Monitoring Principles................................................................................................................................................ x ...........................1...........2 Monitoring Cell Performance.................................................4.................................................................................3 Monitoring BERS.......3 Tracing Messages on the Iur Interface...................................4.............................2 Monitoring Transmission Resources.....................151 8.....2 Tracing Messages on the Iupc Interface................................................................................................3 Querying the Status of an E1/T1 Port................................................................................................4......................................................................................................................2 General Operations.......................2............................................................................199 9..................................................................................4 UMTS Services...............184 8..1 Device Panel Operations..........................................5 Querying BSC Board Clock Status.........150 8................200 9............................................195 9 Device Panel.................................................6 Tracing MNCDT Messages........8 Tracing UE Messages..........131 7......5 Monitoring Link Performance......198 9..................................................3..................4 UMTS Monitoring........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Ltd.................................................4 Offline Browsing Monitoring Data.........................1............................................1 Monitoring Connection Performance.................................................................................................4....................................................113 7.........................117 7.......................................................4 Monitoring Iur-p Delay............................................................. ................................5 How to Set the Browser Under Citrix Farm Networking..............1................238 11.........1................1.............................................................7 Resetting a BSC Board......................................................................................................205 9......4 Recovery Confirmation..........................................................................................209 9..........9 Querying the BSC Board Alarm..................6 Querying the BSC Board Information..........................221 10......................1........................................................214 9...................................................................................1....6 Unable to Log In To LMT Because IE Default Security Level Is Too High.............4 No Response When Clicking the Menu Bar on the LMT.............256 12....BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide Contents 9..........................................................................2........12 Querying the DPU DSP Status........................................1.2.............................2 Restoring Data...................1 Browser-related FAQs..............265 12......................241 12...............3 Batch Configuration............................2 Emulation Panel Operations..............................2..................................................................................................................................................... Ltd............2...................................................................................................................................................................................................9 The Error 'Mismatched Address' Is Displayed During an HTTPS Login....................................................................................8 Switching Over BSC Boards............................................233 10...205 9.........................................................237 11...........................210 9..........................................................................................................242 12........................................................................................................................................203 9..............................................................................................................3 Hierarchical Delimitation...............................................................................1 Backing Up Data......................................2.....................................................212 9...........215 9..............................................2 LMT Colors Cannot Be Displayed....230 10...........................................................244 12......................................3 Verification Code Cannot Be Displayed on the LMT Login Page............................................................................................................................................205 9.......................................................................................242 12................................213 9................................................13 Querying Alarm LED Information....219 10......................................................3 Querying the Status of an E1/T1 Port................................................................................................. xi ............................217 10.................................................................2.................................................215 10 FMA.....................................2..........................................11 Querying the Optical Port Status...................2....................................236 11.......................................................................7 Resetting a BSC Board.............................207 9...........................................................................................................................................................................................4 Querying the CPU/DSP Usage............................................................10 Querying the FE/GE Port Status....5 Querying BSC Board Clock Status.....................2............................................................................................8 Switching Over BSC Boards...........................................................1 Introduction to the Emulation Panel..........2 Starting the Emulation Panel..........................1..................................243 12.....................................................1 Fault Overview...................9 Querying the BSC Board Alarm............................................................206 9.............2........................................................................................................................................1.233 11 BSC Maintenance.........................2........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1..............................8 The Error "Certificate Invalid" Is Displayed During an HTTPS Login.................208 9.............................7 Unable to Download or Install the Java or Flash Plug-in and Two File Manager Windows Displayed Windows IE8 or Any Later Version Is Used.................1.....214 9...................................................................................................................................................1..................10 File Manager Functions are Improperly.................255 12....248 12.......2......................1 Slow Responses in the Firefox Browser...................................................................................208 9...........................................................................................................................267 Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co............................2 Fault Diagnosis.............239 12 FAQ..............242 12.........202 9......................................................................242 12.............5 Information Collection................1............................................1........2............................................. ................5 Any Further Operation Performed When Some LMT Web Pages Fail to Update Causes the Web Pages to Turn Blank....................................................................................7 Unable to Save Tracking and Monitoring Data......3.........................................................................2 Java-related FAQs..........................11 Message 'Class doesn't support Automation' Displayed in an IE Browser..........................................2.............................................299 12..........................................272 12........20 The LMT login page of a host NE or built-in NE fails to be opened..................................3..........311 12......14 Unclear Grids in the Tables in the MML Online Help........................294 12.........2..............................................1.............3............................2...............2.........................3...................................................... Monitoring...................1 Installing OS Patches...272 12........................................................1.310 12...................................................................276 12.......290 12.............................13 What Do I Do If A Message Your Java version is out of date Is Displayed?...........290 12...18 Settings on the LMT Failing to Take Effective..............................................270 12.......................................311 Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.................................... Tracing.................281 12................................305 12......................3.............................................................................................................304 12...................13 The "Are You Sure You Want to Quit the Page" Dialog Box Is Displayed.....................3...2...13 How to Handle Shortcut Key Invalidation...............................................................................................................307 12..................11 Failure in Verifying the Verification Code During the Login to the LMT..12 Batch Execution of MML Commands Fails Because Some MML Commands Contain Invisible Carriage Returns or Line Feeds........278 12....................................4 Chinese Characters Displayed in the Tracing and Monitoring Windows..........................................................15 The "App Center" Web Page Is Automatically Displayed When Firefox Is Used to Browse the LMT..................17 MML Command Failed to Be Executed or No Response to Tracing Tasks After the Browser Is Upgraded to IE8 .............271 12............................2 LMT Fails to Function Properly When Error Occurs in Mixed Code Security Verification of JRE.................... xii .16 "Permission Denied" or "Access Denied" is Displayed When IE Is Used to Browse the LMT....3 Corrupted Characters Appearing When the csv File Is Opened in UTF-8 Coding................2...301 12..................................269 12.....279 12........278 12............8 Changing Settings for the Next-Generation Java Plug-in Fails.........3.....................................................................1.....................................................................................................1.................................308 12.............................................................................................................10 Displaying the Java Security Warning...............................2....................3...........299 12...2..............................................287 12...1.................................1.......298 12............................2.....12 Error Message"This user session already exists" Upon Login to LMT..................................................10 LMT Login Web Page Cannot Be Opened with the PC OMU Installed.....................309 12............................................4 Maximum Number of LMT Clients That Can Be Started on One PC Simultaneously.........................6 Interfaces for Performing Tracing or Monitoring Tasks Blinking.................1 Help for Installing and Using the Java Plug-in..................................1....................290 12........................5 LMT Fails to Function Properly during the tracing/monitoring/batch processing..............................2...305 12..................................................7 Java Installation Fails...........................................................274 12..............................3 Other FAQs..........296 12.....................1..........................299 12.........3.........271 12.....................................................................2................306 12.................................................. or Device Maintenance Is Enabled.....................................................1................................................285 12.............276 12.......2............19 LMT Login Window Being Stopped by the Browser.....3.....6 Configuring the HTTPS Login Mode............. Ltd.....................................................................................................................11 Slow Response During an LMT Login.....................301 12..........................................3.................................12 The Application Blocked by Security Settings Dialog Box Is Displayed When Batch Processing..................................3.............1................BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide Contents 12.......................................................................2.....9 Alarm/Event Function Becomes Unavailable.........................................................8 BTS Nodes Cannot Be Displayed Under Device Navigation Tree................................3 Tracing and Monitoring Functions Cannot Be Used................3..................................................2 Changing the Computer Time During the LMT Use Prohibited....................................................296 12..............................................9 How to Handle a Web Page Error or Java Error Displayed on the LMT..275 12................. ......................14 Tracing File Not Being Uploaded to the Specified Directory...................................312 12................BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide Contents 12.......... Ltd...312 12.3....................................312 Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co....16 Garbled Characters Displayed in the Chinese Names of Files in the File Manager and These Files Failing to Be Removed........................................................................ xiii ..............3............................................................3....................................15 Error Dialog Box Displayed When Online Help Is Opened............................. 02 (2015-05-08) This issue includes the following changes. Change Type Function change Change Description Adde d None. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Editorial changes refer to changes in wording or addition of information that was not described in the earlier version.. see Logging In to and Logging Out of the LMT. password. see Browsing the Monitoring Results Online. and port settings. including function changes and editorial changes. Function changes refer to changes in functions of a specific product version. For details.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 1 Change History 1 Change History This section provides information about the changes in different document versions. Modif ied Added descriptions of the Working directory setting on the FTP server. Added descriptions of user name. Modified the specifications of the number of real-time monitoring tasks. For details. 1 . None. see FTP Server. There are two types of changes. For details. Delete d Editorial change None. 01 (2015-03-25) This issue includes the following changes. Ltd. BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 1 Change History Change Type Function change Change Description Added None. this issue includes the following changes.. Draft A (2015-01-15) Compared with Issue 04 (2014-12-30) of V900R016C00. 2 . l FMA l Fault Overview l Fault Diagnosis l Hierarchical Delimitation l Information Collection Delete d Editorial change None. Ltd. None. Change Type Function change Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Change Description Added None. Modifi ed Optimized descriptions about the FMA function to make the descriptions clearer and more user-friendly. For details. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. see the following chapters. None. see Corrupted Characters Appearing When the csv File Is Opened in UTF-8 Coding. see Collecting Logs. For details. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For details. For details. For details. For details. l Added descriptions of right control. see Alarm/Event Function Becomes Unavailable. For details. see FTP Server. see Resetting a BSC Board. l Added the solution to the unavailable alarm function. l Added packet parameter descriptions. see Information Collection. see Configuration Requirements of the LMT PC. Ltd.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 1 Change History Change Type Change Description Modifi ed l Modified the recommended Java JRE version. l Added descriptions of FTP permissions and protocol type supported by the FTP server. Delete d Editorial change Issue 02 (2015-05-08) None. see Capturing Packets. l Added descriptions of the fault information collection period. For details. For details. For details. see Logging In to and Logging Out of the LMT. For details. 3 . l Modified descriptions of supported board types.. see Management of Tracing Operation Rights. l Added the solution to garbled characters displayed in Office2007 and later versions. l Added the precautions for logging in to the LMT using the U2000 proxy. l Added log descriptions. 2. is used for uploading and downloading software and license files. enables you to upload files from the LMT to the OMU and download files from the OMU to the LMT. and maintain devices. 2.2 Logging In to and Logging Out of the LMT This section describes how to log in to the LMT for operations and how to log out of it after the operations are complete.4 Obtaining Documentation Packages This section describes how to query and obtain documentation packages of the corresponding product version. 2. You can also run man-machine language (MML) commands and view command results on the LMT.1 Configuration Requirements of the LMT PC The computer on which the LMT is running is called the LMT PC. Using the LMT. monitor performance.3 Components of the LMT Main Page You can log in to the LMT using a web browser to perform operation and maintenance (O&M) operations on the BSC6900. 2. For example.8 LMT Software Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. a component of the LMT Offline Tools.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT 2 Introduction to LMT About This Chapter The Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) is a web-based application that provides a graphical user interface (GUI) to simplify operation and maintenance of the BSC6900. 2. software. a component of the LMT application. 4 . you can manage alarms. Ltd. view message tracing results. 2.7 User-defined Command Group The User-defined Command Group is used to add commands to a specified command group so that an admin user can add operation rights for rights-limited users. you can use the File Manager to obtain logs and upload data configuration files. connection ports.5 File Manager The File Manager. 2. and communication capability.6 FTP Server The FTP server.. The LMT PC must meet certain requirements of hardware. This section describes the main page of the LMT. 2. and TrafficRecording Review Tool. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. FTP Server. Ltd. LMT Offline Tools. Performance Browser Tool. Convert Management System.. 5 .BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT The Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) software consists of the FTP Client. audio card. some functions of the LMT. modem. such as the File Manager function.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT 2. and speaker Keyboard and mouse Software Requirements Table 2-2 describes the software requirements of the LMT PC. Windows Server 2003/2008 NOTE If the LMT PC runs an operating system other than these ones. compatibility issues occur. Table 2-2 Software requirements of the LMT PC Item Recommended Configuration Operating system Windows Vista/7.1 Configuration Requirements of the LMT PC The computer on which the LMT is running is called the LMT PC. connection ports. and communication capability. 6 .8 GHz or above 866 MHz RAM 1 1 GB 512 MB Hard disk 1 80 GB 10 GB Display resolution - 1024 x 768 or above 1024 x 768 CD drive 1 - - Ethernet adapter 1 10/100 Mbit/s 10/100 Mbit/s Other devices 5x1 Keyboard. As a result. may fail. Hardware Requirements Table 2-1 describes the hardware requirements of the LMT PC. Ltd. Default language of the operating system Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Simplified Chinese or English Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The LMT PC must meet certain requirements of hardware. software. Table 2-1 Hardware requirements of the LMT PC Item Quantity Recommended Configuration Minimum Configuration CPU 1 2. mouse.. select Display all websites in Compatibility View. FireFox 10.45 are not supported. Requirements of Connection Ports If a firewall is deployed between a PC and the LMT. To obtain other JRE versions. restart the brwoser..65 version in the LMT login window.1. Ltd. before you use the PC to visit the LMT through the Web.disable_window_flip in Search and double-click dom. Versions between JRE 1. Flash plug-in called Adobe Flash Player Flash Player 11.disable_window_flip is true.0 and JRE 1.45 is supported. modify default settings of Java by following the steps provided in section 12.X.7. Otherwise.0.0. After installing the JRE 1.7. 20. 21.0 is not supported but JRE 1. l If the Firefox browser is used. Java plug-in called Java Platform Standard Edition Runtime Environment (JRE) JRE 1. NOTICE l You are advised to run the LMT on a PC with the recommended configurations to ensure stable operation. To check whether the IE window is zoomed at 100% level. l When using the LMT.0.7.disable_window_flip by performing the following operations: Open the Firefox browser and enter about:config in the address bar. ensure that the IE window is zoomed at 100% level. Then.102 is recommended. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. choose Tools > Compatibility View Settings. Search dom. NOTE You can download the plug-in in the LMT login window. NOTE l Set the security level of the Web browser to medium or low.0. the LMT menus cannot be viewed.0. The default value of dom. visit the official website of Java.0. Note that JRE 1. In the displayed Compatibility View Settings dialog box.7.disable_window_flip to set the value to false.X.7. l The LMT in the current version is compatible only with 32-bit operating systems and 32-bit web browsers. Otherwise. set the attribute of dom. and 443 of the firewall. enable ports 80. l If IE8 or a later version is used.X and 24. 9 or 10 (IE 8 recommended).7. NOTE You can download the recommended JRE 1. view the scaling icon at the lower right corner of the IE window.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT Item Recommended Configuration Web browser Internet Explorer (IE) 8.65 is recommended. 17.65 version. 7 .1 Help for Installing and Using the Java Plug-in.0. the layout of the LMT graphical user interface (GUI) may be abnormal.2.7. prompting you to upgrade the plug-in version. you are advised to uninstall the existing JRE plug-in and then install a new version. a serious delay occurs despite a bandwidth of 2 Mbit/s. An LMT PC with the recommended configuration can speed up browsing. however. which is used for Web page browsing. l Ports 20 and 21 are File Transfer Protocol (FTP) ports.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT NOTE l Port 80 is the default Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) port. If many programs compete with the LMT for bandwidth resources. If you cannot log in to the LMT after you upgrade the JRE program. a message is displayed. restart the web browser and retry. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Context l You have installed the JAVA Platform Standard Edition Runtime Environment (JRE) program before using the LMT. Communication Capability Requirements The LMT PC must support Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and meet the requirements of effective bandwidth. 2. l Effective bandwidth indicates the bandwidth available for the LMT. If no JRE plug-in is installed. thereby improving your browsing experience. l Port 443 is the default Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure (HTTPS) port. Table 2-3 Effective bandwidth requirements of the LMT PC Item Protocol Recommended Configuration Minimum Configuration Requirements of effective bandwidth HTTP 2 Mbit/s or higher 512 Kbit/s NOTE l The speed of web page browsing speed is highly dependent on bandwidth. prompting you to install the plug-in. If the JRE plug-in on the LMT PC is not the latest version. which is used for HTTPS login mode. Follow the instructions to install the plug-in. a message is displayed when you log in to the LMT. l If the Java Update Needed popup is displayed when you log in to the LMT.. 8 . you can use all LMT functions.2 Logging In to and Logging Out of the LMT This section describes how to log in to the LMT for operations and how to log out of it after the operations are complete. If you use an LMT with the minimum configuration. Table 2-3 describes the effective bandwidth requirements of the LMT PC. Ltd. The browsing speed. l A maximum of 32 local users and EMS users can log in to the LMT. select Update (recommended) to install the latest version. will be relatively slow. In this case. the value HTTPS_ONLY(Https_only) is recommended..1 through proxy connection. severe errors may occur in the system. perform the following operations: l Choose Tools > Internet Options in the IE browser and click the Privacy tab in the Internet Options dialog box. l If WebLMT Login Policy is set to HTTPS_ONLY(Https_only) and the LMT login policy set on the U2000 GUI is HTTP. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Clear the Delete browsing history on exit check box on the General tab page. NOTICE l Do not use refresh the browser on the LMT. enable the IE browser to support HTTP 1. Refreshing the main page. The Per Site Privacy Actions dialog box is displayed. Refreshing the tracing or monitoring page. l If you log in to the LMT through the IE browser. Close the LMT window before you modify the system time and time zone. Data over HTTP is transmitted in plaintext and prone to disclosure. Otherwise. l Before logging in to the LMT through the IE browser. move the slider in the Settings field to the middle until Medium is displayed on the right of the slider. Otherwise. (3) LOGIN_HTTPS_ONLY(Login_https_only): When HTTP is used to log in to the LMT. enter the IP address of each website that is allowed to use cookies. HTTP is changed to HTTPS before login.1. l You are also advised to perform the following operations: Choose Tools > Internet Options in the IE browser and click the General tab in the Internet Options dialog box. Ltd." l The default policy to log in to the LMT can be specified by the WebLMT Login Policy parameter in the SET WEBLOGINPOLICY command. the web shield function must be disabled. and error occurs on the LMT. and click Allow. l Before logging in to the LMT in the Internet Explorer (IE) browser. On the Privacy tab page. In the Address of Web site text box. select Use HTTP 1. choose Tools > Internet Options > Advanced > HTTP 1. click Sites. Therefore. (1) COMPATIBLE(Compatible): Either HTTP or HTTPS can be used to log in to the LMT. If the IE browser is configured with login to the LMT through a proxy server. the U2000 will fail to log in to the LMT using the proxy server. showing "Disconnected. Otherwise. Then.1 Setting and select Use HTTP 1. a dialog box will be displayed.1 as follows: In the IE browser. The parameter can be set to any of the following values. do not modify any file folder properties. Please log in again. l If AVG Internet Security is installed on an LMT PC. a message indicating a script error will be displayed. (2) HTTPS_ONLY(Https_only): Only HTTPS can be used to log in to the LMT. 9 . the IE browser is automatically refreshed. then HTTPS returns to HTTP after login. you will be logged out of the LMT. do not modify the system time and time zone.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT CAUTION When the LMT is running. html" in the Address bar of the IE browser. Press Enter on the keyboard. In the Connection tab page. Type the external virtual IP address of the OMU in the Address bar of the browser. 10 . Issue 02 (2015-05-08) 1. Note that "/" must be included in "U2000_IP/OMU_IP/" behind "OMU_IP.141. Press Enter on the keyboard." If another proxy server is already set. Press Enter on the keyboard. Set the IP addresses under Exceptions by using the following method: Choose Tool > Internet Options on the tool bar of the IE browser. 10. Then specify the IP address and port number of the U2000 server in the Proxy server area. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In the displayed Proxy Settings window. You can set the U2000 proxy server in the browser by using the following method: Choose Tool > Internet Options on the tool bar of the browser.. click LAN Settings. For example.141.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT Procedure Step 1 Enter the LMT login page by using one of the following modes: Mode Mode Description Operation Mode 1: direct connection The LMT directly connects to the OMU without using any proxy server. OMU_IP or U2000_IP. you need to add U2000_IP to the IP addresses that do not use the proxy server under Exceptions. NOTE OMU_IP indicates the external virtual IP address of the OMU and U2000_IP indicates the IP address of the U2000 server. of the U2000 proxy server are specified.151. Type "U2000_IP/OMU_IP/" (for example. you need to select the Use the same proxy server for all protocols option. or click Go next to the Address bar to enter the login window of the BSC6900. NOTE This mode is used only when the explorer is configured with a proxy server. Mode 3: connection through the U2000 with both IP addresses entered The LMT connects to the OMU through the U2000 with IP addresses of both U2000 and OMU entered in the browser. Type the external virtual IP address of the OMU in the Address bar of the IE browser. The default port number is 8080. NOTE After the IP address and port No. In the Connection tab page. or click Go next to the Address bar to enter the login window of the BSC6900. you need to add OMU_IP to the IP addresses that do not use the proxy server under Exceptions.130. click Advanced. NOTE This mode is recommended when the U2000 proxy server needs to be used to connect to the OMU. Mode 2: connection through the U2000 that is configured as the proxy server The LMT connects to the OMU through the U2000 that is configured as the proxy server for the browser. or click Go next to the Address bar to enter the login window of the BSC6900. click LAN Settings.208/) or "http:// U2000_IP/OMU_IP/login. Ltd. which is not the U2000 and cannot be changed. NOTE If another proxy server is already set. In the displayed window. specify an IP address that does not use the proxy server under Exceptions. 2.146/10. see section Setting Web LMT Options in U2000 Data Management User Guide. NOTE After logout.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT NOTE l When you are logging in to the LMT using the second or third method. or Device Maintenance tab page. Monitor. Otherwise. and Verification Code again to log in. click Reset. click Lock in the top right corner of the LMT main page. if you want to re-log in to the LMT on the EMS. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Trace. SSL Mode Either COMPATIBLE(Both HTTP and HTTPS) or HTTPS(HTTPS Only) can be selected. the login fails. U2000 Security Connection Mode Policy for Login to LMT and Data Transmission Common Mode Only COMPATIBLE(Both HTTP and HTTPS) can be selected. l If port 8080 is used as the U2000 proxy port. Password. and Verification Code. click Logout in the top right corner of the LMT main page. l You can run the LST WEBLOGINPOLICY command to query the policy for login to LMT and data transmission. respectively. check whether the connection between the LMT and the OMU is normal. you must set User type to EMS. l If the login fails. NOTE l Before logging in to the BSC6900 as an EMS user. The default user name and password of the proxy server are proxyuser and Changeme_123. HTTPS(HTTPS Only). or LOGINHTTPS(HTTPS for Login Only) can be selected. the login interface for User type of Local is displayed. Ltd. On this login interface. Password. Batch. If the login fails again. Common Mode and SSL Mode COMPATIBLE(Both HTTP and HTTPS). Step 4 Optional: To lock the LMT window. Step 2 Specify User Name. l For details about how to set the policy for logging in to the LMT on the U2000 GUI. The default password for users emscomm and emscommneteco is ei*b+@b#6Nh(tS1j. 11 .. l If User Type is set to EMS. Specify User Name. l If the Verification Code is illegible. the user name and password need to be authorized by the U2000. l Set User Type to Local or EMS. enter the user name and password of the proxy server when you open the LMT mainpage. l It is recommended that you change the password at your first login and then change the password every three months. click Refresh for a new code. settings on the U2000 and on the NE side must be consistent with the setting mapping listed in the following table. Step 5 To exit the LMT. you need to set up a connection between the BSC6900 and the U2000 server. Step 3 Click Login. if you need to connect to the OMU with the U2000 as the proxy server. l In HTTPS mode. configure the HTTPS login mode and certificate files by referring to 12.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT NOTE l HTTPS is the default mode.8 The Error "Certificate Invalid" Is Displayed During an HTTPS Login and 12.6 Configuring the HTTPS Login Mode. which is the same as the HTTP login page. you are advised to adopt mode 2. Table 2-4 Components of the LMT main page Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Component Description Workspace Provides the view of LMT function icons. This section describes the main page of the LMT. enter https://the external virtual IP address of the OMU.1. Based on HTTP.1. l Before logging in to the LMT through HTTPS.9 The Error 'Mismatched Address' Is Displayed During an HTTPS Login. 12 .3.. for example. in the Address bar of the browser. Visiting the OMU by adopting mode 3 takes four times the time taken by adopting mode 2.219. You can log in to the LMT through the HTTP Secure (HTTPS) mode. Figure 2-1 LMT main page Table 2-4 describes the components of the LMT main page. ----End 2.115. HTTPS introduces SSL or TLS to ensure security. l To log in to the LMT through HTTPS. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3 Components of the LMT Main Page You can log in to the LMT using a web browser to perform operation and maintenance (O&M) operations on the BSC6900. GUI Figure 2-1 shows the LMT main page. Ltd. l After entering the HTTPS login page. l Correct errors displayed during the login by referring to 12. perform the same operations for a login.141. https://10. see 4. click Progress on the toolbar.7 User-defined Command Group. Obtain Documentation List You can click it to obtain the documentation packages of the corresponding product versions. and alarm configuration on this tab page. see 4.5 Information Collection. eGBTS does not support this function. For details. Progress You can view the progress of a task on this tab page. For details. Password You can click it to change the password of the current user. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) FTP Tool You can click it to download the executable application file SFTPServer. see 2. 13 . see 9 Device Panel. see 2. User-defined Command Group You can click it to add commands to a specified command group so that an admin user can add operation rights for rights-limited users. Batch You can run man-machine language (MML) commands in batches on this tab page. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For details. use the new password when logging in to the LMT again.8. 10. see 2. alarm logs.6 FTP Server.. see 8 Performance Monitoring. see 7 Trace Management. For details. Trace You can manage message tracing tasks on this tab page.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT Component Description Alarm/Event You can query active alarms.exe.3 FTP Client and 2. double-click an entry to view the detailed information in the displayed Progress Management dialog box. Device Maintenance You can maintain the device panel on this tab page. For details. MML You can run MML commands on this tab page.3 Hierarchical Delimitation and 10. It includes the following functions: 10. Monitor You can monitor performance data on this tab page. see 5 Alarm/Event Management. Ltd.3 Batch Processing of MML Commands. FMA You can use this function to handle network faults.2 Fault Diagnosis. After changing the password.4 Obtaining Documentation Packages. For details. For details. NOTE To display the Progress tab page.2 Components of the MML Command Window. For details. Then.1. For details. type the password. the LMT automatically goes to the locked page. The setting prevents unauthorized users from using others' accounts to perform unauthorized configuration and maintenance. The system language of the LMT.. Logout of one user facilitates login of another user. Lock You can click it to lock the current operation page for security purposes. l Result File Save Path: You can specify a path for saving operation result files. Logout You can click it to log out the current user without exiting from the LMT. and then click OK or press Enter to log in to the LMT workspace again. see 2. If there are no mouse or keyboard operations during the specified time period. l Language Setting: You can select a language as required. you can enter texts in the selected language on the LMT. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. l Auto Lock Time(s): You can specify a time period as required.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT Component Description System Settings You can click it to modify the language. The default path is C:\Web LMT\MBSC \output. the LMT is locked.5 File Manager. auto lock time. l You can click in the blank area on the web page or press Enter. About You can click it to display the current version of the LMT. For details. Online Help The LMT provides the following two types of online help: l Online help system l MML help Table 2-5 describes the contents and startup method of the LMT online help. however. NOTE l After you click Lock on the toolbar. does not change. File Manager You can click it to upload files from the LMT to the OMU and download files from the OMU to the LMT. 14 . and path for saving result files. After setting a language successfully. l Command function l Note l Parameter l Example l Output description (for query commands only) 2. Press Enter or click Assist..BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT Table 2-5 Description of LMT online help Name Content Startup Method Online help system Provides the following information: If the Microsoft Internet Explorer is used: l LMT online help l In a displayed dialog box on the LMT.4 Obtaining Documentation Packages This section describes how to query and obtain documentation packages of the corresponding product version. l Available at support. l Library Version: Version number of the documentation package of the current product version. l On the LMT main page. click Obtain Documentation List. press F1 to display help information about the dialog box. press Help on the LMT main page to display online help information. l Event reference MML help Provides the following information about each MML command: Type an MML command in the Command Input field. Help information about the command is displayed on the Help Information tab page. 15 .com: Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Product Version: Current product version number. l Alarm reference If the FireFox Explorer is used. press F1 or click Help to display online help information. and then click the Help Information tab. Ltd.huawei. GUI l Library Name: Name of a documentation package of the current product version. Startup Method On the toolbar of the LMT. 5 Operation Rights. Ltd.huawei.5 File Manager The File Manager. see 3. 16 . a component of the LMT application. click Export. click File Manager. and you can obtain it from http://support. l (For initial use only) You have downloaded the HedEx Lite from the homepage of http:// support. Startup Method On the toolbar of the LMT. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Then. For example. NOTE Users' operation rights to the File Manager depend on their rights settings.1. l ADMINISTRATOR-level and admin-level users have full operation rights to the File Manager. Function You can use either of the following methods to download documentation packages: l Search for required documentation packages at http://support. They are not authorized to upload or delete files. – No indicates that the documentation package has not been released at http:// support.huawei.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT – Yes indicates that the documentation package has been released globally. and download them.huawei.hdxi file. ensure that: l You have obtained the account information for visiting http://support.com to your PC and the HedEx Lite is running properly.huawei. l In the Obtain Documentation List dialog box. double-click the exported ..huawei.com and download them. GUI Figure 2-2 shows the window of the File Manager.com. search for required documentation packages at http:// support.com and can visit the website successfully. l Users at other levels can only use the File Manager to download files. NOTE Before using this function. enables you to upload files from the LMT to the OMU and download files from the OMU to the LMT. 2.huawei.com and you can contact Huawei engineers to obtain it. you can use the File Manager to obtain logs and upload data configuration files.com. For descriptions of the operation rights. When you rightclick on a selected folder. You can type the path of a required file or file folder in the Rapid Positioning field. l A slash (/) in front of the root directory is optional.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT Figure 2-2 File Manager window Table 2-6 describes the components of the File Manager window. Path Switch Area This area is used to directly navigate to a file folder or file. Ltd. File Navigation Tree This area displays all directories that users can view and process on the server. a shortcut menu containing the following choices is displayed: l Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Refresh Whole Folder Tree: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. /bam/common/ log). 4 File processing area Provides buttons for processing files. and press Enter or click Go to navigate to the required path. NOTE l You can only type a path under the root directory on the File Manager server (for example. 2 File navigation tree Displays files on the OMU in a navigation tree. 3 File list Provides detailed information about files on the OMU. Table 2-6 Components of the File Manager window Number Component Description 1 Path switch area Directly navigates to a file folder or file. 5 Task list Displays task processing information about files. 17 .. the icon of the folder for which the search criteria has been set is displayed as . Figure 2-3 Set Search Criteria dialog box – Modified time: You can specify a time from the year 2000 to 2038.. File Processing Area This area provides the following file processing buttons. End time must be later than Start time. Download. l Delete Search Criteria: Choose Delete Search Criteria to delete the search criteria set for a folder. all files will be displayed. l Set Search Criteria: When you choose Set Search Criteria. only files meeting the search criteria under the folder are displayed in the File Manager. Select required search criteria. the Set Search Criteria dialog box is displayed. right-click it. and choose Refresh. or Delete from the shortcut menu. and click Confirm. You can select a file. l After the search criteria are applied. l If no search criteria are selected. enter details about the selected search criteria. 18 . File List This area displays files in a selected folder. If both Start time and End time are set. dots. and underscores. numbers. NOTE Only files meeting specific search criteria are displayed under a folder that is configured with search criteria. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l The search criteria take effect only for the current folder.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT Choose Refresh Whole Folder Tree to refresh the navigation tree so that it displays the latest directory organizations. not for its sub-folders. – Files can be searched by File name. after you click Confirm or Delete Search Criteria. Ltd. The file name has a maximum of 50 bytes containing only English letters. as shown in Figure 2-3. Upload. NOTE l For easy differentiation. right-click it. l Set Display Columns: Right-click the blank area in the task list. the selected file is downloaded to the preset directory. Ltd. you are advised to concurrently download a maximum of 100 files and upload a maximum of 10 files. and select information to display in the submenu. l Download: Downloads a selected file from the OMU to the LMT PC. right-click it. l Delete: Deletes a selected file. the target directory for saving downloaded files does not change. l Continue Current Task: Select a suspended upload/download task in the task list. and choose Continue Current Task from the shortcut menu to resume the upload/download task. the selected file is downloaded to the preset directory. is used for uploading and downloading software and license files.. and choose Clear Current Task from the shortcut menu to remove the task from the task list. If the directory is specified before the download. l Directory: Changes the target folder for saving a downloaded file. Task List This area displays information about current tasks. l Upload: Uploads a selected file from the LMT PC to the OMU.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT l Refresh: Refreshes the list of files under the current folder. 19 . l Clear Current Task: Select a task. and choose Pause Current Task from the shortcut menu to suspend the current upload/download task. right-click it. You can perform the following operations on the tasks: l Clear Finished Task: Right-click the blank area in the task list and choose Clear Finished Task from the shortcut menu to clear all finished tasks from the task list.6 FTP Server The FTP server. choose Set Display Columns from the shortcut menu. When the bandwidth is 2 Mbit/s. a component of the LMT Offline Tools. l Pause Current Task: Select an ongoing upload/download task in the task list. NOTE If a target directory has been specified and the File Manager has been running before the target directory is specified. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2. If the directory is specified before the download. If these protocol types are not specified as the SSL protocol type. perform the following operations: l Click FTP Tool on the Toolbar of the LMT to download the executable application file SFTPServer. the FTP client cannot be properly connected to the FTP server..BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT Startup Method To start the FTP server. 20 . and TLSV1. TLSV1. Figure 2-4 FTP server configuration Table 2-7 describes the components of the FTP server configuration dialog box. l Users who log in to the LMT through a proxy server cannot use the FTP server. enter the initial password
[email protected]. double-click the executable file to start the FTP server. the password is hwbs@com. Then. Table 2-7 Components of the FTP server configuration dialog box Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Component Description User name Specifies the user name for logging in to the FTP server.0. the user name is admin. prompting you to modify the password of the FTP server.An operator account added by running the ADD OP command has FTP permissions. NOTE l If the FTP server is started for the first time. Ltd. GUI Figure 2-4 shows the FTP server configuration dialog box. an FTP password config dialog box is displayed. Password Specifies the user name for logging in to the FTP server. By default. it supports TLSV1.1.2 protocol types. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. By default. In the dialog box. and enter and confirm a new password. l When FTP server uses encrypted transmission. l Custom-level operators: FTP permissions of guest-level operators and permissions of MML command directories. click User-defined Command Group. Port number Specifies the number of the port used by the FTP server to lawfully intercept the information on the network. Figure 2-5 Starting the User-defined Command Group Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Operator-level operators: read permissions of log file directories.7 User-defined Command Group The User-defined Command Group is used to add commands to a specified command group so that an admin user can add operation rights for rights-limited users. you are only allowed to access files under the directory.. FTP Permissions Local operators have FTP permissions. run the LST FTPSSRV command and obtain the setting for the Command Port of FTPS Server. 2. Thread number Specifies the number of clients that can be connected to the FTP server concurrently. l Common-operator-level operators: read permissions of log file directories and data file directories. the LMT cannot be connected to the FTP server. When setting Working directory. 21 . Ltd.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT Component Description Working directory Specifies the working directory of the FTP server. l Administrator-level operators: read and write permissions of log file directories and data file directories and read permission of software files. ensure that no sensitive information is saved in the specified directory or the parent path of the FTP server installation directory is not specified as Working directory. If an incorrect port number is used. Startup Method On the toolbar of the LMT. as shown in Figure 2-5. l Guest-level operators: read permission of data file directories. and software file directories. NOTE To query the port number. data file directories. NOTE When using the FTP client. BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT NOTE Only the admin. If an authority-limited user performs this operation.. Figure 2-6 User-defined Command Group dialog box Table 2-8 describes the components of the User-defined Command Group dialog box. Ltd. and authorized CUSTOM-level users are allowed to perform this operation. Component Description 1 Command group selection area Used to select a command group ranging from G_15 to G_31. 22 . Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Table 2-8 Components of the User-defined Command Group dialog box No. NOTE All items under *GUI Authorization Items are marked with * to distinguish them from MML commands. an error message will be displayed. ADMINISTRATOR-level. 2 Authorization item area Displays all MML commands and encapsulated GUI commands. GUI Figure 2-6 shows the User-defined Command Group dialog box. indicating an operation failure. Ltd. 5 Options for displaying or hiding authorization items Display authorization items of MML commands. – If the LMT Offline Tools of an earlier version is required. 2. Display authorization items of the GUI function. and TrafficRecording Review Tool. and reinstall the current version. LMT Offline Tools. l The PC for installing the LMT Offline Tools complies with the specifications described in 2. 7 Apply or Cancel button Apply: Adds all the commands in the right pane to the current command group.8 LMT Software The Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) software consists of the FTP Client. Component Description 3 Button for adding authorization items Used to add the selected commands in the left pane to the right pane.. Cancel: Abandons previous operations on the current dialog box and closes it. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 4 Button for deleting authorization items Deletes the selected commands from the right pane. uninstall the current version.1 Configuration Requirements of the LMT PC. To improve operation efficiency. FTP Server. 6 Authorization item addition area Displays the commands to be added to the current command group.1 Installing LMT Offline Tools This section describes how to install the LMT Offline Tools on the LMT PC. Convert Management System.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT No. install the earlier version. 2. Performance Browser Tool. NOTE The command hierarchy in the right pane is the same as that in the left pane. l When the LMT Offline Tools of the current version have been installed: – If the LMT Offline Tools of a later version is required.: Displays or hides authorization items of MML commands.8. Prerequisites l A valid serial number for the LMT software has been obtained.: Displays or hides authorization items of MML commands. install it directly. 23 . These operations do not apply to patch versions of the same R version. you are advised to add less than 1024 commands at a time. When all the programs are installed. Click Yes to enable the system to automatically exit the LMT. and click OK. When all required files are copied. a dialog box is displayed. 24 . the installation path is that of the original LMT software and cannot be changed. NOTE When the installation is complete. prompting you to confirm the installation. Decompress the Hash compressed package to obtain the Product Version Number Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Use the default installation path or specify a custom installation path. indicating that the installation is complete. l To change the installation path. If you accept the agreement terms. displaying the file copy progress. displaying the progress of component initialization. A dialog box is displayed. the LMT Service Manager starts automatically. and click Next. Then. Click Finish. If you click No. 2.com/carrier/#click=main3 and enter BSC6900 in the search window. – The setup program runs automatically. download the required software version. use Hash values to check the integrity of the LMT Offline Tools by performing the following steps: 1. a dialog box is displayed. After downloading the LMT Offline Tools. double-click setup. select I accept these terms. A dialog box is displayed for entering the CD-KEY.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT Procedure l Using an installation CD-ROM 1. A dialog box is displayed. l If the LMT of another version or network element (NE) has been installed.huawei. 4. 9. Click Next. stop the LMT manually.rar") from the path for obtaining the installation package of the LMT Offline Tools. Select the components to be installed and click Next. a Warning dialog box is displayed.bat or setup. Confirm the installation information and click Next. Insert the installation CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. You are advised to select all components. 8. Select an installation language. If you do not accept the agreement terms. Enter the CD-KEY and click Next. Ltd.vbs in the installation directory of the CD-ROM. 6. – If the setup program fails to run automatically. A dialog box is displayed. Read the software certificate declarations. you must uninstall the existing LMT software. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Download the Hash compressed package ("Product Version Number Hash List. 3. and click Next.. l Using the installation package of the LMT Offline Tools Contact Huawei engineers to obtain the installation package of the LMT Offline Tools from http://support. prompting you to read the copyright notice. click Cancel to quit the installation. 5. The HUAWEI Local Maintenance Terminal is displayed. prompting you to specify the installation path. 10. If the LMT software is running. A dialog box is displayed. Log in to the LMT PC as an administrator. NOTE The default installation path is D:\HW LMT. 7. com/carrier/#click=main3 and enter hashmyfiles in the search window. ----End 2. Figure 2-8 Hash value calculated by the Hash value calculation tool 4. enables users to use a web browser to perform the following offline operations: use MML functions. open this file to obtain the Hash value for the installation package of the LMT Offline Tools. If the Hash values are different.8. Contact Huawei engineers to obtain the Hash value calculation tool from http:// support. Compare the Hash values obtained in Step 1 and Step 3. select the target language in the upper plane.mht file. Decompress hashmyfiles-1. contact Huawei engineers. Startup Method To start the LMT offline MML server. prepare MML scripts. download the Hash value calculation tool hashmyfiles-1. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.rar. 3. Then. In the displayed dialog box.exe. Ltd.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT Hash List.5.huawei. view MML commands.rar to obtain HashMyFiles. a component of the LMT Offline Tools. Then.8.. Introduction to the LMT Offline MML Server This section describes how to start the LMT offline MML server and the dialog box of the LMT offline MML server. Figure 2-7 Hash value for the installation package of the LMT Offline Tools 2. run HashMyFiles.2 LMT Offline MML The LMT offline MML tool. If the language of the displayed window is not in the target language.5. as shown in Figure 2-7. The calculated Hash value is displayed in the SHA-256 column. and choose file > Add Files. choose Start > All Programs > HUAWEI Local Maintenance Terminal > WebLMT OffLine MML on an LMT PC.8. and view LMT Online Help of the required version. 25 . If the Hash values are the same. as shown in Figure 2-8. the installation package of the LMT Offline Tools is complete and you can continue subsequent operations. Obtain the Hash value from the SHA-256 column.exe. select the installation package of the LMT Offline Tools. l Click Start to start the LMT offline MML server. Config tab page Configures the server port. Logging In to and Out of the LMT Offline MML Tool This section describes how to log in to the LMT offline MML tool and how to exit from it.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT GUI Figure 2-9 shows the dialog box of the LMT offline MML server. double-click the tray of the LMT PC to display the dialog box of the LMT offline MML server.. 26 . l Click Open Browser to display the login window of the LMT offline MML tool. NOTE If the LMT offline MML server has been started and minimized. l Click Stop to stop the LMT offline MML server. Ltd. icon on the system Figure 2-9 WebServer dialog box Table 2-9 describes the components of the WebServer dialog box. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Table 2-9 Description of the LMT offline MML server Component Description Routine tab page Displays the status of the LMT offline MML server. About tab page Displays information about the LMT offline MML tool. NOTE l Click Hide to minimize the LMT offline MML server to the system tray of the LMT PC. The login window of the LMT offline MML tool is displayed. click Logout at the top right corner of the LMT main page. and obtain the LMT online help. GUI Figure 2-10 shows the LMT offline MML window. The new port number takes effect only after the LMT offline server is restarted. Step 3 Specify OMType.1:Port into the address bar of the web browser. Version. Procedure Step 1 Install and start the LMT offline MML tool on the LMT PC. The default port number is 810.0. click the language-switching button at the top right corner of the login window.0. and Pattern in the login window and click Login. NOTE l Port specifies the port number of the LMT offline MML server. l To restore the default setting used during installation. l You can change the default port number on the Config tab page of the server.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT Prerequisites The LMT offline MML server has been started. ----End Introduction to the LMT Offline MML Window When you use a web browser to log in to the LMT offline MML. Ltd. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 4 To exit from the LMT offline MML tool. This section describes the LMT offline MML window. NOTE l To switch display language between English and Chinese. 27 . Step 2 Enter http://127. click Reset. make MML scripts. you can view MMLs.. Help Information tab page Displays help information about MML commands. Command Input field Displays all the MML commands available on the system in the drop-down list. Table 2-10 Components of the LMT offline MML window Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Component Description Navigation Tree Displays all MML commands. Operation Record tab page Displays commands that have been run. Parameter area Displays parameters of a selected or an input command. Ltd. Manual editing area Displays manually input MML commands and their parameters. NOTE The Send Time displayed in the operation record is the system time of the LMT PC. Parameters in red are mandatory and those in black are optional. Search Uses keywords to search for MML commands. set parameters for it. 28 . Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. When you double-click an MML command. You can select an MML command from the dropdown list or enter an MML command. History Command field Displays all commands executed during the current login and relevant parameters.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT Figure 2-10 LMT offline MML window Table 2-10 describes the components of the LMT offline MML window. Before running the command. the MML command is displayed in the Command Input field. a component of the LMT Offline Tools. choose Start > All Programs > HUAWEI Local Maintenance Terminal > FTP Client. NOTE The LMT offline MML tool provides an association function. GUI Figure 2-11 shows the window of the FTP client. You can use the same method to clear or save all MML commands. 29 . About Click About to obtain version information about the LMT offline MML. relevant commands are displayed for reference.3 FTP Client The FTP client. and choose a menu item to clear or save the MML command.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT Component Description Help Click Help to obtain LMT online help of the required version. right-click it. Procedure Step 1 Log in to the LMT offline MML tool. Startup Method On the LMT PC. Ltd. and set the parameters. For details. l You can select an MML command in the Operation Record area. When you are typing a command in the Command Input field. enables the LMT to communicate with the FTP server through FTP or FTPs. You can use the FTP client to obtain logs and upload data configuration files.. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ----End 2. Making MML Scripts Offline This section describes how to make MML scripts offline. Step 2 Enter an MML command in the LMT offline MML window. see Logging In to and Out of LMT Offline MML.8. click Assist. NOTE l The command input and parameter settings saved to the local file by clicking Save do not overwrite the existing information saved in the local file. Step 3 Click Save to save the MML command and parameter settings to the local MML script file. NOTE To query the port number. password.. user name. and mode. 2 Toolbar Provides the shortcut icons for system operations.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT Figure 2-11 FTP Client window Table 2-11 describes the components of the FTP Client window. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) 4 Local directory list window Displays the directory structure of the current computer. Ltd. 30 . 7 Prompt information window Displays information. Table 2-11 Components of the FTP Client window Number Component Description 1 Menu bar Provides entries for system operations. the LMT cannot be connected to the FTP server. 5 Server file list window Lists the files and file folders stored in the connected FTP server. If an incorrect port number is used. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 3 Server input area Includes the server name. run the LST FTPSSRV command and obtain the setting for the Command Port of FTPS Server. port number. 6 Local file list window Lists the files and file folders stored in the current computer. such as the connection status of the FTP server and the operation descriptions. GUI Figure 2-12 shows the window of the Convert Management System.4 Convert Management System The Convert Management System is a component of the LMT Offline Tools. On the LMT PC. Download this package from www.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT 2. The Convert Management System uses the Ethernet port to communicate with the OMU and the serial port to communicate with the alarm box.microsoft.com. and reports alarms if any. Figure 2-12 Convert Management System window Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.8. Startup Method NOTE If Microsoft Visual C++ 2005 SP1 Redistributable Package (X86) is not installed on the LMT PC. 31 . l Detects the real-time status of the connection between the LMT and the OMU and that between the LMT and the serial port of the alarm box. and alarm box status information. It enables communication between the OMU and the alarm box and is used to transfer the alarm information. Function The Convert Management System provides the following functions: l Forwards alarm operation instructions from the LMT. To connect the LMT to the alarm box.. the Convert Management System must be started. alarm box control information. choose Start > All Programs > HUAWEI Local Maintenance Terminal > Convert Management System. the Convert Management System cannot start. Ltd. l Forwards alarm information to the alarm box. Figure 2-13 Performance Browse Tool window Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. a component of the LMT Offline Tools.. choose Start > All Programs > HUAWEI Local Maintenance Terminal > Performance Browser Tool.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT Table 2-12 describes the components of the Convert Management System window. Table 2-12 Components of the Convert Management System window Number Component Description 1 Menu bar Provides entries for system operations. 32 .8. GUI Figure 2-13 shows the window of the Performance Browse Tool.5 Performance Browser Tool The Performance Browser Tool. 2. Ltd. Startup Method On the LMT PC. 3 Information output window Displays the real-time output of the Convert Management System. 2 Toolbar Provides the shortcut icons for system operations. is used to parse descriptive performance files in the OMU. . is used to review trace and monitor data. 2. 3 Measurement statistics window Provides statistical measurement files in a tree structure.8. You can click Help to obtain information about how to use the tool. 4 Detailed information window Displays the detailed information about a selected performance counter file. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 33 .BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT The Table 2-13 describes the components of the Performance Browse Tool window. 2 Toolbar Provides the shortcut icons for system operations. GUI Figure 2-14 shows the window of the TrafficRecording Review Tool. Ltd. a component of the LMT Offline Tools.6 TrafficRecording Review Tool The TrafficRecording Review Tool. Startup Method On the LMT PC. Table 2-13 Components of the Performance Browse Tool window Number Component Description 1 Menu bar Provides entries for system operations. choose Start > All Programs > Huawei Local Maintenance Terminal > TrafficRecording Review Tool. Ltd. 3 Service data retrieval window Displays trace and monitor tasks.. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2 Toolbar Provides the shortcut icons for system operations. Table 2-14 Components of the TrafficReview window Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Number Component Description 1 Menu bar Provides entries for system operations.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 2 Introduction to LMT Figure 2-14 TrafficReview window Table 2-14 describes the components of the TrafficReview window. 34 . including principles of operation rights management. user accounts.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 3 Operation Rights Management 3 Operation Rights Management About This Chapter This chapter describes principles of managing operation rights. modify.1 Concepts Related to Operation Rights Management This section describes concepts related to operation rights management. user passwords. 3. and operation time limits.3 Management of User Passwords This section describes how to define and query login password policies. 3. and delete external user accounts on the BSC6900 LMT. user types. and command groups. Ltd. or change the password of an external user account.. 3. 35 . Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. command groups.4 Management of Command Groups This section describes how to query and rename command groups and how to change commands in a command group.2 Management of User Accounts This section describes how to create. 3. change the password of an active user. operation rights. For system security reasons. The operation and maintenance (O&M) subsystem of the BSC6900 allows multiple users to perform operations concurrently.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 3 Operation Rights Management 3. operation rights. and authorized CUSTOM-level users can create external user accounts and set passwords for these accounts. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Definition of User Passwords To ensure system security.1.. see Setting Password Policies. the following aspect of operation rights must be managed and controlled: l User identities: A user must enter a correct user name and password to log in to the system. l Operation time limits: An operation limit specifies the times when a user is permitted to perform operations. Ltd. user types.1 Principles of Operation Rights Management This section describes principles of managing the operation rights of the BSC6900 LMT in terms of user identities.1 Concepts Related to Operation Rights Management This section describes concepts related to operation rights management. 3. A user must enter a valid user name and correct password to log in to the LMT and then the OMU. and permissions required to change passwords. initial password settings. ADMINISTRATOR-level users. l User rights: Users of different levels are permitted to use different command groups for GUI or MML command operations. It includes definitions.1. Default Password The default password for user admin is mbsc@com. For details. 3. each user account is password protected. operation rights. User admin. the default password. ADMINISTRATOR-level users can set password complexity. Initial Password Setting The password of user admin is set during the installation of the OMU software. user passwords. and operation time limits. and operation time limits.2 User Passwords This section describes user passwords of the BSC6900 LMT. 36 . including principles of operation rights management. command groups. unblock. for example. to reset. User admin. Table 3-1 Command groups Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Command Group Function G_0 Used to query system information. G_5 Used to manage alarms. see 3. for example. command groups. element management system (EMS). to manage patches. To change the password of user admin. G_6 Used to query performance statistics. Ltd.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 3 Operation Rights Management Permissions to Change Passwords All users can change their own passwords. G_1 Used to manage system information. for example. These commands usually start with DSP. For details. logs. G_4 Used to query alarm information. to activate a performance task file or to upload a performance statistical file. G_8 Used to query equipment information. for example. 3.3 Command Groups The BSC6900 provides 15 command groups (G_0 to G_14) with different functions. G_3 Used to configure data. such as user groups. for example.3 Changing the Password of the Active User Account and 3. time zone. such as equipment status. and authorized CUSTOM-level users can change the passwords of all external user accounts. run the MOD OP command on the U2000. to query a performance statistical file or task file. Daylight Saving Time (DST).3. These commands usually start with LST. Network Time Protocol (NTP). Table 3-1 describes these command groups. to query the trace tasks or to create/delete/start a trace task. for example.1. to manually clear alarms or to set alarm severity.. and time zone. G_12 Used to manage software. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. G_10 Used to trace or monitor the signaling flows on the control plane and the user plane. G_2 Used to query configuration information. or switch over boards. ADMINISTRATOR-level users. and batch configuration.3. such as user groups. for example. block.4 Changing the Password of an External User Account. G_9 Used to manage equipment. to configure data for a newly added board. G_7 Used to manage performance. 37 . G_11 Used to modify settings of integrated equipment panels. Only authorized EMS users can log in to the BSC6900 using the LMT. 38 . 3. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For BSC6900 operations. modified. which are described in Table 3-2. They are created. For operations related to these command groups. also termed super administrator. such as attributes and boards. You can log in to the BSC6900 when you are installing the BSC6900 system or when the OMU is disconnected from the U2000. l EMS users: Managed by the U2000.5 Operation Rights This section describes operation rights of the admin account and external user accounts of the BSC6900 LMT. The admin account is an administrator-level account and cannot be modified or deleted. l Local users: Managed independently by the BSC6900 LMT. see 3.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 3 Operation Rights Management Command Group Function G_13 Used to query base station information. 3. authenticated.. External User Accounts There are five types of external user accounts.1. and authorized by the U2000. authorized EMS users can also log in to the U2000 server through the U2000 client. The password of this user is set during the installation of the OMU. Built-In Administrator Account User admin is a built-in administrator account.4 Management of Command Groups. Each type of external user accounts is granted different operation rights.4 User Types You can log in to the BSC6900 LMT as a Local user or an EMS user. User admin is a default local user. to manage base station software or to reset base stations. G_14 Used to manage base stations.1. for example. Ltd. 3. G_7. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. G_13. G_4. G_5. G_8.6 Operation Time Limits This section defines operation time limits for a user to perform operations on the BSC6900 LMT and explains their principles and required permissions. G_0. G_12. G_2. and authorized CUSTOM-level users can add or delete external user accounts. Definition of Operation Time Limits An operation time limit specifies the times when a user can perform operations on the LMT. G_10. and G_13 Data query USER G_0.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 3 Operation Rights Management Table 3-2 External user accounts Level Assigned Command Group Operation Rights Remarks GUEST G_0. G_3. G_10. G_8. G_4. G_7.. 39 . and G_14 l Operation rights of USERlevel users ADMINISTRA TOR G_0. G_6. and G_14 All operation rights CUSTOM Command groups are assigned when the account is being created. G_12. G_6. G_2. G_9. and G_14 l Operation rights of GUESTlevel users The operation rights are predefined by the system and cannot be changed. G_2. G_8. G_11. G_13. G_11. G_9. l An authorized CUSTOM-level user can perform operations on user accounts and command groups only by running MML commands. G_10. G_13.1. G_12. G_11. G_2. G_7. G_4. G_3. Different CUSTOM-level users may have different operation rights. G_1. NOTE l User admin. Ltd. G_8. G_5. G_4. ADMINISTRATOR-level users. G_6. Specified when the account is being created OPERATOR l System operation and maintenance (O&M) l Data configuration The operation rights can be changed. G_6. G_9. modify. Table 3-3 provides some examples of operation time limits. 3. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2. A user with this setting can perform operations on the LMT at any time. If no time limits are set for the account. Permissions to Set Operation Time Limits User admin.1 Creating an External User Account This section describes how to create an external user account.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 3 Operation Rights Management l No operation limits are imposed on user admin.. a user type. day. ADMINISTRATOR-level users. Principle of Operation Time Limits An operation time limit is defined by date. and delete external user accounts on the BSC6900 LMT. Only user admin. the account can perform operations on the LMT at any time. 40 . User admin can perform operations on the LMT at any time.2 Management of User Accounts This section describes how to create. Table 3-3 Examples of operation time limits SN Date Day Time Permitted Operation Time 1 2013-02-01 to 2014-02-01 Monday to Friday 8:00:00 to 18:00:00 8:00:00 to 18:00:00 on Monday through Friday from 2013-02-01 to 2014-02-01 2 - Saturday and Sunday - Any time on Saturdays and Sundays 3 - - - No operation time limits are imposed on the user. 3. l An operation time limit can be set for an external user account when the account is being created. Ltd. ADMINISTRATOR-level users. Prerequisites You have logged in to the LMT with an authorized account. and command groups (for CUSTOM-level users only) for the new user account. You are required to set a password. and authorized CUSTOM-level users can set or change operation time limits of all external user accounts. and some CUSTOMlevel users are authorized to create external user accounts. and time. an operation time limit. and some CUSTOM-level users are authorized to modify external user accounts. Procedure Step 1 Run the RMV OP command to delete an external user account. Only user admin. user password.2 Modifying an External User Account This section describes how to modify the attributes of an external user account. Prerequisites You have logged in to the LMT with an authorized account. Procedure Step 1 Run the MOD OP command to modify the attributes of an external user account.3 Deleting an External User Account This section describes how to delete an external user account. ----End Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. operation rights. and operation time limit. and some CUSTOM-level users are authorized to delete external user accounts. Only user admin.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 3 Operation Rights Management Procedure Step 1 Run the ADD OP command to create an external user account. ----End 3. ADMINISTRATOR-level users.2. 41 . ----End 3. Ltd. ADMINISTRATOR-level users. Context NOTICE User admin is the permanent built-in user account and cannot be deleted. The new password takes effect at the next login. including the user name..2. user level. NOTICE The new external user account must be different from any of the existing user accounts. Modifications of other attributes take effect immediately. Procedure Step 1 Run the LST PWDPOLICY command to query policies for setting login passwords. Login password policies set restrictions on the minimum length and complexity of a password. Procedure Step 1 Run the SET PWDPOLICY command to define policies for setting login passwords. Ltd. and click OK.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 3 Operation Rights Management 3.3.. Prerequisites You have logged in to the LMT with an authorized account.3 Changing the Password of the Active User Account This section describes how to change the password of the active user account. Only ADMINISTRATOR-level users can define policies for setting login passwords. Prerequisites You have logged in to the LMT. The Password dialog box is displayed.3 Management of User Passwords This section describes how to define and query login password policies. ----End 3. ----End 3. Step 2 In the displayed Password dialog box.3. Prerequisites You have logged in to the LMT with an authorized account.2 Querying Login Password Policies This section describes how to query policies for setting login passwords.3. or change the password of an external user account. enter the current password in the Old Password field. The new password takes effect at the next login. 3. 42 . Procedure Step 1 On the toolbar of the LMT main page. click Password. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. change the password of an active user. enter the new password in the New Password and Confirm Password fields.1 Defining Login Password Policies This section describes how to define policies for setting login passwords. ----End 3.2 Renaming Command Groups This section describes how to rename command groups.4.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 3 Operation Rights Management NOTE You are advised to change the password at your first login and then change the password every three months. Procedure Step 1 Run the LST CCG to query the command groups. Only the admin. Only user admin.4 Management of Command Groups This section describes how to query and rename command groups and how to change commands in a command group. Procedure Step 1 Run the MOD OP command to change the password of an external user account.4 Changing the Password of an External User Account This section describes how to change the password of an external user account. and authorized CUSTOM-level users can rename command groups. Prerequisites You have logged in to the LMT with an authorized account.4. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and authorized CUSTOM-level users can change the password of an external user account. 43 .1 Querying a Command Group There are 16 command groups G_0 to G_14 and G_NICThere are 13 command groups G_0 to G_12. 3. ----End 3.3. Prerequisites You have logged in to the LMT with an account authorized for this operation. ----End 3. Prerequisites You have logged in to the LMT with an authorized account. ADMINISTRATOR-level. ADMINISTRATOR-level users. Ltd.. ADMINISTRATORlevel users. and authorized CUSTOM-level users can query the information about the command groups. Only user admin. BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 3 Operation Rights Management Procedure Step 1 Run the LST CCGN command to query the name of a command group. ----End Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ----End 3. ADMINISTRATOR-level users. Step 2 Run the SET CCGN command to rename the command group. l Run the RMV CCG command to remove commands from a command group.. Only user admin. and authorized CUSTOM-level users can change commands in a command group.4. Ltd. Prerequisites You have logged in to the LMT with an authorized account. Procedure l Run the ADD CCG command to add commands to a command group. 44 .3 Changing Commands in a Command Group This section describes how to change commands in a command group. 45 . OPERATOR-level users. or perform batch data configuration without being affected by other users. undo/redo operations on the BSC6900. data configuration rights.3 Batch Processing of MML Commands This section describes how to run multiple MML commands simultaneously. The data configuration mode can be effective or non-effective. components of the MML command window. 4. 4. and CUSTOM-level users entitled to use command group G_3 (used for data configuration).BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 4 Running MML Commands 4 Running MML Commands About This Chapter This chapter describes how to run MML commands on the LMT for operation and maintenance of the BSC6900. 4. and configuration rollback. 4..2 Running a Single MML Command This section describes how to run a single MML command for routine configuration and maintenance.1 Concepts Related to MML Commands This section presents an introduction to MML commands.8 Undoing/Redoing a Single Data Configuration Action This section describes how to undo and redo a single data configuration action. 4.7 Obtaining Data Configuration Rights This section describes how to obtain exclusive data configuration rights when you plan to perform data configuration. Ltd. 4. 4. Batch processing of MML commands allows you to use a function or perform an operation by running a prepared group of MML commands all at the same time. 4. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Only the U2000 users and users of the following types can obtain these data configuration rights: admin.6 Querying Data Configuration Rights This section describes how to query the status of data configuration rights.4 Setting MML Parameters This section describes how to set the MML parameters as required. ADMINISTRATOR-level users.5 Querying Data Configuration Modes This section describes how to query the data configuration mode of a subrack. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 46 ..BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 4 Running MML Commands 4. Ltd.9 Undoing/Redoing Multiple Data Configuration Actions This section describes how to undo and redo multiple data configuration actions at a time. BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 4 Running MML Commands 4.1 Concepts Related to MML Commands This section presents an introduction to MML commands, components of the MML command window, data configuration rights, and configuration rollback. 4.1.1 Introduction to MML Commands This section describes MML commands used for operation and maintenance of the BSC6900. An MML command consists of two parts, an action and an object. For example, ADD OP, wherein ADD is the action part and OP is the object part. Table 4-1 describes actions that can be performed by MML commands. Table 4-1 Actions of the MML commands Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Action Description ACT Activate ADD Add ADT Audit BEG Begin BKP Back up BLK Block CHK Check CLR Clear CMP Compare COL Collect CON Confirm DEA Deactivate DLD Download DSP List EST Establish EXP Export FMT Format FOC Obtain HO Hand over Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 47 BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 4 Running MML Commands Action Description INH Inhibit INS Install LCK Lock LOD Load LOP Loopback test LST List MOD Modify PING Ping REL Release REQ Request RUN Run RMV Remove RST Reset SET Set STR Start/Open STP Stop/Close STA Collect statistics SWP Swap SYN Synchronize TRC Trace UBL Unblock UIN Uninhibit ULD Upload ULK Unlock 4.1.2 Components of the MML Command Window This section describes the components of the MML command window. Figure 4-1 shows the MML command window. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 48 BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 4 Running MML Commands Figure 4-1 MML command window Table 4-2 describes the components of the MML command window. Table 4-2 MML command window Number Component Description 1 Common Maintenance (Alt +C) tab page Displays system responses, such as command results. You can save command results and automatically scroll through the command results by clicking Save Results and Auto Scroll, respectively. You can also clear all command results by clicking Clear All. NOTE l The time information displayed at the beginning of command results is the system time of the OMU. l When you click Save Results, command results of only selected MML commands are saved. 2 Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Operation Record (Alt+R) tab page Displays commands that have been run. 3 Help Information (Alt+N) tab page Displays the help information of MML commands. 4 Manual editing area Displays manually input MML commands and their parameters. NOTE The Send Time in an operation record is the system time of the LMT PC. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 49 BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 4 Running MML Commands Number Component Description 5 History Command field Displays all commands executed during the current login and relevant parameters. 6 Command Input field Displays all the MML commands available on the system in the drop-down list. You can select an MML command from the drop-down list or enter an MML command. 7 Parameter area Displays parameters of a selected or an input command. Before running the command, set parameters for it. Parameters in red are mandatory. Those in black are optional. NOTE For details of MML commands and parameters, see the MML help. 4.1.3 Data Configuration Rights To avoid data conflict, the OMU manages data configuration rights to allow only one user to perform BSC6900 data configuration through the LMT or the U2000 at any time. The OMU manages data configuration rights as follows: l By default, all users have data configuration rights. l When a user runs the LCK CMCTRL command, data configuration rights are exclusive to this user. l When the user runs the ULK CMCTRL command, data configuration rights become available to all users. l If a user occupies exclusive data configuration rights for a long time but does not configure data, administrators can run the FOC CMCTRL command to forcibly release the data configuration rights to all users. l If a user who had exclusive data configuration rights exits from the LMT, the data configuration rights will be automatically made available to all users. 4.1.4 Data Configuration Rollback If a data configuration operation fails to achieve the expected result or even causes equipment or network problems, you can roll back the configuration to restore the system to a previous configuration status. The data configuration rollback function ensures that the operating of the BSC6900 is restored to normal as soon as possible. Definition of Data Configuration Rollback During data configuration, a rollback point is used to mark a data configuration status. You can run the ADD ROLLBACKPOINT command to manually configure rollback points. When data configuration rollback is required, you can select a rollback point to restore the system to a specific configuration status as required. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 50 BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 4 Running MML Commands Operations of Data Configuration Rollback NOTICE A user cannot perform data configuration rollback in any of the following cases: l The user does not obtain the data configuration rights because another user who has occupied exclusive data configuration rights does not release the data configuration rights by running the ULK CMCTRL command. l The quick configuration mode has been enabled by running the SET QUICKCFG command. l Batch configuration is performed by running the RUN BATCHFILE command. The following data configuration rollback operations are available: l Undo a single configuration action: This operation is performed to undo a previous configuration action. Up to 10 of the most recent effective configuration actions can be undone. l Redo a single configuration action: This operation is performed to redo a previously undone configuration action. Up to 10 of the most recent effective configuration actions can be redone. l Undo multiple configuration actions: This operation is performed to simultaneously undo multiple configuration actions that have taken effect. After the undo operation, the system is restored to the configuration status at a specified rollback point. l Redo multiple configuration actions: This operation is performed to simultaneously redo multiple configuration actions that have been undone. After the redo operation, the system is restored based on either the configuration status at the specified rollback point or the final configuration status from before undoing the configurations. 4.2 Running a Single MML Command This section describes how to run a single MML command for routine configuration and maintenance. Prerequisites You have logged in to the LMT. Context To run an MML command, you can: l Enter an MML command in the Command Input field. l Select a previously executed command from the History Command drop-down list. l Select an MML command from the MML Command navigation tree. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 51 BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 4 Running MML Commands l Copy an MML command script to the Manual Editing area. l Entering an MML command in the Command Input field Procedure l 1. Enter an MML command in the Command Input field. When you are entering a command, related commands are displayed in a drop-down list. You can select the required command from the drop-down list. 2. Press Enter or click Assist to display parameters associated with the command. 3. Specify parameter values. 4. Press F9 or click Exec to run the command. The command result is displayed on the Common Maintenance tab page. Selecting a previously executed command from the History Command drop-down list 1. Select a previously executed command from the drop-down list of history commands. to select the previous command. Press F8 or click (Press F7 or click select the next command.) l to 2. (Optional) Change parameter values in the command parameter area. 3. Press F9 or click Exec to run the command. The command result is displayed on the Common Maintenance tab page. Selecting an MML command from the MML Command navigation tree 1. Double-click an MML command in the MML Command navigation tree. 2. Specify parameter values. 3. Press F9 or click Exec to run the command. The command result is displayed on the Common Maintenance tab page. NOTE l Parameters in red are mandatory. Those in black are optional. l To obtain general information about a parameter, place the cursor on the input box for the parameter. l If the execution of a command fails, the command result displayed on the Common Maintenance tab page is in red. l Copying an MML command script to the Manual Edit area 1. Copy an MML command script with required parameter values and paste it to the Manual Edit area. 2. Press F9 or click Exec to run the command. The command result is displayed on the Common Maintenance tab page. ----End 4.3 Batch Processing of MML Commands This section describes how to run multiple MML commands simultaneously. Batch processing of MML commands allows you to use a function or perform an operation by running a prepared group of MML commands all at the same time. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 52 NOTE When the LMT locks its operation screen. Prerequisites l You have logged in to the LMT. 53 .. l You have obtained the required data configuration rights. which contains a group of command scripts used for conducting a specific task. The following two batch processing modes are available: l Immediate batch processing: A batch file is run immediately.7 Obtaining Data Configuration Rights.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 4 Running MML Commands Context A batch file (also called data script file) is a plain text file. l Scheduled batch processing: A batch file is automatically run at a specific time set by users in advance. ----End Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. see 4. enter the password of the file to import the file for batch processing. The command scripts in a batch file are executed in sequence.ecf file is selected. For details. The Batch tab page is displayed. Prompt when an error occurs is selected. By default. to select the prepared batch file. Step 2 In the editing area. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. the following commands will fail: l ADD OP.. and MOD OP l SET OPLOCK l SET OPSW l SET PWDPOLICY l ULK USR l SET WEBLOGINPOLICY 4. Step 3 Click Settings to set parameters. or click Open. NOTE If an encrypted . click Batch.3. You are advised to retain the default setting. click New and enter the MML commands to be executed at a time. RMV OP. Step 4 Click Go to run the commands. NOTE You can set Execution Type. Ltd..1 Immediate Batch Processing of MML Commands This section describes how to enable the system to immediately run a group of MML commands in a batch file simultaneously. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In the displayed Select Upload File dialog box. an FTP connection is established between the local PC and the OMU. Enter the put BATCHFILE. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) 5. 6.txt saved in disk D is uploaded to the /bam/ version_a/ftp directory in the OMU active work area.txt command to upload the file. 4. select the BATCHFILE. Start File Manager by referring to File Manager. The Batch tab page is displayed. Step 2 Upload the MML command script file to the /ftp directory in the OMU active work area. choose Start > Run. On a local LMT PC. and click OK.. For details. l You have obtained FTP user name and password. Enter the ftp IP address command to apply for connection to the OMU. 3. 2. NOTE The FTP user name must be the fixed value FtpUsr. The FTP password was set during installation of product software. 3. Type the d: command and press Enter to switch the local disk to disk D.txt file saved in local disk D and click Open to upload the file. 54 . the following path changes into version_a. Click Save to save the edited batch file. 2.3. Enter the quit command to disconnect FTP connection when the file upload is complete. the following path changes into version_b accordingly. IP address is the IP address of the OMU. 7. Prerequisites l You have logged in to the LMT.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 4 Running MML Commands 4. Choose Root > bam > version_a > ftp in the left area of the displayed window to navigate to the ftp directory. Procedure Step 1 Edit a batch file. Ltd. 3. Enter the cd /bam/version_a/ftp command to switch to the directory of OMU active work area. Assume that the MML command script file BATCHFILE. Click Batch on the LMT main page. enter cmd. If the authentication passes. 2. Click New and type a batch of MML commands in the input box. There are the following two upload ways: l Through File Manager on the LMT 1. Then click Upload. 1. When the active workspace of the OMU is version_a.7 Obtaining Data Configuration Rights. l Through command lines 1.2 Scheduled Batch Processing of MML Commands This section describes how to enable the system to automatically run a batch of MML commands in a batch file at a moment of a day specified by an operator in advance. Enter the FTP user name and password. When the active workspace of the OMU is version_b. see 4. l You have obtained the data configuration rights. You can run the MOD FTPPWD command to change the password. FREQ=ONTIME. ----End 4. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. TYPE=ALL_END_RETURN. thereby improving maintenance efficiency. TM=09&56. NOTE l Add scheduled batch processing tasks ADD SCHTSK: ID=1. Prerequisites l You have logged in to the LMT. SD=2010&08&30.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 4 Running MML Commands Step 3 Add scheduled batch processing tasks by running the ADD SCHTSK and ADD SUBTSK commands.txt is the name of a batch file that needs to be run at a scheduled time and saved in the ftp directory of the OMU active work area... result_add. enter the password of the file to import the file for batch processing. l A batch file is available.txt is the name of the result file. TSKN="batch". to open a prepared batch file.txt\"". l BATCHFILE. This function helps locate incorrect MML commands.txt\". RSTF= \"result_add.3. SUBID=2..ecf file is selected. ADD SUBTSK: ID=1. NOTE You can click Open. Context The syntax check can locate the following errors: l Missing colon l Missing semicolon l Incorrect MML command l No authority to execute a correct MML command l Redundant parameters l Incorrect parameters Procedure Step 1 Click New to create a batch file and input MML commands in the manual editing area.3 Syntax Check This section describes how to check the syntax of MML commands before running a group of MML commands. If an encrypted . 55 . Step 2 Click Analyze Syntax to check the syntax of the batch file. Ltd. TSKN="batch". SCMD="RUN BATCHFILE: SRCF=\"BATCHFILE. right-click it. The Settings dialog box is displayed. Step 3 In the Result dialog box. If an error occurs.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 4 Running MML Commands NOTE l If no errors occur. as shown in Figure 4-2. right-click in the batch file and choose Clear Analyze Mark from the shortcut menu. l To go to the command line with a syntactical error. ----End Follow-up Procedure To clear all syntactical analysis marks in a batch file. 4. Step 4 Click Close. 56 . indicating that no syntactical errors occur. Ltd. error l To check a single MML command line for syntactical errors in a batch file. indicating a line number for locating the error and error reasons for correcting the error. to save the result. select a single MML command line.. mark in front of a command line.. Figure 4-2 Setting MML Parameters Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If you move the mouse to the information is displayed. l After Analyze Syntax is executed.. the Result dialog box is displayed. Procedure Step 1 On the Common Maintenance tab page in the MML window. the Information dialog box is displayed. click Save As. a mark is displayed in front of a command line with syntactical errors in the batch file. click Settings.4 Setting MML Parameters This section describes how to set the MML parameters as required. double-click the information in the Result dialog box. and choose Analyze Current Line from the shortcut menu. license verification is not performed. Procedure l Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Using menus Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. after the BSC resets or restarts. the mode switching will fail. perform the following operations: Run the SET CFGDATAEFFECTIVE command to set the data configuration mode to effective mode. When a subrack is newly added. To make the data configuration take effect on the subrack. not on the subrack.5 Querying Data Configuration Modes This section describes how to query the data configuration mode of a subrack. Step 3 Click OK to save the settings. NOTE The parameter settings in System and MML Command are stored on the server and client.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 4 Running MML Commands Step 2 Set parameters as required. NOTE You can use menus or MML commands to query the data configuration mode. Ltd. or perform CRC check on the host and OMU data. l You cannot configure the host data of the subrack. 57 . Therefore. the OMU checks whether the data configuration exceeds the limitations of the license. ----End 4. In this way. the parameter setting in System is restored to the default value but the parameter settings in MML Command remain unchanged. l You cannot query. subrack 0 is in non-effective mode by default. In addition.. When all subracks are in non-effective mode. data configured for the subrack takes effect immediately. and then run the RST SUBRACK command to reset the subrack. The data configuration mode can be effective or non-effective. When a subrack is in non-effective mode: l Data configured for the subrack takes effect only for the OMU. it is in non-effective mode by default. When the OMU is newly installed. When a subrack attempts to switch the data configuration mode from the non-effective mode to the effective mode. respectively. Context When a subrack is in effective mode. compare. If the data configuration exceeds the limitations of the license. the subrack can load the data configuration from the OMU so that the data takes effect on the subrack. run the FMT DATA command to generate the data configuration file for the subrack. Prerequisites You have logged in to the LMT. undo/redo operations on the BSC6900. and CUSTOM-level users entitled to use command group G_3 (used for data configuration). Procedure l Using menus 1. Figure 4-3 Data configuration mode l Using MML commands 1. Ltd. Prerequisites You have logged in to the LMT.7 Obtaining Data Configuration Rights This section describes how to obtain exclusive data configuration rights when you plan to perform data configuration. check the configuration mode of a subrack from the dropdown list on the tool bar. 58 . Context You can use menus or MML commands to query the status of data configuration rights. Run the LST CFGMODE command to query the current data configuration mode. ----End 4. On the LMT main page. ADMINISTRATOR-level users. Run the LST CMCTRL command to query the status of data configuration rights.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 4 Running MML Commands 1. l Check the status of data configuration rights displayed at the top right corner of the LMT main page. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. as shown in Figure 4-3.. OPERATOR-level users. Only the U2000 users and users of the following types can obtain these data configuration rights: admin. ----End 4.6 Querying Data Configuration Rights This section describes how to query the status of data configuration rights. Using MML commands 1. or perform batch data configuration without being affected by other users. go to Step 2. l After the data configuration is complete. go to Step 2. l If no user has exclusive data configuration rights. l If a user who had exclusive data configuration rights exits from the LMT. You can run the LCK CMCTRL command to obtain exclusive data configuration rights. For details. see 4. l The quick configuration mode has been disabled by running the SET QUICKCFG command.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 4 Running MML Commands Prerequisites l You have logged in to the LMT. l No batch commands have been executed. 59 . l By default. NOTE If an LMT user has exclusive data configuration rights of the BSC6900. In this case. user admin or ADMINISTRATOR-level users can run the FOC CMCTRL command to forcibly release the locked data configuration rights. you can run the ULK CMCTRL command to made the data configuration rights available to all users so that another user can run the LCK CMCTRL command obtain exclusive data configuration rights. Ltd. Context Procedure Step 1 Check whether the data configuration rights are available. however.8 Undoing/Redoing a Single Data Configuration Action This section describes how to undo and redo a single data configuration action. Therefore. Step 2 Run the LCK CMCTRL command to obtain the data configuration rights. can decrease the efficiency of running MML commands. Context Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ----End 4. In this case. l If a user has exclusive data configuration rights.6 Querying Data Configuration Rights. the data configuration rights will be automatically made available to all users. These operations. l You have obtained data configuration rights by running the LCK CMCTRL command. They can use the LMT or U2000 to configure data for the BSC6900. all users have data configuration rights. Prerequisites l You have logged in to the LMT. l Only one user can use the data configuration rights at any given time.. l You can undo or redo a data configuration action to fine-tune data configuration. once that user releases those configuration rights. another user can also run the LCK CMCTRL command to obtain exclusive data configuration rights. other LMT users cannot obtain the data configuration rights. Use either of the following methods to undo the latest configuration action: – On the toolbar of the LMT. however. a user can undo or redo a data configuration action only if the user has obtained exclusive data configuration rights. Context Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Redoing a single configuration action 1. Likewise. repeat Step 1. For a list of MML commands that can be undone or redone. see the description of the ADD ROLLBACKPOINT command. the Undo and Redo buttons on the top of the LMT window becomes unavailable and configuration actions performed before running the MML command also cannot be undone or redone. l You can undo or redo multiple data configuration actions simultaneously to fine-tune data configuration. l To prevent data conflicts. l Certain MML commands cannot be undone or redone. These operations. 2. 2. can decrease the efficiency of running MML commands. click Undo. ----End 4. the 10 most recent undone operations can be redone in the same manner.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 4 Running MML Commands when the quick configuration mode is enabled or when batch MML commands are running. l To undo multiple configuration actions. l The quick configuration mode has been disabled by running the SET QUICKCFG command. – Run the BEG REDO command. Therefore. when the quick configuration mode is enabled or when batch MML commands are running. do not undo or redo data configuration actions.9 Undoing/Redoing Multiple Data Configuration Actions This section describes how to undo and redo multiple data configuration actions at a time. l You have obtained data configuration rights by running the LCK CMCTRL command. 60 . click Redo. – Run the BEG UNDO command. repeat Step 1. Prerequisites l You have logged in to the LMT. Use either of the following methods to redo an undone action: – On the toolbar of the LMT. If you run such an MML command. l No batch commands have been performed. do not undo or redo multiple data configuration actions. Ltd. To redo multiple configuration actions.. l The most recent 10 effective single configuration actions can be undone one at a time. l Undoing a single configuration action Procedure 1. If you run such MML commands. before running configuration commands.000 commands from the initial rollback point to the final rollback point.000 configuration commands from the initial rollback point to the final rollback point at a time. l Multiple configuration actions can be redone simultaneously. the active workspace of the OMU will clear the information about the rollback stack and rollback points. After the multiple actions have been redone. Therefore. a user can undo or redo multiple data configuration action simultaneously only if the user has exclusive data configuration rights. Procedure Step 1 To undo/redo multiple data configuration actions simultaneously.. l Multiple configuration actions can be undone simultaneously. Step 3 Run the BEG FORWARD command to restore the system to the final configuration status before undoing the configurations. A user who has obtained the data configuration rights can set a maximum of five rollback points. Step 2 Run the BEG ROLLBACK command to restore the system to the configuration status at a specified rollback point. If the user releases the data configuration rights. run the ADD ROLLBACKPOINT command to set rollback points as required. ----End Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the rollback point specified by running the ADD ROLLBACKPOINT command will become invalid and undoing multiple data configuration actions at a time will fail. see the description of the ADD ROLLBACKPOINT command. NOTE An initial rollback point is the first rollback point set by a user. the system is restored based on the configuration status from a specified rollback point. Ltd. the system is restored based on either the configuration status at the specified rollback point or the final configuration status from before undoing the configuration actions. The final rollback point is automatically set to the latest configuration command successfully executed. remove the configured rollback point. For a list of MML commands that support undoing or redoing multiple configuration actions. 61 . l Certain MML commands do not support undoing or redoing multiple data configuration actions at a time. the undoing operation will fail and the LMT will display a failure message. before running such MML commands. The LMT allows you to undo a maximum of 10. After a multiple undo operation is applied.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 4 Running MML Commands l To prevent data conflicts. If there are more than 10. beside a fault alarm.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 5 Alarm/Event Management 5 Alarm/Event Management About This Chapter This section describes how to use the LMT to manage BSC6900 alarms/events. Unless otherwise specified. 5. These alarms are termed derived alarms.4 Managing the Alarm Masking Switch of Derived Alarms When a fault occurs. derived alarms are not reported to the LMT. thereby facilitating troubleshooting. These alarms cannot be queried on the LMT or U2000 but are still saved on the OMU. some related alarms may be generated. 5. thereby facilitating operation and maintenance. 5.5 Monitoring Alarms This section describes how to use the LMT to monitor alarm information in real time.1 Concepts Related to Alarm Management This section describes basic concepts related to alarm management.2 Managing Alarm Logs Alarm logs are used to record alarm details. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.6 Managing the Alarm Box The BSC6900 uses Huawei universal alarm box to provide audible and visual indications when an alarm is reported. This section describes how to manage alarm masking conditions. 5. 62 . By default. The alarm information is displayed in the Alarm Browse window on the LMT. The alarm box notifies maintenance engineers of alarms in time. alarm-managed objects. Ltd. The BSC6900 can mask derived alarms. 5. 5. They are collected by the OMU and stored in the OMU database. including the alarm type. and alarm box. alarm severity. limitations must be imposed on the number and the storage duration of alarm logs. To minimize storage requirements on the hard drive of the OMU. Alarm/event management helps you analyze alarms/events efficiently.3 Managing Alarm Masking Conditions Alarms that meet alarm masking conditions are not reported to the LMT or U2000. derived alarms are not stored on the OMU and cannot be queried.. Table 5-1 describes the two alarm types. Ltd. the alarm burst makes it hard for users to identify real fault alarms.1. thereby disturbing network monitoring. fault alarms are classified into: l Cleared alarms: If a fault has been rectified. l In engineering and maintenance scenarios. which is not necessarily a fault.1 Alarm Type The alarms in the BSC6900 system can be classified into fault alarms and event alarms. the corresponding alarm is an active alarm. equipment commissioning. the alarm remains active. capacity expansion. Fault alarms are of higher severity than event alarms and are classified into active and cleared alarms according to the fault status. This mechanism streamlines alarm management and facilitates operation and maintenance. An event alarm reflects the system condition (for example. Event alarm Event alarms record predefined events occurring during the operation of the system. alarm severity. After the congestion is relieved. 5. 63 . congestion) at a specific time. when congestion occurs in a cell. Before the congestion is relieved. Some event alarms are generated repeatedly and regularly. Table 5-1 Fault alarms and event alarms Alarm Type Description Fault alarm Fault alarms are caused by hardware faults or failures of major functions. Huawei puts forward the concept of "maintenance mode alarms". l Active alarms: If a fault has not been rectified. upgrades. Alarms triggered by engineering and maintenance operations are considered as maintenance mode alarms and handled in a special way. board fault or link fault. alarm-managed objects. To solve this problem. the corresponding alarm becomes a cleared alarm. and alarm box..1 Concepts Related to Alarm Management This section describes basic concepts related to alarm management.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 5 Alarm/Event Management 5. for example. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the alarm becomes a cleared alarm. including the alarm type. a large number of alarms are reported in a short period of time. Due to the absence of the mechanism for handling such alarms. For example. the system reports a fault alarm of cell congestion. and cutover. swapping. NOTE l Cleared alarms are stored in the OMU database and can be queried. According to fault status. such as site deployment. These alarms can be handled as required or further observed to prevent them from becoming critical. Table 5-2 describes the four alarm severities. 64 . These alarms need to be handled according to specific situations.1. For example. such as temperature. For example. humidity.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 5 Alarm/Event Management 5. 5. minor. Learn the operating status of the system from warning alarms and resolve problems as required. Table 5-2 Alarm severities Alarm Severity Definition Handling Requirement Critical Alarms of this severity are triggered by faults that affect services provided by the system and must be handled immediately even during nonworking hours. the performance of some devices or resources deteriorates.1.. Major Alarms of this severity are triggered by faults that affect the Quality of Service (QoS) and must be handled. some devices break down or some resources become unavailable.2 Alarm Severity Four alarm severities are available for fault alarms and event alarms of the BSC6900: critical. Minor Alarms of this severity are triggered by faults that are not serious enough to affect the QoS. to avoid failures of major functions.3 Alarm-Event Type Alarms can be classified into 15 types based on event types. For example. and warning. Warning Alarms of this severity are triggered by faults that are potential threats to the system services. Handle the faults immediately to avoid service outage. Ltd. Handle the faults in time. l Power: Alarms related to the power system l Environment: Alarms related to equipment room environment. For example. the OMU startup alarm is a warning. you need to clear obsolete historical alarms regularly. Identify and rectify potential faults in time. major. and door sensor l Signaling: Alarms related to the signaling system l Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Trunk: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. they are reported to the alarm box.4 Alarm Flag This describes theBSC6900 alarm flags. the alarms and the change of alarm status are not reported to the alarm box. modification flag. or unexpected l Operational: Alarms related to refusal of operations that are generated when a service is refused or unavailable.. and alarm cleared flag. shield flag. such as clock and CPU l Software: Alarms related to software l Running: Alarms generated during the operation of the BSC l Communication: Alarms related to the communication system. l Not report When alarms are generated or when the alarm status changes. including trunk circuits and trunk boards l Hardware: Alarms related to board hardware. failed non-repudiation. which provides audible and visual indications for the alarms. breach of confidentiality. and unauthorized visit l Time domain: Alarms related to timeout such as information delay and password expiration l Processing error: Alarms caused by other abnormal conditions 5. To-Alarm-Box Flag The to-alarm-box flag controls whether alarms are reported to the alarm box. 65 . Ltd. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. such as alarms between the BSC6900 host and the OMU l QoS: Alarms related to QoS l Integrity: Alarms generated when information is repeated. distorted. disordered. lost.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 5 Alarm/Event Management Alarms related to the trunk system. This flag can be set to either of the following values: l Report When alarms are generated. including: to-alarm-box flag. or when an operation procedure is improper l Physical: Alarms related to cable interference or detection of invasion l Security: Alarms related to violation of security such as failed authentication.1. 66 . Ltd. Alarm Cleared Flag The alarm cleared flag specifies whether a fault alarm is cleared. Figure 5-1 shows the alarm box. see the documents delivered with the alarm box. Shield Flag The shield flag controls whether alarms are suppressed as required. Modification Flag The modification flag records the modification status of alarm configurations. l Cleared The fault alarm has been cleared and a clear alarm has been received. which provides audible and visual indications for the BSC6900 alarms. For details.5 Alarm Box BSC6900 uses Huawei universal alarm box..1. Alarms are reported to the alarm box only when the to-alarm-box flag is set to Report and the alarm severity is higher than or equal to the alarm suppression level of the alarm box. 5. This flag can be set to either of the following values: l Not Cleared The fault alarm has not been cleared. Whether an alarm is reported to the alarm box depends on the to-alarm-box flag of the alarm and the alarm suppression level of the alarm box.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 5 Alarm/Event Management NOTE The to-alarm-box flag is applicable only to fault alarms. l Unmodified When an alarm uses its default configuration or is restored to its default configuration. the modification flag is set to Unmodified. This flag can be set to either of the following values: l Shielded A board does not report alarms whose shield flags are set to Shield to the element management system (EMS) or the alarm box. Event alarms are not reported to the alarm box. The OMU does not save the logs of such alarms. l Unshielded A board reports alarms whose shield flags are set to Unshield to the EMS or the alarm box. This flag can be set to either of the following values: l Modified When the configuration of an alarm is modified using a modification command. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The OMU saves the logs of such alarms. the modification flag is set to Modified. The alarm box is optional and the BSC6900 can be equipped with only one alarm box. and authorized CUSTOM-level users can perform this operation. They are collected by the OMU and stored in the OMU database.. When the LMT receives the fault alarm. Prerequisites You have logged in to the LMT with an authorized account.1 Setting Storage Limitations of Alarm Logs This section describes how to set the maximum number of alarm logs that can be stored in the OMU database and the maximum storage duration. 67 . Ltd.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 5 Alarm/Event Management Figure 5-1 Alarm box When the BSC6900 reports a fault alarm to the LMT.2. Only user admin. OPERATOR-level users. The sound stops when the alarm is cleared. 5. limitations must be imposed on the number and the storage duration of alarm logs. the alarm box generates a sound. the alarm box is activated to provide audible and visual indications based on the alarm severity. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 5. You can also use the LMT to manually stop the sound. NOTE The alarm box does not provide any indication for event alarms. To minimize storage requirements on the hard drive of the OMU.2 Managing Alarm Logs Alarm logs are used to record alarm details. ADMINISTRATOR-level users. 1 Creating an Alarm Masking Condition This section describes how to create an alarm masking condition. Only user admin. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Prerequisites You have logged in to the LMT with an authorized account.2. These alarms cannot be queried on the LMT or U2000 but are still saved on the OMU.. ----End 5. OPERATOR-level users. ----End 5.3. Procedure Step 1 Run the ADD OBJALMSHLD command to create an alarm masking condition. ADMINISTRATOR-level users. Procedure Step 1 Run the LST ALMCAPACITY command to query the maximum number of alarm logs that can be stored in the OMU database and the maximum storage duration.2 Querying Storage Limitations of Alarm Logs This section describes how to query the maximum number of alarm logs that can be stored in the OMU database and the maximum storage duration. 68 . and authorized CUSTOM-level users can perform this operation.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 5 Alarm/Event Management Procedure Step 1 Run the SET ALMCAPACITY command to set the maximum number of alarm logs that can be stored in the OMU database and the maximum storage duration. the alarm masking condition cannot be created. l A maximum of 100 alarm masking conditions can be created for each BSC6900. Ltd. This section describes how to manage alarm masking conditions. The alarm masking condition successfully created takes effect immediately. Otherwise. 5.3 Managing Alarm Masking Conditions Alarms that meet alarm masking conditions are not reported to the LMT or U2000. Prerequisites You have logged in to the LMT with an authorized account. NOTE l The name of a new alarm masking condition must be unique. Procedure Step 1 Run the LST OBJALMSHLD command to check whether the alarm masking condition to be deleted exists.. Step 2 Run the RMV OBJALMSHLD command. derived alarms Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2 Deleting an Alarm Masking Condition If you do not want to mask an alarm generated by the BSC6900. By default. and set other parameters as required to delete an alarm masking condition... Only user admin.. and authorized CUSTOM-level users can perform this operation. ----End 5. Procedure Step 1 Run the LST OBJALMSHLD command and specify Query Mode to query an alarm masking condition. Ltd. Then. beside a fault alarm. ADMINISTRATOR-level users. some related alarms may be generated. The alarm masking condition exists. Prerequisites You have logged in to the LMT. If. Go to Step 2. Prerequisites You have logged in to the LMT with an authorized account.3.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 5 Alarm/Event Management Step 2 Run the LST OBJALMSHLD command and enter required parameters to query whether the alarm masking condition is successfully created.4 Managing the Alarm Masking Switch of Derived Alarms When a fault occurs.. The BSC6900 can mask derived alarms. The alarm masking condition does not exist.3. No further action is required. These alarms are termed derived alarms. ----End 5. ----End 5. specify Object Type. delete all alarm masking conditions related to this alarm. OPERATOR-level users. 69 .3 Querying an Alarm Masking Condition This section describes how to query a specific alarm masking condition. Only user admin. Procedure Step 1 Run the LST ALMML command to query the alarm masking switch of derived alarms. OPERATOR-level users.4. 70 . You can enable the alarm masking switch by setting it to ON and disable the alarm masking switch by setting it to OFF.4. By browsing alarm information. ----End 5.5 Monitoring Alarms This section describes how to use the LMT to monitor alarm information in real time. 5. Unless otherwise specified. and authorized CUSTOM-level users can perform this operation.5.. The alarm information is displayed in the Alarm Browse window on the LMT. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 5. ADMINISTRATOR-level users. Fault alarms and event alarms are displayed on the Browse Alarm/Event tab page of the Alarm/Event window.1 Browsing Alarms/Events This section describes how to use the LMT to browse fault alarms and event alarms.7 Obtaining Data Configuration Rights). Procedure Step 1 Run the SET ALMML command to enable or disable the alarm masking switch of derived alarms. Prerequisites l You have logged in to the LMT with an authorized account. l You have obtained the data configuration rights (see 4. ----End 5. Prerequisites You have logged in to the LMT.2 Querying the Alarm Masking Switch of Derived Alarms This section describes how to query the alarm masking switch of the BSC6900 derived alarms. you can learn the operating status of the system in real time. derived alarms are not stored on the OMU and cannot be queried.1 Enabling/Disabling the Alarm Masking Switch of Derived Alarms This section describes how to enable and disable the alarm masking switch of the BSC6900 derived alarms. Ltd.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 5 Alarm/Event Management are not reported to the LMT. ----End 5. right-click any place in the area where alarms are displayed and choose Save All from the shortcut menu. Event. Context You can set the following query criteria: l Alarm type l Alarm severity l Alarm time l Filtering criteria l Maintenance mode flag l Number of logs to be queried l Cleared time l NodeB type l Alarm-managed objects l Alarm ID l Alarm serial No. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. click Alarm/Event.. you can learn the past operating status of the system. NOTE You can drag rows on the Browse Alarm/Event tab page to rearrange the row order. or click Save All. The Detail dialog box is displayed. Prerequisites You have logged in to the LMT. the row order on the Browse Alarm/Event tab page is the same as the row order when you closed the tab page last time. and choose Save Selected from the shortcut menu. Step 3 To view details of an alarm. 71 . Step 4 To save an alarm record. Within a Cookie validity period. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. presenting detailed information about the alarm.5. By viewing alarm and event logs. The Browse Alarm/Event tab page is displayed. and Maintenance mode alarm tab pages are displayed under the Browse Alarm/Event tab.2 Querying Alarm/Event Logs This section describes how to query alarm and event logs from the OMU database. select the alarm record. Step 2 Browse alarms on the Browse Alarm/Event tab page. Ltd.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 5 Alarm/Event Management Prerequisites You have logged in to the LMT. right-click it. To save all alarm records. The Normal Alarm. double-click it. 3. double-click it. Run the LST ALMLOG command to query alarm logs. select Filter By NodeB. click Alarm/Event. the row order on the Query Alarm/Event Log tab page is the same as the row order when you closed the tab page last time. 6. presenting detailed information about the alarm. Ltd. The Browse Alarm/Event tab page is displayed.3 Querying Suggestions on Alarm/Event Handling This section describes how to query suggestions on handling an alarm. and choose Save Selected from the shortcut menu. The Detail dialog box is displayed. right-click it. To reset only the NodeB type. On the Query Alarm/Event Log tab page. On the LMT main page. The Query Settings dialog box is displayed. l Using MML commands 1. 4. Prerequisites You have logged in to the LMT. select the alarm record. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Within a Cookie validity period. double-click an alarm on the Browse Alarm/Event or Query Alarm/Event Log tab page. NOTE After performing query by Filter By NodeB. or click Save All. click Query Settings. 5. ----End 5. click Reset. Set query criteria as required. Click Query.5. you can click Filter to reset query criteria. NOTE You can drag rows on the Query Alarm/Event Log tab page to rearrange the row order.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 5 Alarm/Event Management Procedure l Using menus 1.. To reset the query criteria. To save all alarm records. Context The LMT provides the following help information about alarms: l Alarm/event description l Impact on the system l System actions l Handling suggestions Procedure Step 1 On the Alarm/Event tab page. To view details of an alarm. The Detail dialog box is displayed. right-click any place in the area where alarms are displayed and choose Save All from the shortcut menu. 72 . 2. The query result is displayed in the Result area. To save an alarm record. right-click it. l Severity: Specifies the alarm severity of alarms/events whose configuration information is to be queried. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. click Solution. l Modification Flag: Specifies the modification flag of alarms/events whose configuration information is to be queried. configuration information of alarms/events whose Modification Flag is set to Unmodified or Modified is displayed in the query result. 73 . l Return Amount: Specifies the number of alarms whose configuration information is to be queried. configuration information of alarms/events whose To Alarm Box Flag is set to Report or Not Report is displayed in the query result. Prerequisites You have logged in to the LMT. If All is selected. and choose Solution from the shortcut menu to view the online help of this alarm. The online help window is displayed. If All is selected. Context You can set the following query criteria: l ID: Specifies Start ID and End ID of alarms/events whose configuration information is to be queried.. If All is selected. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. l To Alarm Box Flag: Specifies the to-alarm-box flag of alarms/events whose configuration information is to be queried.. Step 4 To exit from the online help.4 Querying Alarm/Event Configuration This section describes how to query alarm/event configuration. Step 3 View the handling suggestions or other required information in the online help..5. The Alarm/Event tab page is displayed. NOTE You can also select an alarm. l Shield Flag: Specifies the shield flag of alarms/events whose configuration information is to be queried. ----End 5.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 5 Alarm/Event Management Step 2 In the Detail dialog box. close the online help window. configuration information of alarms/events whose Shield Flag is set to Shielded or Unshielded is displayed in the query result.. click Alarm/Event. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. alarms related to the NodeB are displayed in the filtering result. For example. These alarms are not generated by the NodeB but the RNC. click Filter Settings. NOTE l You can select BSC and NodeB for Alarm Source Type. l You can manually type an alarm source in Selected Source.5. Association display is supported in the input box under Selected Source. The Alarm/Event tab page is displayed. ----End 5.. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Prerequisites You have logged in to the LMT. Query Alarm/Event Log. if you type 3. all alarm sources of the source type starting with 3 are displayed in the box under Selected Source. but not displayed on the Browse Alarm/Event tab page. Then.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 5 Alarm/Event Management Step 2 Click the Query Alarm/Event Configuration tab and click Query Settings. click OK. the settings take effect on alarms/events on the following tab pages: Browse Alarm/Event. such as sites and alarm types. Step 4 Click Query.5. click Alarm/Event. The Filter Settings dialog box is displayed. The Query Settings dialog box is displayed. Step 2 On the Browse Alarm/Event tab page. After you set the display attributes. 74 . Step 3 In the Filter Settings dialog box. l You can manually type an alarm source in Selected Source after specifying Alarm Source Type. specify filtering criteria. l When you specify Alarm Source Type. ----End 5. or right-click the alarm in the Result area and choose Modify Configuration from the shortcut menu.6 Setting Display Attributes for Alarms/Events This section describes how to set display attributes for alarms/events in the Setting dialog box. NOTE To modify the configuration of an alarm. all alarm sources of the selected type are displayed in the alarm source type area. such as Alarm Source and Alarm ID. Alarms meeting the specified criteria are displayed. Step 3 Set query criteria as required. select an alarm and click Modify Configuration. Alarms filtered out are still reported to the LMT and saved on the OMU. and Query Alarm/Event Configuration. When you select NodeB for Alarm Source Type. Ltd. The query result is displayed in the Result area.5 Filtering Alarms/Events This section describes how to filter alarms according to specified filtering criteria. Context You can set the following display attributes for alarms/events: l Colors l Table columns l Display tips Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. Minor. Severity Specifies the severity of the alarm on services. details about an alarm/ event are displayed when you put the cursor on the alarm/event. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. l Color: You can set background colors for the following alarm/event types: Critical. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Field Name Description Serial No. Specifies the alarm generating sequence. This field identifies an alarm record in an alarm log. set Color. Name Specifies the alarm name. ID Specifies the alarm ID. 75 . Step 2 Click Settings on the upper right of the Alarm/Event tab page. Warning. and Cleared. If you select Disable. Step 3 In the Settings dialog box. this field identifies an alarm. and Tips. The following table describes all fields for an alarm. l Table Columns: You can specify the information to be displayed in the alarm/event table. Event Type Specifies the event type of the alarm. Auto-deletion. details about an alarm/event are displayed only when you double-click the alarm/event. Alarm Source Specifies the network element that generates the alarm. For a product. If you select Enable. Major. l Tips: Two options are available: Enable and Disable. The Settings dialog box is displayed. Table Columns. For a product. l Auto-deletion: You can select Enable auto-deletion and specify the period for automatic deletion of cleared alarms. Ltd. this field identifies an alarm and has a one-to-one mapping relationship with the alarm ID. click Alarm/Event. The Alarm/Event tab page is displayed.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 5 Alarm/Event Management Prerequisites You have logged in to the LMT. they are automatically cleared. Location Info Specifies information required for locating faults. Root CSN Specifies the serial number of the root alarm. Cleared Time Specifies the time when the alarm is cleared. Common Specifies whether the alarm is generated by a common component. Maintenanc e Mode Flag Specifies whether the alarm is triggered by maintenance and engineering operations. the fault management system reports the root alarm and automatically clears the active alarm. Cleared Type Specifies the way in which the alarm is cleared. 76 . Special Info Specifies whether special information is reported. NOTE A multi-mode product comprises common components. The device in the latter state reports the alarm again. Raised Time Specifies the time when the alarm is generated. Alarms can be cleared in any of the following ways: l Normal clear: Alarms are normally cleared. alarms are automatically cleared. l State switchover clear: If a device switches from one state to another. Changed Time Specifies the time when Severity of the alarm or Serial No. l Manual clear: Alarms are manually cleared. l Configuration clear: After the configuration of a board is deleted. of the root alarm is changed. If some earliest alarms are still active. alarms related to the board are automatically cleared.. such as capacity expansion or upgrades. l Reset clear: After the system is restarted. such as power supply and temperature control devices.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 5 Alarm/Event Management Field Name Description Type Specifies that the alarm is an Alarm or Event. Alarms generated by these common components are termed common alarms. the active alarm reported by the device in the former state is automatically cleared. l Override clear: Earliest alarms are removed to free disk space. l Correlation clear: After receiving the root alarm of an active alarm. Ltd. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. This section describes how to clear an alarm/event. Specifies the sequence for sending alarm report messages. ADMINISTRATOR-level users. and authorized CUSTOMlevel users can perform this operation. ----End 5. The alarm generating message and alarm clearing message have different synchronization serial numbers. Ltd. Manually cleared is displayed in the Cleared Type column. 2. The Confirm dialog box is displayed. The synchronization serial number ensures data synchronization between the element management system (EMS) and network elements (NEs). ----End 5. l Using MML commands 1. Run the RMV ALMFLT command to manually clear an alarm.7 Manually Clearing an Alarm/Event When an alarm can be neglected or the fault triggering the alarm has been rectified. Only user admin. 77 .BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 5 Alarm/Event Management Field Name Description Sync Serial No. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you can manually clear the alarm. Click OK in the Confirm dialog box. Context You can clear an alarm/event using menus or MML commands. Prerequisites You have logged in to the LMT with an authorized account.5. OPERATOR-level users. Click Clear Alarm. Prerequisites You have logged in to the LMT. Procedure l Using menus 1.8 Deleting Alarms/Events This section describes how to delete cleared alarms/events.5. NOTE You can also right-click an alarm to be cleared and choose Clear Alarm from the shortcut menu.. On the LMT main page. click Alarm/Event and select an active alarm to be cleared on the Browse Alarm/Event or Query Alarm/Event Log tab page. 9 Refreshing the Alarm/Event Window This section describes how to manually refresh the alarm/event window to obtain the latest alarm information. click Delete Selected Cleared Alarms or Delete All Cleared Alarms to delete the alarms/ events as required. 78 . NOTE l On the Browse Alarm/Event tab page. This button is available on the Browse Alarm/Event and Query Alarm/Event Log tab pages. When you manually refresh the tab page.6 Managing the Alarm Box The BSC6900 uses Huawei universal alarm box to provide audible and visual indications when an alarm is reported. Procedure Step 1 On the Browse Alarm/Event or Query Alarm/Event Log tab page under the Alarm/Event tab. Table 5-3 Functions of the buttons Button Description Delete Selected Cleared Alarms Deletes cleared alarms that are selected in the active window. ----End 5.5.. Ltd. Delete All Cleared Alarms Deletes all cleared alarms that are displayed in the active window.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 5 Alarm/Event Management Procedure Step 1 On the Browse Alarm/Event or Query Alarm/Event Log tab page under the Alarm/Event tab. When you manually refresh the tab page. This button is available on the Browse Alarm/Event and Query Alarm/Event Log tab pages. Prerequisites You have logged in to the LMT. l On the Query Alarm/Event Log tab page. The alarm box notifies maintenance engineers of alarms in time. cleared alarms are removed from the Browse Alarm/Event tab page. click Refresh or choose Refresh from the shortcut menu. alarm information is not updated in real time. the query result on the tab page is updated according to the previously set query criteria. Cleared alarms are displayed in gray and newly generated alarms are added to the top of the alarm list. Table 5-3 describes the functions of the buttons. alarm information is updated in real time. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. thereby facilitating operation and maintenance. ----End 5. l The BSC6900 has been connected to the alarm box. turn off the alarm LEDs.2 Querying the Number of Alarms of a Specific Severity This section describes how to query the number of alarms of a specific severity.6.1 Querying Alarm Box Information This section describes how to query the version information of the alarm box and active alarms that drive the alarm box. l The Convert Management System has been started and can communicate with the OMU properly. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Context When the BSC6900 reports one or more fault alarms of the same severity to the LMT. l The BSC6900 has been connected to the alarm box. Prerequisites l You have logged in to the LMT. l The Convert Management System has been started and can communicate with the OMU properly. Ltd.3 Performing Operations on the Alarm Box This section describes how to reset the alarm box. Users. and stop the alarm sound. Prerequisites l You have logged in to the LMT. ----End 5.6. l Run the LST BOXALM command to query active alarms that drive the alarm box. Prerequisites l You have logged in to the LMT. Procedure Step 1 Run the LST BOXLGT command to query the number of the alarms of a specific severity. l Run the LST BOXVER command to query the version information of the alarm box.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 5 Alarm/Event Management 5. l The BSC6900 has been connected to the alarm box. 79 . cannot identify the number of alarms of the severity from the flashing LED. Procedure ----End 5. however.6.. the LED corresponding to the severity flashes on the alarm box. l Run the CLR BOXLGT to manually turn off the alarm LEDs. l The BSC6900 has been connected to the alarm box. l Run the SET ALMSCRN command to set the alarm suppression of the alarm box.4 Querying the Alarm Suppression Level of the Alarm Box This section describes how to query and set the alarm suppression level of the alarm box. l Run the RST ALMBOX command to reset the alarm box. OPERATOR-level users. 80 . l Run the STP BOXSND command to stop the alarm sound. Procedure ----End 5.6. ----End Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Prerequisites l You have logged in to the LMT. Only alarms of a severity equal to or higher than the alarm suppression level are reported to the alarm box. Procedure l Run the LST ALMSCRN command to query the alarm suppression of the alarm box.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 5 Alarm/Event Management l The Convert Management System has been started and can communicate with the OMU properly. Context Only user admin. ADMINISTRATOR-level users. and authorized CUSTOM-level users are authorized to set the alarm suppression level. Ltd. BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 6 Log Management 6 Log Management About This Chapter This section describes how to use the LMT to manage the BSC6900 logs, which can be saved in .txt and .csv files. Only user admin, ADMINISTRATOR-level users, and authorized CUSTOM-level users can manage the logs. 6.1 Logs Logs are classified into operation logs, security logs, and running logs. 6.2 Setting Log Storage Limitations This section describes how to set storage limitations on operation logs and security logs, such as the maximum storage duration and the maximum number of records. If some operation logs and security logs are stored for a period longer than the maximum storage duration, the OMU database automatically deletes these logs. If the number of records stored exceeds the allowed maximum value, the OMU database automatically deletes the earliest records. 6.3 Querying Operation/Security Logs This section describes how to query operation and security logs of the BSC6900 from the OMU database. 6.4 Obtaining Operation/Security Logs This section describes how to export operation logs and security logs from the OMU to the directory OMU active workspace installation directory\ftp\operator_log\exp_log and use the File Manager or FTP Client tool to download the logs to the LMT PC. 6.5 Obtaining Running Logs This section describes how to upload running logs to the directory bam\common\fam\famlog and use the File Manager or FTP Client to download the running logs to the LMT PC. 6.6 Collecting Logs This section describes how to collect logs for fault analysis. There are several types of logs, such as host logs, OMU logs, database logs, system event logs, operation logs, OMU installation logs, remote upgrade logs, security logs, and alarm logs. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 81 BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 6 Log Management 6.1 Logs Logs are classified into operation logs, security logs, and running logs. Operation Logs Operation logs record the information about operations on the BSC6900 in real time and are saved on the OMU database. The operation logs are used to analyze the association between device faults and operations. Security Logs Security logs record information about security events occurring on network elements (NEs) or the element management system (EMS). The security logs are used to audit and trace security events, such as login, logout, and authorization. Running Logs Running logs record the operating information of the BSC6900 host in real time. The running logs are used for fault location, routine inspection, and device monitoring. 6.2 Setting Log Storage Limitations This section describes how to set storage limitations on operation logs and security logs, such as the maximum storage duration and the maximum number of records. If some operation logs and security logs are stored for a period longer than the maximum storage duration, the OMU database automatically deletes these logs. If the number of records stored exceeds the allowed maximum value, the OMU database automatically deletes the earliest records. Procedure Step 1 Run the SET LOGLIMIT command and specify Time Limit, Counts Limit, and Log Type. Run the LST LOGLIMIT command to query the storage limitations. For storage limitations on other logs, see "OMU Folder Size List" in OMU Administration Guide. ----End 6.3 Querying Operation/Security Logs This section describes how to query operation and security logs of the BSC6900 from the OMU database. Procedure Step 1 Run the LST OPTLOG command and set query criteria as required to query operation logs. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 82 BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 6 Log Management NOTE If no query criteria are set, the LMT displays the latest 64 operation records. Step 2 Run the LST SECLOG command and set query criteria as required to query security logs. NOTE If no query criteria are set, the LMT displays the security logs generated on the current day. ----End 6.4 Obtaining Operation/Security Logs This section describes how to export operation logs and security logs from the OMU to the directory OMU active workspace installation directory\ftp\operator_log\exp_log and use the File Manager or FTP Client tool to download the logs to the LMT PC. Prerequisites l You have logged in to the LMT with an ADMINISTRATOR-level account authorized to perform this operation. l You are authorized to download files from the OMU to the LMT PC. l Using the File Manager Procedure 1. Run the EXP LOG command, set Log Type to OPTLOG(Operation Log) or SECLOG(SECURITY LOG), and set other parameters as required. NOTE The default path for saving the exported log is OMU active workspace installation directory\ftp \operator_log\exp_log on the active workspace of the OMU. l 2. On the LMT main page, click File Manager to start the File Manager. 3. In the File Navigation Area, type OMU active workspace installation directory \ftp. In the File List Area, select the operation log exported in Step 1. Then, click Download to download the log to the LMT PC. Using the FTP Client 1. Run the EXP LOG command, set Log Type to OPTLOG(Operation Log) or SECLOG(SECURITY LOG), and set other parameters as required. NOTE The default path for saving the exported log is OMU active workspace installation directory\FTP on the OMU active workspace. 2. Choose Start > All Programs > Huawei Local Maintenance Terminal > FTP Client. The FTP Client is started. 3. In the server entry bar on the FTP Client, enter the external virtual IP address of the OMU, the FTP user name, and the password. NOTE The FTP user name and password are set when the OMU is being installed. By default, the FTP user name is FtpUsr. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 83 BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 6 Log Management 4. Click Enter to connect to the OMU. The connection status is displayed in the Connection tips pane. 5. When the connection is successful, double-click OMU active workspace installation directory\ftp in the server file list. Files in the directory are displayed in the server file list pane. 6. Double-click the file to download it to the LMT PC. 7. When the file is successfully downloaded, choose System > Exit on the FTP Client or close the FTP Client window to exit from the FTP Client. ----End 6.5 Obtaining Running Logs This section describes how to upload running logs to the directory bam\common\fam\famlog and use the File Manager or FTP Client to download the running logs to the LMT PC. Context l Running logs are named in the format BSCID_subrack number/Log/yyyy/mm/dd/hh/ mm/ss.zip. For example, if a running log of Extended Processing Subrack (EPS) 3 is uploaded to the OMU of BSC 1 at 17:19:47 of November 7, 2011, the log is named BSC0001_03Log20111107171947.zip. BSC0001_03Log20111107171947.zip indicates that the log has been successfully uploaded and compressed. BSC0001_03Log20111107171947.tmp indicates that the log is being uploaded. l By default, running logs are uploaded to and saved in the directory bam\common\fam \famlog on the OMU. l Using the File Manager Procedure l 1. Run the ULD LOGTOOMU command and enter the number of the subrack whose running log is to be uploaded to the OMU. 2. On the LMT main page, click File Manager to start the File Manager. 3. In the File Navigation Area, double-click bam\common\fam\famlog. In the File List Area, select the running log uploaded in Step 1. Then, click Download to download the log to the LMT PC. Using the FTP Client 1. Run the ULD LOGTOOMU command and enter the subrack number to upload the corresponding running log to the OMU. 2. Choose Start > All Programs > Huawei Local Maintenance Terminal > FTP Client. The FTP Client is started. 3. In the server entry bar on the FTP Client, enter the external virtual IP address of the OMU, the FTP user name, and the password. NOTE The FTP user name and password are set when the OMU is being installed. By default, the FTP user name is FtpUsr. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 84 BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 6 Log Management 4. Click Enter to connect to the OMU. The connection status is displayed in the Connection tips pane. 5. When the connection is set up successfully, double-click bam\common\fam \famlog in the server file list. Files in the path are displayed in the server file list pane. 6. Double-click the running log to download it to the LMT PC. 7. When the running log is successfully downloaded, choose System > Exit or close the FTP Client window to exit from the FTP Client. ----End 6.6 Collecting Logs This section describes how to collect logs for fault analysis. There are several types of logs, such as host logs, OMU logs, database logs, system event logs, operation logs, OMU installation logs, remote upgrade logs, security logs, and alarm logs. Procedure Step 1 Run the COL LOG command and set parameters as required to collect logs. For more description about logs, see Table 6-1. NOTE l The path for saving logs depends on the active workspace of the OMU. When the active workspace of the OMU is version_a, the path for saving logs is version_a. When the active workspace of the OMU is version_b, the path for saving logs is version_b. l Log files that are not compressed into the BZ2 format in the OMU active workspace installation directory \common\fam\famlog and the OMU active workspace installation directory\common\fam\famlogfmt directories will not be collected. Table 6-1 Description about logs Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Type File Path Description PFM_NOM_RESULT (Normal Performance Result File) /bam/version_a/ftp/ COLLOGINFO/PFM-LOG/ Records normal-period traffic statistics that an NE reports to the U2000. Used for analyzing traffic statistics. PFM_RESULT (Performance Result File) /bam/version_a/ftp/ COLLOGINFO/PFM-LOG/ Records traffic statistics that an NE reports to the U2000. Used for analyzing traffic statistics. HOST_PFM_RESULT (Performance Result File from Host) /bam/version_a/ftp/ COLLOGINFO/PFM-LOG/ Records traffic statistics that boards report to the OMU. Used for analyzing traffic statistics. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 85 BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide Issue 02 (2015-05-08) 6 Log Management Type File Path Description ACTIVE_DEF_MEAS_FIL E(Active Default Measurement Task File) /bam/version_a/ftp/ COLLOGINFO/PFM-LOG/ Specifies the active traffic statistic definition file that the U2000 delivers to NEs. Used for analyzing traffic statistics. STANDBY_DEF_MEAS_F ILE(Standby Default Measurement Task File) /bam/version_a/ftp/ COLLOGINFO/PFM-LOG/ Specifies the standby traffic statistic definition file that the U2000 delivers to NEs. Used for analyzing traffic statistics. PFM_SWITCHS(Switch Information for Performance) / Records reserved enumerated values. HISTORY_ALARM (History Alarm File) /bam/version_a/ftp/ COLLOGINFO/ALM-LOG/ Records alarms and events reported by all NEs. Used for analyzing alarms and events. HISTORY_FAULT(History Fault File) /bam/version_a/ftp/ COLLOGINFO/ALM-LOG/ Records faults reported by all NEs. Used for analyzing alarms and events. ALM_SYSTEM_CFG(The Configured Information of Alarm) /bam/version_a/ftp/ COLLOGINFO/ALM-LOG/ Records the configuration information related to alarm management. Used for analyzing alarms and events. SECURITY_LOG(Security Logs) /bam/version_a/ftp/ COLLOGINFO/SEC-LOG/ Specifies security logs of an NE. Used for analyzing securityrelated operations on the NE. OPT_LOG(Operation Logs) /bam/version_a/ftp/ COLLOGINFO/OPT-LOG/ Records operation logs of an NE. Used for analyzing user operations on the NE. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 86 CELL_BASIC_INFO(The Basic Information of Cells) /bam/version_a/ftp/ COLLOGINFO/CFG-LOG/ CellBasicInfo/ Records the basic information of cells under a BSC. BSC_SERIES_NO(The Series No. Used for analyzing OMU faults and status. Used for configuration data restoration. Used for checking the mapping relationships between cell IDs and internal cell IDs. except information about scheduled tasks and the standby workspace. l Active/Standby Mode – Active OMU /bam/version_a/ftp/ COLLOGINFO/ Active-BAM/ – Standby OMU /bam/version_a/ftp/ COLLOGINFO/ STANDBY-BAM/ OMU_SIM_LOG(The Simple Log of OMU) l Independent Mode: /bam/ version_a/ftp/ COLLOGINFO/ SINGLE-SIM-BAM/ l Active/Standby Mode – Active OMU Records the running logs and status information of the OMU board. Used for checking the license validity.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 6 Log Management Type File Path Description OMU_LOG(The Log Information of OMU) l Independent Mode: /bam/ version_a/ftp/ COLLOGINFO/ SINGLE-BAM/ Records all running logs and status information of the OMU board. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. of the BSC) /bam/version_a/ftp/ COLLOGINFO/CFG-LOG/ Records the Equipment Serial Number (ESN) of a BSC. /bam/version_a/ftp/ COLLOGINFO/ Active-SIM-BAM/ – Standby OMU /bam/version_a/ftp/ COLLOGINFO/ STANDBY-SIMBAM/ Issue 02 (2015-05-08) BSC_CFG_MML(The Data Configure File of the BSC) /bam/version_a/ftp/ COLLOGINFO/CFG-LOG/ ExportCfgmml/ Records the BSC configuration data.. 87 . Ltd. BSC_INFO(The Basic Information of the BSC) /bam/version_a/ftp/ COLLOGINFO/BSC-LOG/ Records the BSC software patch information. and the bar code. hardware information. hard handover. Used for data restoration. 3G_CHR_LOG(The CHR Log for UMTS) /bam/common/fam/ famlogfmt/ Records call faults. relocation. Used for analyzing software defects. HOST_LOG(The Running Log of the Host) /bam/common/fam/famlog/ Records host operation logs. loading information. Used for locating BIOS faults. and license of each board.. SDBG_LOG(The Channel Fault Log) /bam/common/fam/ famlogfmt/ Records channel faults. except call access failures and call drops. LAST_WORD(The Last Word Log) /bam/common/fam Records the log information generated before unexpected board resetting. Used for locating causes of soft handover. and licenses of boards are correct. software information. DEBUG_LOG(The Common Debug Log) /bam/common/fam/ famlogfmt/ Records software running errors. or cell update failures. DSP_DEBUG_LOG(The Debug Log of DSP) /bam/common/fam/ famlogfmt/ Records DSP debug logs.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide Issue 02 (2015-05-08) 6 Log Management Type File Path Description DB_BAK(The Backup File of the Database) /bam/version_a/ftp/ COLLOGINFO/CFG-LOG/ MysqlDbBak/ Records backed up OMU database information. Used for locating causes of unexpected board resetting. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. data. BIOS_LOG(BIOS Log) /bam/common/fam/ famlogfmt/ Records errors that occur during the BIOS system running. Used for locating DSP faults. Ltd. Used for checking whether the software versions. 88 . . Used for locating causes of call access failures and call drops. SYSFAULT_LOG (SYSFAULT Log) /bam/common/fam/ famlogfmt/sysfault/ Records severe software/ hardware faults such as resource leakages and device faults. call release. DCCC. 89 . including service access. Ltd. and signal quality.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 6 Log Management Type File Path Description CALLFAULT_LOG (CALLFAULT Log) /bam/common/fam/ famlogfmt/ Records call access failures and call drops. Used for analyzing performance and used as a reference for handling subscriber complaints. PCHR_LOG(PCHR Log) /bam/common/fam/ famlogfmt/pchr Records detailed information of each call. ----End Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Used for checking network health status. handover. 4 UMTS Services This section describes how to perform tracing tasks related to UMTS services. tracing modes.3 Device Commissioning This section describes how to perform routine device commissioning. and a maximum of 6 trace tasks can be started simultaneously for the same parameter of a trace item. Ltd.1 Concepts This chapter describes tracing principles. monitoring cannot be restarted until 30 minutes after the switchover. because starting excessive tracing tasks slows the LMT responses. set Trace Mode to Save To OMU before starting a tracing task.2 Basic Tracing Operations The basic operations of message tracing apply to all BSC6900 message tracing tasks. and required operation rights. A maximum of 64 trace tasks can be started simultaneously on the same LMT. In this case. 7. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 7. 90 . 7.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management 7 Trace Management About This Chapter This chapter describes how to manage message tracing on the BSC6900. 7. Do not start excessive tracing tasks in heavy traffic scenarios. When OMU boards perform an active/standby switchover.. the debugging module records the filter parameters of the trace data in the filter table and notifies the service module. It also describes how to create and close a message tracing task and how the service module of a board reports traced messages to the LMT. 2. the LMT sends a binary command to the OMU to delete the task. because starting excessive tracing tasks slows the LMT responses. and required operation rights. Internal Procedure for Closing a Tracing Task 1. 2. Figure 7-1 Principles of message tracing Internal Procedure for Creating a Tracing Task 1. In this case. 91 . tracing modes. When you create a tracing task on the LMT.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management 7. The OMU forwards the command to the specified board according to the task ID. 7. the LMT sends a binary command to the OMU to create the task.1 Tracing Principles This describes the principles of message tracing. 3. Do not start excessive tracing tasks in heavy traffic scenarios. The service module updates the local filter table according to the message from the debugging module.1. After receiving the command. set Trace Mode to Save To OMU before starting a tracing task. When you close a tracing task on the LMT.. The OMU assigns an ID to the task and forwards the command to the debugging module of the specified board. Ltd.1 Concepts This chapter describes tracing principles. Principles of Message Tracing Figure 7-1 shows the principles of message tracing. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 4. The debugging module and service module delete the task from the filter table. 3. In this tracing mode.tmf format. The LMT parses the tracing result file and displays the analysis results in the window.1. you can select Save File to save the tracing result file to the LMT PC in . 7. 3. The service module compares the collected messages against the local filter table and reports the qualified messages to the OMU.1. l Issue 02 (2015-05-08) A maximum of 64 trace tasks can be started simultaneously on the same LMT.2 Management of Tracing Operation Rights You must have the required rights to perform message tracing operations. The OMU forwards the traced messages to the LMT that creates the task according to the task ID. 92 . 7. NOTE Group G_10 consists of binary commands for creating tracing and monitoring tasks. The users at the following levels can perform the tracing tasks online: admin.tmf format. The LMT parses the messages and displays them on the tracing window. 2. Ltd. OPERATOR. you can select Save File to save the tracing result file to the LMT PC in . The tracing result file is saved on the OMU in . The tracing start time and tracing end time refer to the time on the OMU. Interface signaling tracing modes are as follows: l Report And Not Show This is an instant tracing mode. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Report And Show This is an instant tracing mode. The tracing results are sent from the OMU to the LMT PC.1. and CUSTOM entitled to use command group G_10. l Save to OMU You can set Trace Period (OMU Time) for a tracing task in this mode. The default save path is \bam\common\fam\trace. l Report File The tracing result file is temporarily saved on the OMU in . ADMINISTRATOR. The tracing end time must be later than the tracing start time..BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Internal Procedure for the Service Module to Report Traced Messages to the LMT 1. The tracing results are sent from the OMU to the LMT PC.zip format and is not sent to the LMT PC. That is. Then.zip format. USER. 7. it is transferred to the specified directory on the LMT PC through the FTP server.3 Tracing Mode The tracing mode decides where the signaling tracing results are stored. only the GUEST-level users and CUSTOM-level users that are not entitled to use command group G_10 cannot perform tracing tasks online. In this tracing mode.4 Tracing Specifications This section describes the tracing specifications. 2 Basic Tracing Operations The basic operations of message tracing apply to all BSC6900 message tracing tasks. l The following table lists the maximum number of tracing tasks that can be simultaneously started for each type.1 Browsing Traced Messages Online This section describes how to browse traced messages online in a message browser after a tracing task is created. l Traced messages are reported.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management l Do not start excessive tracing tasks in heavy traffic scenarios. Trace Type Specifications Iu Interface Trace 6 Iupc Interface Trace 6 Iur Interface Trace 6 Iub Interface Trace 6 Uu Interface Trace 6 MNCDT Trace 3 Iur-p Trace 6 Cell Trace 6 IOS Trace 2 NOTE All tasks targets a maximum of 100 calls. UE Trace 12 NOTE A maximum of six tasks in the debug mode can be performed simultaneously. 93 . Ltd. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In this case.. set Trace Mode to Save To OMU before starting a tracing task. 7. Prerequisites l A tracing task is successfully created.2. because starting excessive tracing tasks slows the LMT responses. Sr Interface Trace 6 7. showing details of the message. After such a setting. a new message browser will still be displayed in maximized mode. double-click it. Save Selected Messages. Save all traced messages displayed in the message browser. Each of the windows is configured with a default minimum width when multiple windows are tiled vertically.. Query properties of the tracing task.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Context l By default. This ensures clear comparison. The cascaded or tiled window arrangements take effect only at every setting of Layout to Cascade.. With this configuration. each message browser is displayed in maximized mode.. or Tile Vertical. ----End Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the display order of messages traced in real time may be inaccurate because those messages are reported by multiple nodes in the system at the same time. Right-click in the message browser and choose an item from the shortcut menu to perform the associated operation as described in Table 7-1. Save All Messages. Ltd. You can click the Time column to sort the messages by the time when the RNC receives the messages. Auto Scroll Enable messages in the message browser to automatically refresh themselves in real time and scroll upward... Other windows are hidden behind the displayed windows. Tile Horizontal. Newly traced messages will replace old ones if 2000 messages are already displayed in a message browser. set Layout to Cascade. 94 . l A maximum of 2000 messages can be displayed in a message browser. The Message Browser window is displayed. To compare results displayed in multiple message browsers. Property. Clear Messages Clear all displayed messages from the message browser without affecting the saved messages. Table 7-1 Operations available when browsing traced messages online Shortcut Description Stop Trace Task Suspend the tracing task.. Restart Trace Task Resume the suspended tracing task. Step 2 To view details of a message. Procedure Step 1 Browse or view traced messages in a message browser in real time. Save the selected messages. Tile Horizontal or Tile Vertical.. NOTE During multi-user tracing or inter-RNC tracing. a maximum of six windows can be displayed in a monitor with the resolution of 1280x1024. They do not automatically update. as shown in Figure 7-2.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management 7. Ltd. The text messages update once each time users choose Update Text. Prerequisites l A tracing task is successfully created. Figure 7-2 Message Explanation ----End 7.2. right-click in the blank area on the right part of the window and choose Update Text from the shortcut menu. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Procedure Step 1 In the message browse window.3 Saving Traced Messages This section describes how to save traced messages in a file to a local PC.. 95 .2 Viewing the Interpretation of Traced Messages This section describes how to view the interpretation of a traced message.2. double-click the trace message. l Traced messages are reported. Step 2 The Message Browser window is displayed. Context To view detailed description of TXT (Command Code) messages. showing the details and meaning of the message in protocol translation format. To save only the selected messages displayed in the message browser.tmf. The traced results can be saved either automatically or manually. l The file saving messages traced by a UE tracing task is named in a different way from the file saving messages traced by other types of tracing task. and second. including the file name extension.txt. and specify the file type and save path. MM. respectively. 3. To save all messages. 2.tmf format. 96 . NOTE l The LMT saves every 5. For details. MM. .tmf format by default. 1. day.tmf. The default save path is C:\Web LMT\MBSC\output\trace\tmfFile on the local PC. HH.csv format.000 messages. and choose Save Selected Messages from the shortcut menu. month. DD. All traced messages to be displayed in the message browser will be automatically saved in . or . and SS represent the year. Click Save to save the file in the specified path. right-click in the message browser and choose Save All Messages from the shortcut menu. Ltd. The default save path is C:\Web LMT\MBSC\output\trace\tmfFile. minute. messages traced by a UE tracing task of this UE are saved in a file named UE_YYYY-MM-DD-HH-MM-SS-1234_Serial number. TMSI. use the digits in the file name without adding more digits to reach four digits. select the messages you wish to save.tmf format offline. For example. For example. Procedure l Automatic saving of traced messages Select Save File when creating a tracing task. IMEI.001 are saved in another file with a serial number and the serial number is increased by one for every subsequent 5. YYYY. hour.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Prerequisites l A tracing task is started.. see 7. The Save dialog box is displayed. l Manual saving of traced messages When a tracing task is running. l Traced messages are reported. if the least significant four digits of a UE IMSI are 1234. Enter a file name. Messages starting from 5. you can manually save all or some of the messages in the message browser in . the 5001st to 10000th messages traced on the interface are saved in file's name_1.4 Browsing Traced Messages Offline. ----End Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If there are fewer than four digits.000 messages in a file. The default file name is in IP address_Tracing type_YYYY-MM-DD-HH-MM-SS.tmf format.2. Context The name of the file containing saved messages cannot exceed 100 characters. The least significant four digits of the traced number (IMSI. or MSISDN) are saved in the file name. right-click. l You can use the Traffic Recording Review Tool to browse messages saved in . You choose Find from the shortcut menu. Step 6 You can further perform the following operations by right-clicking in the TrafficRecording Review Tool window.tmf or . You choose Filter By Byte from the shortcut menu. Set the filter to selectively display the information. The contents of the file are displayed in the TrafficRecording Review Tool window.txt format. NOTE The time format is YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS(Tick). Procedure Step 1 Choose Start > > All Programs > > Huawei Local Maintenance Terminal > > TrafficRecording Review Tool.. Filter the information by column to selectively display the information.4 Browsing Traced Messages Offline This section describes how to use the Traffic Recording Review Tool to browse offline the traced messages that are saved in . Step 4 Browse the messages or double-click a specific one to read the details. prompting you to select the target file. In the Open dialog box. You choose Filter By Column from the shortcut menu. Step 5 To view the contents of more files..tmf format. Double-click them to view the traced messages. and select the target file. Ltd. choose File > > Open.txt or . Browse to the folder where the trace files are saved. Locate the message that you want. You choose Save Selected Messages from the shortcut menu. select and open files to view the traced messages that are saved in the files.. Then. Context You can find the . Step 3 Click Open or double-click the file.2.csv files in the saved directory. Prerequisites The traced messages are saved in .. The selected messages are saved in .. Step 2 The Open dialog box is displayed.tmf or . Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management 7.tmf format. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) If.txt format. The unit of Tick is 10 ms. 97 . You choose Save All Messages from the shortcut menu. All the messages are saved in the window in . You can click the Time column to sort the messages by the time when the RNC receives the messages. set the parameters as required. You do not need to set Time Settings in other trace modes. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2. the tracing tasks in this duration will be displayed in the area below. you can specify the tracing start time and tracing end time. choose the Manage Trace Task.. 3. ----End 7. Restart. the order in which messages traced in real time are displayed may be inaccurate because those messages are reported by multiple nodes in the system at the same time. To stop. l Traced messages are reported. After the duration is specified. or Delete. On the Trace Navigation Tree pane. The Trace tab page is displayed.2. 4. Such tasks can only be deleted by the admin or ADMINISTRATOR-level users. Run the LST TRCTASK command to query the trace tasks. or delete a trace task. Ltd. NOTE l The tasks whose Trace Mode is Report Messages listed in the query result can only be deleted on the LMT where it was started. 98 . respectively. Prerequisites l A tracing task is successfully created. and then click Stop. Click Trace on the LMT main page.6 Managing the Trace File This section describes how to query the trace files on the OMU and upload the trace files onto the local PC as required. l Through menu operations Procedure 1.5 Managing Tracing Tasks This section describes how to manage tracing tasks. l If Trace Mode is set to Save to OMU. and click Query to query the information about the trace tasks. l Through MML commands 1. select the target task listed in the Result area. The Manage Trace Task dialog box is displayed. In the displayed Manage Trace Task tab page. l Trace messages are reported. l The tasks whose Create Type is Net Create listed in the query result are created by the OMU according to the command from the BSC.2.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management NOTE During multi-user tracing or inter-RNC tracing. restart. Prerequisites l A tracing task is successfully created. ----End 7. Ltd.1 Tracing OS Messages This section describes how to trace messages between the exchange module of the OMU and internal modules of a board or between internal modules of different boards. The trace data pane displays the traced message flow. Step 3 In the OS Trace dialog box.3. NOTICE Only ADMINISTRATOR-level users are authorized for performing Tracing OS Messages because it involves private information of users. Run the LST TRCRST command to query the trace files. The Trace tab page is displayed. ----End 7. 7. Double-click OS Trace. Click Trace on the LMT main page. select the target file listed in the Result area. set the parameters as required. choose the Manage Trace File node. 4. set the parameters in the Upload configure area.3 Device Commissioning This section describes how to perform routine device commissioning. Context This task can be performed to trace the sent and received messages between two modules or messages sent from and received by the same module. 3. and then click Query to view the information about the trace files saved on the OMU. The Manage Trace File dialog box is displayed. Step 2 On the Trace Navigation Tree pane. choose Trace > > Device Commissioning. The Trace tab page is displayed. On the Trace Navigation Tree pane. and click Submit. Through MML commands 1. 2. In the displayed Manage Trace File dialog box. set the parameters in the Search Configure area. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. To upload a trace file to the local PC. Procedure Step 1 Click Trace on the LMT main page.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Procedure l l Through menu operations 1. 99 . and then click Upload. | \ < > ? / { } [ ] ----End Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3 Saving Traced Messages. the messages exchanged between the internal modules of an OMU cannot be traced.3.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Parameter Description Trace Type Trace object. digits. The Trace tab page is displayed. Double-click Emergency Diagnosis. choose Trace > > Device Commissioning.. l Pressing the Enter key is not supported.3 Tracing Mode.1. set the parameters as required. l Pressing the Enter key is not supported. and click Submit. spaces and the following special characters are supported: ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + . Letters. Trace Reason l Reason of starting this tracing task.. The trace data pane displays the traced message flow.2.|\<>?/{}[] Trace Mode See 7.= `~:". Step 3 In the Emergency Diagnosis dialog box. Sender Parameter When tracing the messages exchanged between the OMU and other boards. you must set IP Type to OMU rather than Specified IP. Step 2 On the Trace Navigation Tree pane. Letters. 100 . Save File See 7.2 Emergency Diagnosis This section describes how to redirect the messages printed through the serial port of a specified subsystem to the message browse window of the LMT. Context NOTICE Only ADMINISTRATOR-level users are authorized for performing Emergency Diagnosis. that is. l Reason of starting this tracing task.= ` ~ : " . . Procedure Step 1 Click Trace on the LMT main page. Ltd. spaces and the following special characters are supported: ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + . Receiver Parameter IP Type cannot be set to OMU for the sender and the receiver simultaneously. ----End 7. digits. which then discard the packet. see the value of Trace Time (OMU time) in the Packet Capture interface. l To capture panel Ethernet packets. Context l The following problems can be located by capturing packets: – The base station controller does not receive the packet.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management 7. set PortType (Inner) to Ethernet Frame. you can check whether the correct packets are sent to and received by interface boards and other boards in the system by capturing backplane packets. set PortType (Outer) to Ethernet Frame. l To capture panel Ethernet packets. l The following types of packet capturing are supported: – Panel Ethernet packet capturing – Backplane Ethernet packet capturing – Panel Ethernet + backplane Ethernet packet capturing l Only one packet tracing task can be started for each interface board at a time. Prerequisites The communication between the LMT and the BSC is normal. Step 4 Click Submit. to start capturing packets. the packet is discarded by the board without being sent to other boards in the system. Step 3 In the Packet Capture dialog box. If you only need to capture the panel Ethernet packet. Ltd.3. and set the parameters in the Inner tab. – The packet is sent to non-interface boards. 101 . Tracing of multiple interface boards can be started simultaneously. The Packet Capture dialog box is displayed. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Only the header of the user plane packet (not including the payload of the packet) can be captured. Step 2 In the Trace Navigation Tree pane. For the specific capturing duration. l When packets are discarded between two boards or connection cannot be established between two boards.3 Capturing Packets This section describes how to capture packets and locate transmission channel disconnections and packet losses by analyzing packet headers. which may be in an interface board or any other board in the system. choose Trace Management > Device Commissioning > Packet Capture. – After entering the interface board. and set the parameters in the Outer tab. NOTE l Panel Ethernet packet capture and backplane Ethernet packet capture can be supported simultaneously. The Trace tab is displayed. set parameters as required. set PortType(Inner) to Inner Invalid or set PortType (Outer) to Outer Invalid. Procedure Step 1 Click Trace on the LMT main page.. Then you can quickly locate the problem. For the FG2a and GOUa. and backplane Ethernet packet capturing is not supported. you cannot capture packets with VLAN IDs and those with no VLAN IDs at the same time. VLAN Tag Indicates whether the data packet carries a VLAN ID..BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management l Basic Mode: just enter the basic parameters (subrack number and physical slot number) to start the packet capturing function. Letters. Untagged: The data packet does not carry a VLAN ID. Intercept Length Each Ethernet frame captured (especially for long packets) is reduced to the "Intercept length" of the packet. only Panel Ethernet packet capturing is supported. For descriptions about protocol types. Tagged: The data packet carries a VLAN ID. Physical Slot No Indicates the number of the physical slot which houses the interface board. 102 . Therefore. Port No Indicates the number of the port on the interface board panel. spaces and the following special characters are supported: ! @ # $ % ^ & * ()_+-=`~:". Table 7-3 Protocol Types Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Protocol Types Description All Packets All packets on the specified port Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Trace Time (minute): Duration of the tracing task in minutes. VLAN Tag can be set only to Tagged or Untagged. That is. If the captured packet is shorter than the "Intercept length". l Pressing the Enter key is not supported. Scene Select Indicates the scene under which packets are captured are differentiated by protocol type. this is defined as the basic mode. Under the basic mode. digits. the actual length captured prevails. Trace Time Start Time: The start time and end time of the trace task. Table 7-2 Basic Mode Interface Parameter Description Trace Reason l Reason of starting this tracing task. see Table 7-3.. Ltd. the rest of which is not submitted.|\<>?/{}[] Subrack No Indicates the number of the subrack which houses the interface board. Tagged&Untagged: The data packet carries or does not carry a VLAN ID. .1ag Packet Packets whose protocol type is 802. The destination port number of DHCP response (using relay) packets must be 67. IP AddressSpecified Packet All IP packets whose local and peer IP addresses are specified 802. UMTS FP Packet Packets whose protocol type is UMTS Frame Protocol. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. To capture these packets.3ah/LACP Packet All slow protocol packets. To capture these packets. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) TCP Packet Packets whose protocol type is Transmission Control Protocol (TCP).3ah packets and LACP packets ARP Packet IP packets whose protocol type is Address Resolution Protocol (ARP). The destination port number of Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) response packets (not using relay) must be 68. including all request packets and response packets ICMP Packet IP packets whose protocol type is Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) BFD Packet IP packets whose protocol type is UDP The UDP destination port number must be 3784. set Peer IP Address to an appropriate value. IPPM Packet IP packets whose protocol type is UDP The UDP destination port number must be 65020. UMTS IUUP Packet Packets whose protocol type is UMTS Iu User Plane. The UDP destination port number must be 2152. including O&M packets of the NodeB and TWAMP packets GTPU Control Packet IP packets whose protocol type is UDP GTPU Data Packet IP packets whose protocol type is UDP 802. IP packets whose protocol type is UDP The UDP destination port number must be 2152. The destination port number of DHCP request packets must be 67. including 802. To capture these packets.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Protocol Types Description DHCP Packet IP packets whose protocol type is UDP. 103 . set Peer IP Address to an appropriate value.1ag CFM PTRAU Packet Packets whose protocol type is Packet Transcoder and Rate Adapter Unit (PTRAU) RTP Packet Packets whose protocol type is Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) UMTS RTP Packet Packets whose protocol type is UMTS Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP). set Peer IP Address to an appropriate value. Ltd. several other parameters are required to start the packet capturing function. Outer Local IP Address Specifies the local IP address of the IP packet to be captured.. the actual length captured prevails. it indicates capturing of all packets at the local IP address.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Protocol Types Description UMTS PDCP Packet Packets whose protocol type is UMTS Packet Data Convergence Protocol. backplane Ethernet packet capturing and panel Ethernet + backplane Ethernet packet capturing. which is defined as the advanced mode. the rest of which is not submitted. set Peer IP Address to an appropriate value. If left blank. or the source MAC address when "In" is selected for the "outer trace direction". or the destination IP address when the "In" is selected for the "outer trace direction". l Out: tracing packets sent from the port of the interface board panel. Outer Port Number Indicates the number of the port on the interface board panel. Outer Trace Direction l In: tracing packets entering the port of the interface board panel from the outside. This is the destination MAC address of the packet when "Out" is selected for the "outer trace direction". 104 . UMTS IURCFP Packet Packets whose protocol type is UMTS IUR Common Frame Protocol. Outer Peer MAC Address Specifies the peer MAC address of the Ethernet frame to be captured. l Both: tracing packets in the two directions simultaneously. If the captured packet is shorter than the "Intercept Length". l Advanced Mode: In addition to the basic parameters (subrack number and physical slot number). To capture these packets. Outer Intercept length: Each Ethernet frame captured (especially for long packets) is reduced to the "Intercept Length" of the packet. To capture these packets. Ltd. Table 7-4 Advanced Mode Interface Parameter Description PortType (Outer) Indicates capturing of packets at the port of the interface board panel. If left blank. it indicates capturing of all packets at the peer MAC address. set Peer IP Address to an appropriate value. This is the source IP address of the packet when the "Out" is selected for the "outer trace direction". Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The advanced mode supports panel Ethernet packet capturing. Inner Trace Direction l In: tracing the packets entering the interface board backplane from the SCU board. Local User Datagram Protocol (UDP) Port No Specifies the local User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port number of the IP packet to be captured. This is the destination MAC address of the packet when the "Out" is selected for the "inner trace direction". or the source IP address when the "In" is selected for the "outer trace direction". Inner Port Number The number of the port on the interface board backplane. PortType (Inner) Indicates capturing of packets at the port of the interface board backplane. l Out: tracing packets sent from the interface board backplane to the SCU board. Inner Peer MAC Address Specifies the peer MAC address of the Ethernet frame to be captured. If left blank. This is the destination IP address of the packet when the "Out" is selected for the "outer trace direction". the rest of which is not submitted. This is the source User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port number of the packet when the "Out" is selected for the "outer trace direction". or the source User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port number when the "In" is selected for the "outer trace direction". Inner Intercept length: Each Ethernet frame captured (especially for long packets) is reduced to the "Intercept length" of the packet. If left blank. If left blank. l Both: tracing packets in the two directions simultaneously. or the source MAC address when the "In" is selected for the "inner trace direction". If the captured packet is shorter than the "Intercept length". or the destination User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port number when the "In" is selected for the "outer trace direction". it indicates capturing of all packets at the local User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. it indicates capturing of all packets at the peer IP address. it indicates capturing of all packets at the peer User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Interface Parameter Description Outer Peer IP Address Specifies the peer IP address of the IP packet to be captured. 105 . If left blank. Peer User Datagram Protocol (UDP) Port No Specifies the peer User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port number of the IP packet to be captured. This is the destination User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port number of the packet when the "Out" is selected for the "outer trace direction". Ltd. it indicates capturing of all packets at the peer MAC address. the actual length captured prevails.. delete or restart a packet capture task.3. /bam/common/ fam/trace/16778026_ packet capturing _20120927_201909.. NOTE Packet capturing results are generated after the task is complete. 106 . stop. Figure 7-3 AC tracing Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.log. choose Trace > > Device Commissioning and double-click AC Trace.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management ----End Follow-up Procedure l You can manage packet capture in Manage Trace File on the Trace tab. Step 2 In the Trace Navigation Tree. 7. You can query.4 AC Tracing This section describes how to trace signaling messages over the interface between the base station controller and access controller (AC). packet capturing log files (for example. l After packet capturing is complete. The AC Trace dialog box is displayed. Procedure Step 1 Click Trace on the LMT main page. Ltd. as shown in Figure 7-3.zip) are created and saved on the OMU. The Trace tab page is displayed. BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Step 3 In the AC Trace dialog box. Save File See 7. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The DHCP Trace dialog box is displayed.1. l Pressing the Enter key is not supported. choose Trace > > Device Commissioning and double-click DHCP Trace. 107 . The Trace tab page is displayed. which uniquely identifies an AC and can be queried by running the LST ACADDR command.3. Table 7-5 Parameter Description Parameter Description AC Index (0-9) AC index. spaces and the following special characters are supported: ! @ # $ % ^ & *()_+-=`~:".3 Tracing Mode. Ltd.2. Step 2 In the Trace Navigation Tree. Procedure Step 1 Click Trace on the LMT main page. as shown in Figure 7-4. Trace Reason l Reason of starting this tracing task. digits..|\<>?/{}[] Trace Mode See 7. Letters. set parameters as required and click Submit.3 Saving Traced Messages. ----End 7.5 DHCP Tracing This section describes how to trace DHCP packets.. Ltd. Indicates the number of the subrack housing the board to be traced. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In scenarios with active and standby boards. Port Type Indicates the transmission type of the port. set parameters as required and then click Submit. Indicates the number of the slot housing the board to be traced. Slot No. 108 .BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Figure 7-4 DHCP tracing Step 3 In the DHCP Trace dialog box. It can also be queried by running the LST BRD command.. Specify the slot number in scenarios with independent boards. the slot number should be an even number. Board Type Indicates the type of the board to be traced. Table 7-6 Parameter Description Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Parameter Description Subrack No. The board type is automatically displayed after the slot number is specified. /Link No. However. l NodeB: indicates the UMTS base station. If this field is left blank. l Pressing the Enter key is not supported.1. There are four options: BTS. ESN Indicates the electronic serial number.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Parameter Description Port No.. one is a main ESN and the other is an optional ESN. Indicates the number of the port. Save File See 7. The Iu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed. DHCP Product ID Indicates the type of base station to be traced. You can perform this task to identify the failure cause in the following procedures: RAB assignment. Step 2 Under Trace Navigation Tree. If two ESNs are carried. including the connection-oriented messages and the connectionless messages. Ltd. paging. ----End 7. l Other: indicates other base stations. as shown in Figure 7-5.4 UMTS Services This section describes how to perform tracing tasks related to UMTS services.2. RAB release. spaces and the following special characters are supported: ! @ # $ % ^&*()_+-=`~:".3 Saving Traced Messages. Procedure Step 1 Click Trace on the LMT main page. The Trace tab page is displayed./ Group No. It is recommended that users should not specify this field. l SRAN: indicates the SRAN base station. digits. NOTE To trace SRAN base station. the entire board will be traced. select NodeB and SRAN. and Other. Letters. At least one ESN is carried in DHCP packets. If an optional ESN is typed in this field. NodeB. initial UE message. the main ESN is always displayed on the dll parsing interface. all DHCP packets will be traced. If this field is not specified. choose Trace > UMTS Services > Iu Interface Trace. and relocation. 109 . security mode control. Iu release.3 Tracing Mode. or port group to be traced. 7. l BTS: indicates the GSM base station. link. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.|\<>?/{}[] Trace Mode See 7.1 Tracing Messages on the Iu Interface This section describes how to trace the signaling messages over the Iu interface. DHCP packets carrying this ESN will be traced. Trace Reason l Reason of starting this tracing task.4. SRAN.. run the LST URNCBASIC command. Table 7-7 Parameter Description Parameter Basic Description RNC ID indicates the RNC ID of the cell to be traced. Letters. 110 .= ` ~ : " . DPC Configuration can be set to All DPC or Specified DPC. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1. set parameters and click Submit. Trace Type Trace Type.2. Trace Reason l Reason of starting this tracing task.3 Saving Traced Messages. digits.3 Tracing Mode. If Specified DPC is selected. To query it. Save File See 7.. l Pressing the Enter key is not supported. | \ <>?/{}[] Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Trace Mode See 7. . spaces and the following special characters are supported: ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + . DPC(HEX) needs to be specified.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Figure 7-5 Message tracing on the Iu interface Step 3 In the Iu Interface Trace dialog box. Ltd. To query it. Ltd. run the LST SCTPLNK command. Step 2 On the Trace Navigation Tree pane. 111 . run the LST SAALLNK command. If this parameter is set to Link Set. M3UA M3UA Trace Type Set this parameter to Specified Link or Link Set. choose Trace > UMTS Services > Iupc Interface Trace. Signaling Link Set Index indicates the number of an M3UA link set.2 Tracing Messages on the Iupc Interface This section describes how to trace the signaling messages over the Iupc (Iu Position Calculation) interface. which can be queried by running the LST MTP3LNK command. Signaling Link ID indicates the number of an M3UA link. Procedure Step 1 Click Trace on the LMT main page. You can perform this task to identify the cause of the failure in the following scenarios: PCAP Position Initiations. run the LST M3LNK command. Signaling Link Set Index Index of an MTP3 signaling link set. which can be queried by running the LST MTP3LKS command. The Trace tab page is displayed. SAAL SAAL Link ID indicates the number of an SAAL link. as shown in Figure 7-6. To query it. ----End 7. a large number of messages are traced. PCAP Position Activation.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Parameter MTP3 Description MTP3 Trace Type Set this parameter to Specified Link or Link Set. a large number of messages are traced. To query it. The Iupc Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.. If this parameter is set to Link Set. Signaling Link Code Index of an MTP3 link in the specified link set.4. run the LST M3LKS command. To query it. SCTP SCTP Link ID indicates the number of an SCTP link. including the connection-oriented messages. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 112 . Trace Type Trace Type Trace Reason l Reason of starting this tracing task. Ltd.3 Saving Traced Messages. Table 7-8 Iupc Interface Trace Tab Parameter Basic Description RNC ID indicates the RNC ID of the cell to be traced. DPC Configuration can be set to All DPC or Specified DPC. set parameters and click Submit.2.|\<>?/{}[] Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Trace Mode See 7. DPC(HEX) needs to be specified. spaces and the following special characters are supported: ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ +-=`~:". l Pressing the Enter key is not supported. Letters. To query it. If Specified DPC is selected.3 Tracing Mode. digits...1. Save File See 7.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Figure 7-6 Message tracing on the Iupc interface Step 3 In the Iupc Interface Trace dialog box. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the LST URNCBASIC command. BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Parameter Description SCTP SCTP Link ID indicates the number of an SCTP link. To query it, run the LST SCTPLNK command. M3UA M3UA Trace Type Set this parameter to Specified Link or Link Set. If this parameter is set to Link Set, a large number of messages are traced. Signaling Link Set Index indicates the number of an M3UA link set. To query it, run the LST M3LKS command. Signaling Link ID indicates the number of an M3UA link. To query it, run the LST M3LNK command. ----End Result NOTE In the message browse window of Iupc Interface Tracing, the number in the Information Source column represents the DPC of the neighboring RNC. You can query more information about the DPC by running the command LST N7DPC. 7.4.3 Tracing Messages on the Iur Interface This section describes how to trace the signaling messages over the Iur interface, including the connection-oriented messages and the connectionless messages. You can perform this task to identify the failure cause in the following procedures on the Iur interface: radio link setup, radio link addition, radio link deletion, resource release on common transport channel, DL power control, and paging. Procedure Step 1 Click Trace on the LMT main page. The Trace tab page is displayed. Step 2 Under Trace Navigation Tree, choose Trace > UMTS Services > Iur Interface Trace. The Iur Interface Trace dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-7. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 113 BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Figure 7-7 Message tracing on the Iur interface Step 3 In the Iur Interface Trace dialog box, set parameters and Click Sumit. Table 7-9 Parameter Description Parameter Basic Description RNC ID indicates the RNC ID of the cell to be traced. To query it, run the LST URNCBASIC command. DPC Configuratio n can be set to All DPC or Specified DPC. If Specified DPC is selected, DPC(HEX) needs to be specified. Trace Type Trace Type. Trace Reason l Reason of starting this tracing task. l Pressing the Enter key is not supported. Letters, digits, spaces and the following special characters are supported: ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + - = ` ~ : " , . | \ < > ?/{}[] Trace Mode Issue 02 (2015-05-08) See 7.1.3 Tracing Mode. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 114 BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Parameter IUR Description Save File See 7.2.3 Saving Traced Messages. IUR_G In the IUR tab page, if you select IUR_G, the Iur-g interface messages between BSC6900s or in a BSC6900 are traced. If you select InMbsc, the Iur-g interface messages between the GSM and UMTS in a BSC6900 are traced. InMbsc MTP3 MTP3 Trace Type Set this parameter to Specified Link or Link Set. If this parameter is set to Link Set, a large number of messages are traced. Signaling Link Set Index Index of an MTP3 signaling link set, which can be queried by running the LST MTP3LKS command. Signaling Link Code Index of an MTP3 link in the specified link set, which can be queried by running the LST MTP3LNK command. SAAL SAAL Link ID indicates the number of an SAAL link. To query it, run the LST SAALLNK command. SCTP SCTP Link ID indicates the number of an SCTP link. To query it, run the LST SCTPLNK command. M3UA M3UA Trace Type Set this parameter to Specified Link or Link Set. If this parameter is set to Link Set, a large number of messages are traced. Signaling Link Set Index indicates the number of an M3UA link set. To query it, run the LST M3LKS command. Signaling Link ID indicates the number of an M3UA link. To query it, run the LST M3LNK command. ----End 7.4.4 Tracing Messages on the Iub Interface This section describes how to trace the signaling messages over the Iub interface, that is, the NodeB Application Part (NBAP) messages. You can perform this task to identify the failure cause in the following procedures on the Iub interface: radio link setup, radio link reconfiguration, resource audit, cell setup, cell reconfiguration, common transport channel setup, and system information update. Procedure Step 1 Click Trace on the LMT main page. The Trace tab page is displayed. Step 2 Under Trace Navigation Tree, choose Trace > UMTS Services > Iub Interface Trace. The Iub Interface Trace dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-8. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 115 BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Figure 7-8 Message tracing on the Iub interface Step 3 In the Iub Interface Trace dialog box, set parameters and Click Submit. Table 7-10 Parameter Description Parameter Description Basic RNC ID indicates the RNC ID of the cell to be traced. To query it, run the LST URNCBASIC command. NodeB Trace Type l All NodeB: traces NodeB Application Part (NBAP) messages of all NodeBs. l All Ports of a NodeB: traces NBAP messages of a specified NodeB on all ports. Both NodeB Control Ports (NCPs) and Communication Control Ports (CCPs) are to be traced. l Specified Port of a NodeB: traces NBAP messages of a specified NodeB on a specified type of port. Either NCPs or CCPs are to be traced. Trace Type Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Trace Type Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 116 BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Parameter Description Trace Reason l Reason of starting this tracing task. l Pressing the Enter key is not supported. Letters, digits, spaces and the following special characters are supported: ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + - = ` ~ : " , . | \ < > ? /{}[] Trace Mode See 7.1.3 Tracing Mode. Save File See 7.2.3 Saving Traced Messages. SAAL SAAL Link ID indicates the number of an SAAL link. To query it, run the LST SAALLNK command. SCTP SCTP Link ID indicates the number of an SCTP link. To query it, run the LST SCTPLNK command. SCTPS RV SCTPSRV ID SCTP Signaling Server ID Peer IP Address Peer IP address Peer Port Peer Port No. ----End 7.4.5 Tracing Messages on the Uu Interface This section describes how to trace all or specified types of signaling messages in a specified cell over the Uu interface. You can perform this task to identify the failure cause in the following procedures: RRC connection setup, radio bearer setup, physical channel reconfiguration, and cell update. Procedure Step 1 Click Trace on the LMT main page. The Trace tab page is displayed. Step 2 Under Trace Navigation Tree, choose Trace > UMTS Services > Uu Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-9. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 117 BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Figure 7-9 Message tracing on the Uu interface Step 3 In the Uu Interface Trace dialog box, set the parameters as required. Then Click Submit. Table 7-11 Parameter Description Parameter Description RNC ID indicates the RNC ID of the cell to be traced. To query it, run the LST URNCBASIC command. Cell Config needs to be set to the ID of the cell sending and receiving messages. The parameter can be queried by running the LST UCELL command. Trace Reason l Reason of starting this tracing task. l Pressing the Enter key is not supported. Letters, digits, spaces and the following special characters are supported: ! @ # $ % ^ & * ()_+-=`~:",.|\<>?/{}[] Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Trace Mode See 7.1.3 Tracing Mode. Save File See 7.2.3 Saving Traced Messages. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 118 Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.4. The setting can be queried by running the LST UNCELLDETECTSWITCH command. as shown in Figure 7-10. Figure 7-10 MNCDT message tracing Step 3 Set parameters in the MNCDT Trace dialog box and then click Submit.6 Tracing MNCDT Messages This section describes how to detect missing neighboring cell relationship of a cell. 119 . The Trace tab page is displayed. Procedure Step 1 Click Trace on the LMT main page. Ltd. inter-frequency. which are independent of each other. you can detect missing neighboring cell relationship. MNCDT consists of intra-frequency.. The MNCDT Trace dialog box is displayed. choose Trace > UMTS Services > MNCDT Trace. Using the Missing Neighbor Cell Detect Trace (MNCDT) function.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management ----End 7. and inter-RAT MNCDT. Step 2 Under Trace Navigation Tree. Prerequisites The parameter switch for detecting missing neighboring cell relationship is set to ON. End of NCC indicates the end of the NCC for the cell to be traced for detecting missing neighboring cell relationship. The parameter value ranges from 0 to 7. End of BCC must be greater than or equal to Start of BCC. Letters. To query it. digits. and Inter-RAT. Inter-frequency. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. End of Primary Scrambling Code indicates the maximum scrambling code for an MNCDT task. End of BCC indicates the end of the BCC for the cell to be traced for detecting missing neighboring cell relationship.1. The parameter value ranges from 0 to 7. Uplink UARFCN indicates the uplink UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (UARFCN) of the cell to be traced for detecting missing neighboring relationship.= ` ~ : " . | \ < > ?/{}[] Interfrequency Inter-RAT Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Trace Mode See 7.2. Downlink UARFCN indicates the downlink UARFCN of the cell to be traced for detecting missing neighboring relationship. spaces and the following special characters are supported: ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + . Ltd. Trace Reason l Reason of starting this tracing task. Start of Primary Scrambling Code indicates the minimum scrambling code for an MNCDT task. Start of NCC indicates the start of the Network Color Code (NCC) for the cell to be traced for detecting missing neighboring cell relationship. 120 . The parameter value ranges from 0 to 7. l Pressing the Enter key is not supported.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Table 7-12 Parameter Description Parameter Basic Description RNC ID indicates the RNC ID of the cell to be traced. Save File See 7. run the LST URNCBASIC command. . Start of BCC indicates the start of the Base Transceiver Station Color Code (BCC) for the cell to be traced for detecting missing neighboring cell relationship. End of NCC must be greater than or equal to Start of NCC.3 Saving Traced Messages. Detection Type includes Intra-frequency.. The parameter value ranges from 0 to 7.3 Tracing Mode. End of Primary Scrambling Code must be not less than Start of Primary Scrambling Code. UI_FAM_UT_L2_T XT_FWD_MSG Selecting it enables the LMT to display real-time information such as the RLC state. Ltd. UI_FAM_UT_INTR A_MSG Selecting it enables the LMT to display communication messages between internal units of the RNC. ----End 7. and information about HS-DSCH capacity allocation. UI_FAM_UT_GTPU _DATA_FWD_MSG Selecting it enables the LMT to display statistics on packets received and sent at the GPRS Tunneling Protocol for User Plane (GTPU) layer. Tracing these messages in real time on the LMT facilitates debugging and problem analysis.. FP synchronization information. End of BCCH ARFCN indicates the maximum ARFCN for an MNCDT task. Analysis of these values helps users to determine whether an admission request is denied because of heavy load and insufficient resources on the Uu interface. including text messages. and IOS tracing.7 Message Settings Clicking this node in the navigation tree enables users to select messages that need to be traced during UE tracing. 121 . Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The text messages can be of the TXT or TXT (Command Code) type.4. UI_FAM_UT_REAL _TIME_INFO Selecting it enables the LMT to display real-time information such as information about cell admission and cell load control. UI_FAM_UT_PRIN T_INFO Selecting it enables the LMT to display real-time log information. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Message Name Description UI_FAM_UT_CELL _INFO Selecting it enables the LMT to display values of received total wideband power (RTWP) and transmitted carrier power (TCP) in a cell. cell tracing. It can be set either DCS1800 or PCS1900 if the neighbor cell is not DCS1800 or PCS1900 cell. UI_FAM_UT_CTRL _TBL Selecting it enables the LMT to display mapping between UE IDs of the UE and internal units of the RNC. Start of BCCH ARFCN indicates the minimum Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (ARFCN) for an MNCDT task.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Parameter Description Band Indicator Indicates the band to which the overlapping UARFCNs between bands DCS1800 and PCS1900 are attributed. only G1 command group users (ADMINISTRATOR and CUSTOM users with G1 command group permission) are allowed to perform UE tracing task. 7. Otherwise. such as enabling the anonymous function and deleting the folder that saves trace records after you finish processing data. This function provides an anonymous data processing method.4. l When entering IMSI. You are recommended to comply with local laws when executing the task and take ample measures to fully protect user data. UI_FAM_UT_STAN DARD_MSG Selecting it enables the LMT to display UE messages traced on standard interfaces. and user IMSI data is directly entered in IMSI.. check whether IMSI data to be entered must be anonymous by running the LST USERIDANONSWITCH command and querying User Identity Anonymity Switch. 122 . – If User Identity Anonymity Switch is OFF.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Message Name Description UI_FAM_UT_RPRT _CELL_EVENT_IN FO Selecting it enables the LMT to display the number of UEs in a cell and the propagation delay from the NodeB to the UEs. the tracing task becomes invalid. see U2000 Fault Management User Guide. contact Huawei technical support. NOTE l Change the anonymous policy and cipher key on the U2000 by choosing Trace and Maintenance > Signaling Trace > Anonymous Policy Management > Anonymous Cypher Key Management (application style) or Trace and Maintenance > Monitor > Signaling Trace > Anonymous Policy Management > Anonymous Cypher Key Management (traditional style). UI_FAM_UT_STAT E_TRANS Selecting it enables the LMT to trace state transitions of the UE. l If you change the anonymous policy or cipher key of a started tracing task.8 Tracing UE Messages This section describes how to trace UE messages. the anonymous policy is disabled. For details. You can perform this task to analyze the call procedure failure cause. Ltd. you need to restart the tracing task. and anonymous IMSI data must be entered in IMSI. The anonymous IMSI data is the IMSI data encrypted by the HMACUtil using the cipher key. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l There is no way to avoid that some user data such as International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) will be used during problem location and resolution. – If User Identity Anonymity Switch is ON. Context l As private information of users is revealed during the tracing. the anonymous policy is enabled. l For details about how to obtain the HMACUtil. . The Trace tab page is displayed. Ltd. run the LST URNCBASIC command. choose Trace > UMTS Services > UE Trace. The UE Trace dialog box is displayed. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. To query it. Figure 7-11 UE message tracing Step 3 In the displayed UE Trace dialog box. 123 . Step 2 Under Trace Navigation Tree. as shown in Figure 7-11. set the parameters as required. Table 7-13 UE Tab Parameter Description Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Parameter Description RNC ID indicates the RNC ID of the cell to be traced. Then Click Submit.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Procedure Step 1 Click Trace on the LMT main page. TRACE RRC PROCEDUR E Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Indicating whether to trace messages on the standard interface during an RRC connection setup process when the international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI) is specified. and MNC. Choosing to trace the UE by the TMSI. If CDT_MSG_FULL_TRACE is set to OFF. and MNC. When this switch is turned on. MCC. MCC.. and the messages sent before the RANAP COMMON ID message are buffered and reported. the UE tracing task traces all the messages that are sent after the RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message. 124 . l If you trace a UE by specifying the IMSI and the IMSI is carried in the RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message sent by the UE for network access.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Parameter Description IMSI/ MSISDN/ IMEI/TMSI/ P-TMSI Identifying the UE to be traced. the messages sent before the RANAP COMMON ID message are discarded instead. Choosing to trace the UE by the PTMSI. RAC. you need to specify LAC. l Assume that you trace a UE by specifying the IMSI and the IMSI is not carried in the RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message but only carried in the RANAP COMMON ID message. the UE tracing task traces the messages that are sent after the RANAP COMMON ID message. users with specified IMSIs cannot trace messages on the standard interface until a second RRC connection setup process. you need to specify LAC. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If CDT_MSG_FULL_TRACE is set to ON. Ltd. and UU tab pages. Tracing tasks configured on Other. 125 . IUB. IUPC. For use of it. Debug Mode is unavailable. Internal Event on the Other1 tab page. IUB. Ltd.|\<>?/{}[] Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and UU tab pages. IUPC. Debug Mode indicates a maintenance mode used for tracing communication messages between units of the RNC. spaces and the following special characters are supported: ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + . and UU tab pages and Internal Event on the Other1 tab page. IUB. IU. L2 TRB packet header report (Iu interface). the following messages are traced: all standard signaling messages on the IUR. and Layer 2 data transfer periodic report on the Other tab page. the following messages are traced: all standard signaling messages on the IUR. l UE CDT Trace Method (Debug + Internal Event): When this template is selected. l UE CDT Trace Method (Debug + Internal Event + L2 Statistics + SRB): When this template is selected. Internal Event on the Other1 tab page. Layer 2 data transfer periodic report on the Other tab page. l Pressing the Enter key is not supported. IU.. IU.= `~:". digits. Letters. the following messages are traced: all standard signaling messages on the IUR.. L2 SRB Data Report. and UU tab pages. l UE CDT Trace Method (Debug + Internal Event + L2 Statistics + SRB + TRB + MOS): When this template is selected. IU. and L2 SRB Data Report. Layer 2 data transfer periodic report on the Other tab page. IU. and Bind tab pages take effect only when Debug Mode is selected. l UE CDT Trace Method (Debug + Internal Event + L2 Statistics + SRB + TRB): When this template is selected. IUPC. L2 SRB Data Report. l Standard UE CDT Trace Method: When this template is selected.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Parameter Description Trace Config Template Commonly used tracing items are combined to form various templates. Other1. Internal Event on the Other1 tab page. and Voice Analysis. IUPC. L2 TRB packet header report (Iub interface). the following messages are traced: all standard signaling messages on the IUR. IUB. contact Huawei technical support personnel. IUPC. IUB. and L2 TRB packet header report (Iu interface). Following describe the meanings of various parameters in different templates: l User-defined Mode: Users can set parameters on each tab page in the UE Trace dialog box. Layer 2 data transfer periodic report on the Other tab page. and UU tab pages. so that users can start a tracing task conveniently. and UU tab pages are traced. Trace Reason l Reason of starting this tracing task. the following messages are traced: all standard signaling messages on the IUR. l UE CDT Trace Method (Debug + Internal Event + L2 Statistics): When this template is selected. IU. IUB. all standard signaling messages on the IUR. Internal Event on the Other1 tab page. IUPC. L2 TRB packet header report (Iub interface). Table 7-14 Monitor Tab Parameter Description Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Parameter Description Uplink SIR Selecting the counter starts monitoring of uplink Signal to Interference Ratio (SIR) during tracing of a single UE.25s to 64s.25s to 64s. Downlink BLER Selecting the counter starts monitoring of Block Error Rate (BLER) during tracing of a single UE.25s to 64s. the current mode is reported. 126 . The period of reporting the monitoring reports ranges from 0. PCPICH Ec/ No RSCP Selecting the counter starts monitoring of PCPICH Ec/No and Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) during tracing of a single UE. RTWP(0. The counter is reported periodically.. The counter is reported every 0.4 second. The counter is reported periodically.1s to 60s.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Parameter Description Trace Mode See 7. Downlink Tx Code Power Selecting the counter starts monitoring of downlink code transmit power during tracing of a single UE. The counter is reported periodically.3 Tracing Mode.4s) Selecting the counter starts monitoring of downlink transmit power transmitted for the cell serving the current UE. The counter is reported every 0.4 second.2. The counter is reported periodically. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. TRX Transmit Power(0. UE Tx Power Selecting the counter starts monitoring of uplink transmit power during tracing of a single UE. The counter is reported periodically.1.3 Saving Traced Messages. The period of reporting the monitoring reports ranges from 0. Save File See 7.4s) Selecting the counter starts monitoring of received total wideband power (RTWP) received for the cell serving the current UE. The period of reporting the monitoring reports ranges from 0. The period of reporting the monitoring reports ranges from 0. Ltd. AMR Mode Selecting the counter starts monitoring of AMR mode during tracing of a single UE. The counter is reported periodically. If AMR mode changes.1s to 60s. The period of reporting the monitoring reports ranges from 0. the user needs to configure the FTP server and ensure that the FTP server connects to the master RNC and overflow RNC. When RNC in Pool is used for user-plane load-sharing. L2 Data Report Includes parameters that enable statistics on packets received and sent at layer 2 to be reported to the LMT. l L2 TRB Packet Header Report (Iub Interface): Selecting it enables frame headers received in the UL or sent in the DL on the user plane at the FP layer to be reported to the LMT. Report File is recommended if the user selects L2 TRB packet header report (Iub interface) or L2 TRB packet header report (Iu interface) on the Other tab page. the TCP/IP headers of the following TCP packets are reported to the LMT: – In the downlink. RNC in Pool is used for user-plane load-sharing. l Report Time(s): indicates the period for reporting L2 Data Report.. Analysis of these statistics helps users to determine whether a fault occurs on the RNC side. user-plane TCP packets that are received from the UE and transmitted to the server at the PDCP layer. Transport Data Periodic Report Selecting it enables statistics on packets received and sent by interface boards to be periodically reported to the LMT. If the value of this parameter is UP_SHARE. l L2 TRB Packet Header Report (Iu Interface): Selecting it enables packet TCP/IP headers sent in the UL or received in the DL on the user plane at the RLC layer to be reported to the LMT. l TCP Proxy Data Report: After the TCP proxy function is enabled. You can use the FTP server to upload the tracing results on the OMU to the directory specified by Upload Path.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Table 7-15 Other Tab Parameter Description Parameter Description Layer 2 Data Transfer Periodic Report Selecting it enables statistics on packets received and sent at layer 2 to be periodically reported to the LMT. Report Period Indicates the period for reporting Layer 2 data transfer periodic report. – In the uplink. The tracing results generated by the master RNC are saved on the OMU of the master RNC and the tracing results generated by the overflow RNC are saved on the OMU of the overflow RNC. l L2 SRB Data Report: enables packets received in the UL and sent in the DL on the control plane at the Frame Protocol (FP) layer to be reported to the LMT in messages. After the user selects Report File. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NOTE You can run the MML command LST UPOOLLOADSHAREPARA to query the value of UP Load Sharing Policy. 127 . user-plane TCP packets that are received from the server and transmitted to the UE at the PDCP layer. Ltd. Information elements carried in the messages help determine whether QAAL2 message interaction between NEs is successful. mean opinion score (MOS). This function helps users to determine whether data disconnection exists between a server and the RNC or a low rate on the server side causes the low UE rate. l Ping Interval (0. CRNTI. and UE ID. SCCP is short for Signaling Connection Control Part. the LMT records the test results of voice frames over the Iu interface. Based on the recorded test results. It is set to 0 only when no voice quality sample is used. The value of this parameter depends on the selected test tool. RT_INST_RE SOURCE_IN FO Selecting it enables tracing of real-time index of resources that are allocated to the UE. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) QAAL2 protocol message Selecting it enables tracing of real-time QAAL2 standard protocol messages. RT_RAB_PA RA_INFO Selecting it enables tracing of real-time radio access bearer (RAB) information such as traffic class. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Voice Analysis When this check box is selected. RT_BASIC_I NFO Selecting it enables the following information to be traced: Real-time RRC service state of the UE such as CELL_DCH and CELL_FACH. The MOS is saved in the following path by default:/bam/common/fam/speechmos/. the frame type. In this case. and speech noise detection result.1 ms): indicates the interval at which ICMP packets are sent. RT_COMM_ CONTEXT_I NFO Selecting it enables tracing of real-time information such as the serving NodeB. SCCP protocol message Selecting it enables tracing of real-time SCCP standard protocol messages. URNTI.: This parameter indicates the voice quality sample to be used. l Sampling No. l Packet Length (bytes): indicates the payload length of the ICMP packets. and guaranteed bit rate (GBR). Currently. the valid value range of this parameter is 0 to 8. Ltd. the maintenance personnel can judge the voice quality. and cells in the active set of the UE. Information elements carried in the messages help determine whether SCCP message interaction between NEs is successful. no test tool is required. system memory. communication context ID of the controlling radio network controller (CRNC). maximum rate. for example. the homing RNC (SRNC or DRNC). connection mode over the Iu interface (idle or connected mode). 128 .BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Parameter Description Auto Ping Selecting it enables the RAN to send the UE Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packets.. for example. Ltd. TCP Proxy Protocol Trace Report When the TCP proxy function is enabled. This function is used for isolating other network elements during problem analysis. the traced user can only hear the voice of itself rather than that of the peer end. which facilitates location of speech quality problems. protocol parameters about userplane TCP packets can be reported to the LMT. IUUP Downlink Loop Selecting it enables IuUP data received from the CN to be returned to the CN. IUUP Uplink Loop Selecting it enables Iu user plane (IuUP) data that would be transmitted to the CN to be transmitted in the downlink direction. the peer end can only hear the voice of itself rather than that of the traced user. FP Trace Selecting it enables control frames on the IuUP or at the FP layer to be reported to the LMT. which facilitates location of speech quality problems. L2 FL Protocol Trace Report Selecting it enables protocol parameters on the user plane to be reported to the LMT. This function is used for isolating other network elements during problem analysis. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NOTE When this operation is performed. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) PDCP Trace Selecting it enables information about Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) header compression to be reported to the LMT. 129 .BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Table 7-16 Other1 Tab Parameter Description Parameter Description FP PM Report Selecting it enables transmission statistics at the FP layer to be reported to the LMT.. NOTE When this operation is performed. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.I2.: indicates the number of the slot corresponding to the DSP.: indicates the number of the subrack corresponding to the DSP. – DL TCP Proxy Enable: Enables the single-user downlink TCP proxy function. You can use this function to exclude some problems. Ltd. the interface board. l CID/UDP PORT(I1. or the peer end. l Flow Trace Interface Type: indicates the interface to have its data flow traced. l Flow Trace Bearer Type: indicates the channel to have its data flow traced.): indicates the bound channel identifier (CID) on the Iub path in ATM transmission mode or the number of the bound User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port in IP transmission mode. If RNC data flow is blocked. Table 7-17 Bind Tab Parameter Description Parameter Description DSP l Subrack No. l Path ID: indicates the number of the Iub path. 130 . l DSP No. Iub l Path ANI No. l TCP Proxy Function Config Type: It can be set to DL TCP Proxy Enable or TCP Proxy Disable. l Flow Trace Service Type: indicates the service to have its data flow traced. This helps users to determine whether a DSP or path fault exists. TCP Proxy Function Config Selecting it configures the single-user TCP proxy function.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Parameter Description Flow Trace Selecting it enables specified data flow of the UE on the interface board to be reported in packets to the LMT.: indicates the number of the DSP. l RearPanel trace: traces data flow sent or received on the backplane of the interface board.. l Type: indicates the transport type of the Iub path. l Slot No. so exercise caution in this selection. NOTICE Note that selecting Rear panel trace or Front panel trace may lead to flow control. – TCP Proxy Disable: Disables the single-user TCP proxy function. Bind: Binding the UE to a DSP or path or transmission resource pool.: indicates the Adjacent Node Identifier (ANI) corresponding to the Iub path. l FrontPanel trace: traces data flow sent or received on the panel of the interface board.I3. the problem may lie in the RNC... 9 Tracing Cell Messages This section describes how to trace cell messages. l Type: indicates the transport type of the Iur path.. choose Trace > UMTS Services > Cell Trace. l Path ID: indicates the number of the Iur path.I2. Iur l Path ANI No. The Cell Trace dialog box is displayed. l Path ID: indicates the number of the Iu-PS path.: indicates the ANI corresponding to the Iu-CS path.I3. NODE l Node ID/External Node ID: indicates the ID of the bound physical node..): indicates the bound CID on the Iur path in ATM transmission mode or the number of the bound UDP port in IP transmission mode.I3. l CID/UDP PORT(I1.. The tracing results of the cell messages provide reference for troubleshooting common channel faults when the access success rate is low or zero in the cell.4. as shown in Figure 7-12. 131 . l CID/UDP PORT(I1. Iups l Path ANI No. The UE statistics can be displayed in the tracing result if required. l Type: indicates the transport type of the Iu-CS path. l Type: indicates the transport type of the Iu-PS path. The Trace tab page is displayed.): indicates the bound CID on the Iu-CS path in ATM transmission mode or the number of the bound UDP port in IP transmission mode.: indicates the ANI corresponding to the Iu-PS path..: indicates the ANI corresponding to the Iur path.I2.. Procedure Step 1 Click Trace on the LMT main page.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Parameter Description Iucs l Path ANI No. Step 2 Under Trace Navigation Tree. l Path ID: indicates the number of the Iu-CS path. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ----End 7. Ltd. some custom messages reflecting statistics about UEs in a cell will be reported. contact Huawei technical support personnel. If you select the User volume event. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The value ranges from 1 to 80. Table 7-18 Cell Trace Tab Parameter Description Parameter Description RNC ID indicates the RNC ID of the cell to be traced. 132 . run the LST URNCBASIC command. The value ranges from 1000 to 10000 given in 10 ms.. For use of it. If you select the Propagation delay event.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Figure 7-12 Cell message tracing Step 3 Set parameters in the Cell Trace dialog box and then click Submit. User Volume/ Propagation Delay indicates the event to be traced. Ltd. either the USER_VOLUME event or the PROPAGATION_DELAY event. propagation delay in messages will be reported. Debug Mode indicates a maintenance mode used for tracing communication messages between units of the RNC. Tracing tasks configured on Other and Bind tab pages take effect only when Debug Mode is selected. To query it. Cell ID indicates the index of a cell. SCCPCH ID indicates the IDs of the SCCPCHs to be traced. Bind: Binding the UE to a DSP. l DSP No.3 Saving Traced Messages.2. digits.3 Tracing Mode. Table 7-19 FMR Tab Parameter Description Parameter Description Service Data Trace includes different types of service data to be traced.: indicates the number of the DSP. Save File See 7.. CDR_SIG_QAAL2_ PDU_MSG Selecting it enables tracing of real-time QAAL2 standard protocol messages.: indicates the number of the subrack corresponding to the DSP. You can choose to trace two SCCPCHs at the same time by specifying two SCCPCH IDs. Ltd. Report period(100 ms) in the unit of 100 ms and needs to be specified if Layer 2 Data Periodic Report or Transport Data Periodic Report is selected in the FMR tab page.|\<>?/{}[] Trace Mode See 7. Table 7-20 Bind Tab Parameter Description Parameter Description Bind DSP l Subrack No.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Parameter Description Trace Reason l Reason of starting this tracing task. l Pressing the Enter key is not supported.1. Table 7-21 Table 4 Other Tab Parameter Description Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Parameter Description SIG Trace Event includes internal transport events of the RNC to be traced. This helps users to determine whether a DSP fault exists.: indicates the number of the slot corresponding to the DSP. l Slot No.. 133 . Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. spaces and the following special characters are supported: ! @ # $ % ^ & *()_+-=`~:". Letters. Information elements carried in the messages help determine whether QAAL2 message interaction between NEs is successful. 134 . – When creating a new call tracing task. Therefore. you should minimize the frequencies of performing this task and the number of tasks performed simultaneously. the BSC6900 does not trace the call even if these parameters are modified to meet the criteria during the call.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Parameter Description CELL_SIG_AL_STR EAMING_RDPT Selecting it enables specified data flow of the cell on the interface board to be reported to the LMT. you can specify the number of calls to be traced and specify messages to be traced by selecting the event type. When creating the task. because each user is traced by a specific tracing task. ----End 7. you can define the sampling criteria by setting the RAB parameter constraints and the RRC Est Cause. the maximum number of simultaneously traced calls set in the Max calls simultaneously traced area in the IOS dialog box should not be too high. Context NOTICE The IOS tracing task involves a large amount of trace information. – You can specify the message types to be traced by selecting the event types. and tracing time. If multiple IOS tracing tasks with the same parameter settings are started. Ltd. sampling criteria. Assume that the specified number of continuous calls is N. the tracing of the call is not stopped even if the RAB parameters of the RRC establishment cause are changed during the call. the system does not trace any newly accessed calls. the system automatically traces a new call. In addition. one task can trace and display the tracing messages of only one user. tracing cell range. The calls that meet the sampling criteria are traced within the specified tracing time. If the number becomes less than N because of the termination of a traced call. which affects the system operation. l Transport Channel Type: indicates the type of transport channel to have its data flow traced. Furthermore. Once the call meets the criteria.4. you are advised not to trace all events at a time..10 Tracing IOS Messages This section describes how to trace a number of calls that meet the sampling criteria within a specified range of cells. If N calls are already being traced. If the initial settings of the RAB parameters or the RRC establishment cause value of a call does not meet the criteria. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l You need to specify the number of successive calls to be traced. l SCCPCH ID: indicates the ID of the Secondary Common Control Physical Channel (S-CCPCH). run the LST URNCBASIC command. The IOS Trace dialog box is displayed. Ltd. Step 2 Under Trace Navigation Tree. 135 .BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Procedure Step 1 Click Trace on the LMT main page. choose Trace > UMTS Services > IOS Trace. Then click Submit. as shown in Figure 7-13.. set parameters and filter traced messages in other tab pages. The value ranges from 1 to 30. Table 7-22 Basic Tab Parameter Description Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Parameter Description RNC ID RNC ID of the cell to be traced. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. To query it. Call Count maximum number of calls that can be traced simultaneously after a tracing task is started. Figure 7-13 IOS message tracing Step 3 In the displayed IOS Trace dialog box. The Trace tab page is displayed. Trace only intersubsystem users When this switch is turned on. PROCESSSWITCH4=SEND_MSG_NULL_SWITCH-1. IMEI is short for international mobile equipment identity and TAC is short for type allocation code.TAC2. IMEI TAC (TAC1. Event Type Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Types of event to be traced.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Parameter Description Cell ID You can type the ID of one cell or IDs of multiple cells. Ltd. An IMEI TAC can be a decimal number of 1 to 8 digits. NOTE This parameter is valid only when the IMEI query function is enabled on the CN or RNC side. TAC8) IMEI TAC of the user to be traced.. The event types classify all messages related to calls. To enable the IMEI query function on the RNC side. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. VIP IMSI Run the ADD UVIPIMSI command to add the VIP IMSI. You can select or clear all event types by clicking Select All or Clear All. You can enter a maximum of eight IMEI TACs... You can restore the setting to the original one by clicking Reset. run the following command SET URRCTRLSWITCH: SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH2=RNC_CS_QUERY_UE_IMEI_SWITCH-1&RNC_PS_QU ERY_UE_IMEI_SWITCH-1. 136 . only users with control plane load sharing are traced.. Trace Reason l Reason of starting this tracing task. l IOS Trace Method (Debug + Internal Event + L2 Statistics + SRB + TRB): When this template is selected.1. l IOS Trace Method (Debug + Internal Event): When this template is selected. spaces and the following special characters are supported: ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + -=`~:". Debug Mode is unavailable. and Bind tab pages take effect only when Debug Mode is selected. Debug Mode maintenance mode used for tracing communication messages between units of the RNC. Ltd. 137 . L2 SRB Data Report.3 Tracing Mode. l IOS Trace Method (Debug + Internal Event + L2 Statistics): When this template is selected. Internal Event on the Other1 tab page.|\<>?/{}[] Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Trace Mode See 7. L2 TRB packet header report (Iub interface). Tracing tasks configured on Other. so that users can start a tracing task conveniently.. contact Huawei technical support personnel.. Other1. and L2 TRB packet header report (Iu interface). Layer 2 data transfer periodic report on the Other tab page. Internal Event on the Other1 tab page. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. all standard signaling messages generated by RRC Est Cause on the RRC tab page are traced. l Standard IOS Trace Method: When this template is selected. the following messages are traced: all standard signaling messages generated by RRC Est Cause on the RRC tab page and Internal Event on the Other1 tab page. Layer 2 data transfer periodic report on the Other tab page. Save File See 7.2. Letters.3 Saving Traced Messages. and Layer 2 data transfer periodic report on the Other tab page. Following describe the meanings of various parameters in different templates: l User-defined Mode: Users can set parameters on each tab page in the IOS Trace dialog box. digits. the following messages are traced: all standard signaling messages generated by RRC Est Cause on the RRC tab page. For use of it. the following messages are traced: all standard signaling messages generated by RRC Est Cause on the RRC tab page. l IOS Trace Method (Debug + Internal Event + L2 Statistics + SRB): When this template is selected. the following messages are traced: all standard signaling messages generated by RRC Est Cause on the RRC tab page. and L2 SRB Data Report. l Pressing the Enter key is not supported. Internal Event on the Other1 tab page.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Parameter Description Trace Config Template Commonly used tracing items are combined to form various templates. NBAP Common (ms) Period of reporting results of cell common measurement that is selected in the Monitor tab page of IOS Trace. the call is traced. RRC(ms) Period of reporting measurement results of PCPICH Ec/No and Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) when forward power control tracing is selected or PCPICH Ec/No RSCP in the Monitor tab page is selected for IOS tracing UE Internal RRC (ms) Period of reporting measurement results of UE transmit power when forward power control tracing is selected or UE Tx Power in the Monitor tab page is selected for IOS tracing. 138 . If a call sets up multiple RAB links. If the BSC6900 receives an RRC_CONN_REQ message of a call that matches the specified RRC establishment cause in the specified cell. Table 7-24 RRC Tab Parameter Description Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Parameter Description RRC includes the RRC establishment cause. PCH CELL UPDATE Traced messages of the cell update procedure for UEs in the CELL_PCH and URA_PCH states. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Table 7-23 MM Tab Parameter Description Parameter Description CELL CHANGE ORDER CELL CHANGE ORDER: Traced messages of the cell change order procedure. ROUT AREA UPDATE Traced messages of the routing area update procedure. the call is traced. UE Quality RRC (ms) Period of reporting measurement results of downlink Block Error Rate (BLER) when forward power control tracing is selected or Downlink BLER in the Monitor tab page is selected for IOS tracing.. LOCATION UPDATE Traced messages of the location area update procedure. INTER RAT HANDOVER IN Traced messages of the incoming inter-RAT handover procedure. INTER RAT HANDOVER OUT Traced messages of the outgoing inter-RAT handover procedure through relocation. Ltd. RAB tab page: l If the BSC6900 receives an RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message of a call that matches the specified RAB parameters in the specified cell. the call is traced if one of the RAB links meets the specified RAB parameters. The counter is reported periodically. RNSAP Special (ms) Period of reporting measurement results of downlink code transmit power in the DRNC cell when forward power control tracing is selected or Downlink Tx Code Power in the Monitor tab page is selected for IOS tracing.1s to 60s. RRC Est Cause Call establishment causes and filters UEs to be traced in the cell based on the call establishment causes. Monitor tab page: includes performance counters to be monitored during tracing of a single UE Table 7-25 Monitor Tab Parameter Description Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Parameter Description Uplink SIR Selecting the counter starts monitoring of uplink Signal to Interference Ratio (SIR) during tracing of a single UE. RRC Located Type UE locating method used during IOS tracing. Uplink Tx Power Selecting the counter starts monitoring of uplink transmit power during tracing of a single UE.25s to 64s. The counter is reported periodically.1s to 60s.25s to 64s. PCPICH Ec/No RSCP Selecting the counter starts monitoring of PCPICH Ec/No and Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) during tracing of a single UE. The counter is reported periodically.25s to 64s. The period of reporting the monitoring reports ranges from 0.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Parameter Description NBAP Special (ms) Period of reporting measurement results of downlink code transmit power in the SRNC cell when forward power control tracing is selected or Downlink Tx Code Power in the Monitor tab page is selected for IOS tracing. The period of reporting the monitoring reports ranges from 0. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Downlink BLER Selecting the counter starts monitoring of Block Error Rate (BLER) during tracing of a single UE. The counter is reported periodically. RTT Special NBAP(ms) Period of reporting results of Round Trip Time (RTT) measurement in the SRNC cell when forward power control tracing is selected or the Monitor tab page is configured for IOS tracing.. Downlink Tx Code Power Selecting the counter starts monitoring of downlink code transmit power during tracing of a single UE. The period of reporting the monitoring reports ranges from 0. The counter is reported periodically. RRC Located Cycle (ms) Period for reporting UE locating results during IOS tracing. The period of reporting the monitoring reports ranges from 0. Ltd. The period of reporting the monitoring reports ranges from 0. 139 . The counter is reported every 0.4s) Selecting the counter starts monitoring of received total wideband power (RTWP) received for the cell serving the current UE. If AMR mode changes. TRX Transmit Power(0.4 second. The counter is reported periodically. The counter is reported every 0. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. specify the parameter value. 140 . Ltd. RTWP(0.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Parameter Description AMR Mode Selecting the counter starts monitoring of AMR mode during tracing of a single UE. Table 7-26 Other Tab Parameter Description Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Parameter Description Layer 2 Data Transfer Periodic Report To enable statistics on packets received and sent at layer 2 to be periodically reported to the LMT. the current mode is reported.4s) Selecting the counter starts monitoring of downlink transmit power transmitted for the cell serving the current UE.4 second.. RT_BASIC_INF O Selecting it enables the following information to be traced: Real-time RRC service state of the UE such as CELL_DCH and CELL_FACH.. the homing RNC (SRNC or DRNC). the TCP/IP headers of the following TCP packets are reported to the LMT: – In the downlink. l L2 SRB Data Report: enables packets received in the UL and sent in the DL on the control plane at the Frame Protocol (FP) layer to be reported to the LMT in messages. RNC in Pool is used for user-plane load-sharing. 141 . l TCP Proxy Data Report: After the TCP proxy function is enabled. l L2 TRB Packet Header Report (Iub Interface): Selecting it enables frame headers received in the UL or sent in the DL on the user plane at the FP layer to be reported to the LMT. – In the uplink. the user needs to configure the FTP server and ensure that the FTP server connects to the master RNC and overflow RNC. and cells in the active set of the UE. l L2 TRB Packet Header Report (Iu Interface): Selecting it enables packet TCP/IP headers sent in the UL or received in the DL on the user plane at the RLC layer to be reported to the LMT. Report File is recommended if the user selects L2 TRB packet header report (Iub interface) or L2 TRB packet header report (Iu interface) on the Other tab page. communication context ID of the controlling radio network controller (CRNC). Ltd. connection mode over the Iu interface (idle or connected mode). After the user selects Report File. Information elements carried in the messages help determine whether QAAL2 message interaction between NEs is successful. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. user-plane TCP packets that are received from the server and transmitted to the UE at the PDCP layer. and UE ID.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Parameter Description L2 Data Report includes parameters that enable statistics on packets received and sent at layer 2 to be reported to the LMT. When RNC in Pool is used for user-plane load-sharing. user-plane TCP packets that are received from the UE and transmitted to the server at the PDCP layer. URNTI. CRNTI. RT_COMM_CO NTEXT_INFO Selecting it enables tracing of real-time information such as the serving NodeB. NOTE You can run the MML command LST UPOOLLOADSHAREPARA to query the value of UP Load Sharing Policy. If the value of this parameter is UP_SHARE. l Report Time(s): period for reporting L2 Data Report. You can use the FTP server to upload the tracing results on the OMU to the directory specified by Upload Path. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) QAAL2_protoco l_message Selecting it enables tracing of real-time QAAL2 standard protocol messages. The tracing results generated by the master RNC are saved on the OMU of the master RNC and the tracing results generated by the overflow RNC are saved on the OMU of the overflow RNC. FP PM Report Selecting it enables transmission statistics at the FP layer to be reported to the LMT. This function is used for isolating other network elements during problem analysis. and guaranteed bit rate (GBR). Table 7-27 Other1 Tab Parameter Description Parameter Description Internal Event Selecting it enables tracing of internal events. IUUP Uplink Loop Selecting it enables Iu user plane (IuUP) data that would be transmitted to the CN to be transmitted in the downlink direction. 142 . FP Trace Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Selecting it enables control frames on the IuUP or at the FP layer to be reported to the LMT. the traced user can only hear the voice of itself rather than that of the peer end. SCCP is short for Signaling Connection Control Part. This function is used for isolating other network elements during problem analysis. IUUP Downlink Loop Selecting it enables IuUP data received from the CN to be returned to the CN.. the peer end can only hear the voice of itself rather than that of the traced user. Ltd. communication messages between RNC units.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Parameter Description RT_INST_RESO URCE_INFO Selecting it enables tracing of real-time index of resources that are allocated to the UE. SCCP protocol message Selecting it enables tracing of real-time SCCP standard protocol messages. RT_RAB_PARA _INFO Selecting it enables tracing of real-time radio access bearer (RAB) information such as traffic class. for example. maximum rate. system memory. NOTE When this operation is performed. which facilitates location of speech quality problems. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NOTE When this operation is performed. which facilitates location of speech quality problems. Information elements carried in the messages help determine whether SCCP message interaction between NEs is successful. The task can be started to locate faults when the load sharing fails.I3. Iur Path l Path ANI No. Procedure Step 1 ClickTraceon the LMT main page. l Path Type: Transport type of the Iur path. l IP Pool IP Address: IP pool IP address corresponding to the Iu-PS GTPU.. Ltd.: ANI corresponding to the Iu-PS GTPU. l Path ID: ID of an Iur path.I3. l Path Type: Transport type of the Iu-CS path. Iups GTPU l Path ANI No.4. Context Physical RNCs of logical RNC communicate with each other through the Iurp interface. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Iucs Path l Path ANI No..BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Table 7-28 Bind Tab Parameter Description Parameter Description Iub Path l Path ANI No.): Bound CID on the Iur path in ATM transmission mode or the number of the bound UDP port in IP transmission mode.: ANI corresponding to the Iur path. The Trace tab page is displayed. l Path ID: Path ID of the Iu-PS GTPU. l Path ID: ID of an Iub path.I3. 143 . l Path Type: Transport type of the Iub path..I2. l Path ID: ID of an Iu-CS path. ----End 7.. l CID/UDP PORT(I1. the load is unbalanced.): Bound CID on the Iu-CS path in ATM transmission mode or the number of the bound UDP port in IP transmission mode.: Adjacent Node Identifier (ANI) corresponding to the Iub path. l CID/UDP PORT(I1.. or RNCs cannot communicate with each other in a resource pool.I2..: ANI corresponding to the Iu-CS path.): Bound channel identifier (CID) on the Iub path in ATM transmission mode or the number of the bound User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port in IP transmission mode. l Path Type: Path type of the Iu-PS GTPU. l CID/UDP PORT(I1.11 Tracing Iur-p Messages This task traces messages over the Iur-p interface in a resource pool..I2. set the parameters as required. as shown in Figure 7-14. Figure 7-14 Iur-p message trace Step 3 In the displayed Iur-p Trace dialog box. The Iur-p Trace dialog box is displayed. choose Trace > UMTS Services > Iur-p Trace.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Step 2 Under Trace Navigation Tree. Letters.. Click Submit. Trace Type You can select IURP or IURPLNK. l Pressing the Enter key is not supported. Frame Type You can select All. spaces and the following special characters are supported: ! @ # $ % ^&*()_+-=`~:". Control Frame. When you select Specified External Node. Data Frame or OM Frame.2..3 Tracing Mode.|\<>?/{}[] Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Trace Reason l Reason of starting this tracing task. Table 7-29 Tab Parameter Description Parameter Basic IURP Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Description External Node Configura tion You can select All External Node or Specified External Node. you need to type Specified External Node. Ltd. Save File See 7. 144 .3 Saving Traced Messages. digits.1. Trace Mode See 7. Link Index Uniquely identifies a signaling link.12 Tracing Messages on the Sr Interface This task is used to trace messages on the Sr interface.4. as shown in Figure 7-15. set parameters and click Submit. Procedure Step 1 Click Trace on the LMT home page. ----End 7. which are used to analyze the signaling interaction between the eCoordinator module and RNC.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Parameter IURPLI NK Description Direction You can select All. Figure 7-15 Settings in the Sr Interface Tracing dialog box Step 3 On the Sr Interface Trace dialog box. Link Set Index Uniquely identifies a signaling link set. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. messages in which the RNC reports the load of the subscribed cells.. The messages include the following: messages from the eCoordinator for subscribing/unsubscribing the load of cells under the RNC. In or Out. and radio information messages (RIMs) carried on the eCoordinator for the RNC. The Trace tab page is displayed. Step 2 In the Trace Navigation Tree. 145 . Ltd. The Sr Interface Trace dialog box is displayed. choose Trace > UMTS Services > Sr Interface Trace. spaces and the following special characters are supported: ! @ # $ %^&*()_+-=`~:". l Pressing the Enter key is not supported. To query it. 146 .2. SCTP Link ID indicates the number of an SCTP link. Letters. To query it.3 Tracing Mode..|\<>?/{}[] ----End Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 7 Trace Management Table 7-30 Parameter Description Parameter Basic SCTP Description RNC ID indicates the RNC ID of the cell to be traced. Trace Type You can select SR or SCTP. digits. Save File See 7.1. Ltd. run the LST SCTPLNK command. Trace Reason l Reason of starting this tracing task.3 Saving Traced Messages. run the LST URNCBASIC command.. Trace Mode See 7. 8. 8. monitoring principles.4 UMTS Monitoring This section describes performance monitoring of UMTS services. Ltd. and monitoring rights management.. 8.1 Concepts This section describes the concepts related toBSC6900 performance monitoring.2 General Operations This section describes the general operations applicable to all performance monitoring tasks performed on the BSC6900. performance monitoring can be restarted 30 minutes after the switchover.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring 8 Performance Monitoring About This Chapter This chapter describes how to monitorBSC6900 performance.3 Common Monitoring This section describes common performance monitoring. A maximum of 64 monitoring tasks can be started simultaneously on the LMT. 8. 147 . If OMU boards are switched over. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring 8. Principles of CPU Usage Monitoring Figure 8-1 displays the principles of CPU usage monitoring. Principles of Real-time Performance Monitoring Figure 8-2 shows the principles of other real-time performance monitoring. When you use the LMT to create a task for monitoring CPU usage. 148 . monitoring principles. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The OMU forwards the data to the LMT. Figure 8-1 CPU usage monitoring The process for monitoring CPU usage is as follows: 1. or by slot No. Ltd.1 Monitoring Principles This section describes the principles of real-time performance monitoring.1. 2. which are similar to the principles of message tracing.1 Concepts This section describes the concepts related toBSC6900 performance monitoring. 8. the LMT periodically sends a binary command to the OMU maintenance module to query CPU usage. The OMU sends the corresponding command to the configuration and maintenance module of a specified board. 4. The BSC supports CPU usage monitoring by subrack No. 5.. 3. The board collects data according to the commands and reports it to the OMU. including the principles of CPU usage monitoring and real-time performance monitoring. and monitoring rights management. the LMT sends a binary command to the OMU to delete the task. The process when the LMT stops a real-time monitoring task is as follows: 1. Upon receiving the data. 3. 8. The service module updates the local filter table in accordance with the messages from the debugging module. If the data is the same. The process when the LMT reports real-time monitoring data is as follows: 1. The OMU sends the command to the specified board based on the task ID. NOTE Group G_10 consists of binary commands used for tracing and monitoring. is as follows: 1. The service module compares the collected data with data in the local filter table. and G_10authorized custom-level users can perform this operation on BSC. 2. When you stop a monitoring task on the LMT. administrator-level. The OMU assigns a task ID to the task and sends the command to the debugging module of a specified board. The OMU forwards it to the LMT that creates the task based on the task ID. 3. the debugging module records the filter parameters in the filter table and notifies the service module of the information. 149 . Guest-level users and G_10unauthorized custom-level users can only perform CPU usage monitoring. Upon receiving the command. the service module reports the collected data to the OMU. 4. Ltd. operator-level.2 Operation Rights Control Only authorized users can perform real-time monitoring on the BSC6900.1. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2. The debugging module and service module delete the task from the filter table..BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Figure 8-2 Real-time performance monitoring The process when the LMT creates a real-time monitoring task. common—operator-level. The LMT sends a binary command to the OMU to create the task. 3. Only the admin. 2. The LMT displays the data in a chart or a list. other than CPU usage monitoring. 2 Setting Chart Display Mode This section describes how to set the chart display mode in the real-time performance monitoring window after you create and start a monitoring task. l If the sequence diagram has been displayed. Then.2 General Operations This section describes the general operations applicable to all performance monitoring tasks performed on the BSC6900. you cannot switch it to the bar chart.2. Then. Ltd. 150 . l Monitoring data has been reported. you can perform the following operation by selecting an appropriate option from the shortcut menu: Setting auto scroll l Right-click on the task information pane at the bottom of the real-time performance monitoring window. Prerequisites l A performance monitoring task has been started.. Then. you can perform the following operations by selecting an appropriate option from the shortcut menu: Procedure – Auto Scroll – Show Grid – Switch Display Mode NOTE When the number of real-time monitoring tasks is greater than 60. you can perform the following operations by selecting an appropriate option from the shortcut menu: – Add Task or Delete Task – Stop Task or Restart Task – List Detailed Task Info ----End 8. On the lower part of the Chart tab page in Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2. l Right-click on the Chart tab page in the real-time performance monitoring window. you can switch it to the sequence diagram. 8. right-click on the Chart tab page and choose Switch Display Mode from the shortcut menu: l If the bar chart has been displayed. – Auto Adjust l Right-click on the List tab page in the real-time performance monitoring window.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring 8.1 Browsing the Monitoring Results Online This describes how to browse online and query the monitoring results that are dynamically displayed in the real-time performance monitoring window. select the Save File check box and specify the save path. l Monitoring data has been reported. Procedure Step 1 In the task information pane of the real-time performance monitoring window. Prerequisites The monitoring data has been saved as files. ----End 8. By default.. and line width. NOTE l The chart display attribute settings apply only to the current monitoring task.2. Procedure Step 1 When you create a monitoring task.3 Saving Monitoring Data This section describes how to save the monitoring data as local files. line type. Step 2 Select the required properties from the drop-down lists.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring the window. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Procedure Step 1 Choose Start > All Programs > Huawei Local Maintenance Terminal > TrafficRecording Review Tool. l You can set the chart display mode If data is displayed on the List tab page but no chart is displayed on the Chart tab page during the real-time monitoring.4 Offline Browsing Monitoring Data This section describes how to offline browse CPU usage monitoring data files and errored second monitoring data files using the traffic recording review tool. or Line Width. Line Type. the Save File check box is selected and the save path is C:/Web LMT/MBSC/ output/monitor. you can set the chart display properties. Prerequisites l A performance monitoring task has been started. l Monitoring data has been reported. click Line Color. ----End 8. Prerequisites l A performance monitoring task has been started. Ltd. such as the line color.2. 151 . if the CPU usage reaches 80% or higher. NOTICE This function increases the CPU usage. Step 3 In the CPU/DSP Usage Monitoring dialog box. 8. The Monitor tab page is displayed. Step 4 Click the List or Chart tab to view the data in different modes. In the Open dialog box. Therefore. The TrafficRecording Review Tool window is displayed. The CPU/DSP Usage Monitoring dialog box is displayed. click Monitor. Prerequisites The board to be monitored is running properly. ----End Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1 Monitoring Board CPU/DSP Usage This section describes how to query the CPU/DSP usage of a board. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. set the monitoring period to 5s. Select the file to be browsed. showing the monitoring data in a chart or a table. ----End 8. Step 5 To view other files. but the difference does not affect services. and click Submit.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Step 2 Open save path of monitoring data files. select and open the target files to browse them. The default save path is C:/Web LMT/MBSC/output/ monitor.3. choose Monitor > Common Monitoring > CPU/DSP Usage Monitoring. l NE Time displayed in the status bar may be different from the actual NE time. set parameters according to actual situations. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. Ltd. choose File > Open. 152 . Step 3 Click Open or double-click the file..3 Common Monitoring This section describes common performance monitoring. Context The OMU and SAU boards do not support this function. l Logic Port No. Prerequisites The board under monitoring is functional. must be specified. l Statistic Period(s): Specifies the duration of the measurement period for monitoring. It can be set to IP Logic Port. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. and click Submit. For detailed settings. Procedure Step 1 Click Monitor on the LMT main page. l Transport Object Type: Specifies the type of the transport object to be monitored. see Table 8-1. run the LST IPLOGICPORT command.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring 8. The Monitor tab page is displayed.3. Physical Port. Ltd. 153 .. Table 8-1 Detailed settings of Transport Object Type Transport Object Type Description IP Logic Port Indicates the number of the IP logical port. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. choose Monitor > Common Monitoring > Transport Resource Real-Time Monitoring. Logic Port No.: Indicates the logical port number. Step 3 In the Transport Resource Real-Time Monitoring dialog box. The Transport Resource Real-Time Monitoring dialog box is displayed. To query the logical port number.2 Monitoring Transmission Resources This section describes how to monitor the transmission resources on the Iub interface. set the parameters as required. run the LST MPGRP command. l IMA Group: Indicates the number of the physical port number carrying an IMA link in the IMP group. If you have selected Bandwidth(Statistic). Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Physical Port Type must be specified. To query IMA Group. – Bandwidth(Statistic): Displays the total bandwidths of those allocated to different services.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Transport Object Type Description Physical Port Indicates the number of the physical port. l UNI Link: Indicates the number of the physical port carrying the UNI link. the bandwidths allocated to different services are displayed.: Indicates the number of the subrack where the transport object to be monitored is located. To query UNI Link. Table 8-3 shows the related statistic items.. Then. Table 8-2 shows the related statistic items. 154 . l PPP Link: Indicates the number of the physical port carrying the PPP link. l Statistic Type: Indicates the statistic type displayed in the monitoring report. you can select Uplink or Downlink to view the uplink or downlink statistics. l Slot No. run the LST FRALNK command. run the LST UNILNK command. l MP Group: Indicates the number of the physical port carrying an MP link in the MP group.: Indicates the number of the slot where the transport object to be monitored is located. To query MP Group. If you have selected Bandwidth (Original). run the LST PPPLNK command. To query PPP Link. l FRA Link: Indicates the number of the physical port carrying the FRA link. the total bandwidth used by all services is displayed. run the LST IMAGRP command. Ltd. l Subrack No. It can be set to Bandwidth(Original) or Bandwidth(Statistic).: Indicates the monitored operator of the transport object. To query FRA Link. – Uplink/Downlink: Displays the statistics of the bandwidths in the uplink or downlink. – Bandwidth(Original): Displays the actual bandwidths allocated to different services when the UE is performing a voice service or data service. l OP Index No. Reserved Threshold for Handover Threshold for reserving bandwidth for handovers. The signaling bandwidth cannot be queried when Transport Object Type is set to Physical Port. RealTimeFluxBw Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Real-time traffic on a port. Ltd. run the DSP IPLOGICPORT command. Admitted Bandwidth(2G Total) is valid when 2G and 3G services share the same port. To query the configured bandwidth. run the ADD TRMLOADTH command. run the ADD TRMLOADTH command. It equals configured bandwidth minus overload congestion remain bandwidth. To query the configured bandwidth. run the DSP IPLOGICPORT command. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. To query the handover reserved bandwidth. To query the overload congestion clear remain bandwidth. To query the configured bandwidth. bandwidth at the radio layer needs to be converted to that at the transport layer.. the handover reserved bandwidth equals the configured bandwidth multiplied by the handover reserved ratio. the overload congestion clear remain bandwidth equals the configured bandwidth multiplied by the overload congestion clear remain ratio. 155 . run the ADD TRMLOADTH command. It equals configured bandwidth minus overload congestion clear remain bandwidth. Note that when Threshold type is set to PERCENTAGE(Percentage). Note that when Threshold type is set to PERCENTAGE(Percentage). Available Bandwidth Bandwidth available currently. When calculating the bandwidth for GBR. OLC Threshold OLC start threshold. run the DSP IPLOGICPORT command. To query the overload congestion remain bandwidth. It equals configured bandwidth minus handover reserved bandwidth. OLC Clear Threshold Overload control (OLC) end threshold. The admitted bandwidth consists of bandwidth used for setting up the common channel and bandwidth for guaranteed bit rate (GBR). Note that when Threshold type is set to PERCENTAGE(Percentage). run the DSP IPLOGICPORT command. the overload congestion remain bandwidth equals the configured bandwidth multiplied by the congestion remain ratio.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Table 8-2 Bandwidth(Original) Statistic Item (Original) Description Admitted Bandwidth (3G Total) Admitted bandwidth for 3G services at the transport layer on the user plane. It equals Total Bandwidth minus Admitted Bandwidth(3G Total) minus Admitted Bandwidth (2G Total) minus signaling bandwidth. To query the signaling bandwidth. Note that when Threshold type is set to PERCENTAGE(Percentage). To query the configured bandwidth. run the ADD TRMLOADTH command. congestion remain bandwidth equals the configured bandwidth multiplied by congestion remain ratio. When Auto adjust bandwidth switch is set to ON(ON). the congestion clear remain bandwidth equals the configured bandwidth multiplied by the congestion clear remain ratio. To query the configured bandwidth. RealTimeQueueFlux Real-time traffic in the service queues on a port. run the DSP IPLOGICPORT command.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Statistic Item (Original) Description Realtime Bandwidth Bandwidth detected on a port. bandwidth at the radio layer needs to be converted to that at the transport layer. Ltd. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the ADD TRMLOADTH command.. To query configured bandwidth. Congestion Clear Threshold Congestion end threshold. To query the congestion remain bandwidth. Congestion Threshold Congestion start threshold. Note that when Threshold type is set to PERCENTAGE(Percentage). Total Bandwidth When Auto adjust bandwidth switch is set to OFF(OFF) in the ADD IPLOGICPORT command. To query the congestion clear remain bandwidth. run the DSP IPLOGICPORT command. When calculating the bandwidth for GBR. 156 . Total Bandwidth equals configured bandwidth. Table 8-3 Statistic Item(Statistic) Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Statistic Item (Statistic) Description Admitted Bandwidth (3G Total) Admitted bandwidth for 3G services at the transport layer on the user plane. It equals configured bandwidth minus congestion clear remain bandwidth. It equals configured bandwidth minus congestion remain bandwidth. run the DSP IPLOGICPORT command. The admitted bandwidth consists of bandwidth used for setting up the common channel and bandwidth for guaranteed bit rate (GBR). Total Bandwidth fluctuates between Max bandwidth [64kbps] and Min bandwidth [64kbps] based on transmission quality indicated by IPPM detection. run the ADD TRMLOADTH command. It equals configured bandwidth minus congestion clear remain bandwidth. Note that when Threshold type is set to PERCENTAGE(Percentage). 157 . It equals configured bandwidth minus overload congestion clear remain bandwidth. To query the configured bandwidth. To query the overload congestion clear remain bandwidth. run the DSP IPLOGICPORT command. OLC Clear Threshold OLC end threshold. Ltd. To query the congestion remain bandwidth. run the ADD TRMLOADTH command. To query the congestion clear remain bandwidth. the congestion remain bandwidth equals the configured bandwidth multiplied by the congestion remain ratio. Congestion Clear Threshold Congestion end threshold. the congestion clear remain bandwidth equals the configured bandwidth multiplied by the congestion clear remain ratio. the overload congestion clear remain bandwidth equals the configured bandwidth multiplied by the overload congestion clear remain ratio. run the DSP IPLOGICPORT command. Note that when Threshold type is set to PERCENTAGE(Percentage). The signaling bandwidth cannot be queried when Transport Object Type is set to Physical Port. To query the configured bandwidth.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Statistic Item (Statistic) Description Available Bandwidth Bandwidth available currently. run the DSP IPLOGICPORT command. To query the configured bandwidth.. It equals configured bandwidth minus congestion remain bandwidth. Note that when Threshold type is set to PERCENTAGE(Percentage). Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. To query the signaling bandwidth. Congestion Threshold Congestion start threshold. Admitted Bandwidth(2G Total) is valid when 2G and 3G services share the same port. It equals Total Bandwidth minus Admitted Bandwidth(3G Total) minus Admitted Bandwidth (2G Total) minus signaling bandwidth. run the ADD TRMLOADTH command. run the DSP IPLOGICPORT command. Ltd. The Monitor tab page is displayed. this function helps users obtain data. run the ADD TRMLOADTH command. To query the configured bandwidth. Note that when Threshold type is set to PERCENTAGE(Percentage). Based on the data and performance of the peer device. ----End 8. POUc board supports this function.. CRC errors. you can evaluate the transport network status and identify the causes for the errors. Note that when Threshold type is set to PERCENTAGE(Percentage). The AEUa. 158 . Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. PEUc. To query configured bandwidth. Total Bandwidth equals configured bandwidth. run the DSP IPLOGICPORT command. Realtime Bandwidth Bandwidth detected on a port. errored frames.3 Monitoring BERS This section describes how to monitor errored second (ES)of an E1/T1 port to monitor transmission quality of the link corresponding to a port. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. bit error rate (calculated by CRC errors). unavailable second (UAS). PEUa. severely errored second (SES). To query the overload congestion remain bandwidth. Reserved Threshold for Handover Threshold for reserving bandwidth for handovers. the overload congestion remain bandwidth equals the configured bandwidth multiplied by the congestion remain ratio. run the DSP IPLOGICPORT command.3. It equals configured bandwidth minus overload congestion remain bandwidth. To query the configured bandwidth. such as ES. If any bit errors occur on the E1/T1 port. Total Bandwidth When Auto adjust bandwidth switch is set to OFF(OFF) in the ADD IPLOGICPORT command. It equals configured bandwidth minus handover reserved bandwidth. When Auto adjust bandwidth switch is set to ON(ON).BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Statistic Item (Statistic) Description OLC Threshold Overload control (OLC) start threshold. RealTimeQueueFlux Real-time traffic in the service queues on a port. AOUc. run the ADD TRMLOADTH command. Total Bandwidth fluctuates between Max bandwidth [64kbps] and Min bandwidth [64kbps] based on transmission quality indicated by IPPM detection. run the DSP IPLOGICPORT command. To query the handover reserved bandwidth. click Monitor. the handover reserved bandwidth equals the configured bandwidth multiplied by the handover reserved ratio. l BER monitoring test and loopback test cannot be performed simultaneously because the result and principles of these tests are the same. MP groups. l Before monitoring the BER. configure the local loopback or remote loopback. When six tasks have started. The BER Monitoring dialog box is displayed. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The AEUa. The Monitor tab page is displayed. set parameters according to actual situations. To query the IMA group. set parameters according to actual situations. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. POUc. or PPP links carried on a board. UNI links. Ltd.. The BER is used to evaluate transport network quality. or use a loopback connector to short-circuit the TX end and the RX end. POUa. One monitoring task corresponds to one task window. Indicates the number of the IMA group.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. As a result.5 Monitoring Link Performance This section describes how to monitor link performance.3. and click Submit. 159 . Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. run the LST IMAGRP command. and click Submit. ----End 8.4 Monitoring BER This section describes how to monitor bit error rate (BER). AOUc.3. ----End 8. fractional ATM links. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Monitor Item Parameter Description IMA Group IMA Group No. The BERS Monitoring dialog box is displayed. PEUa. Step 3 In the BERS Monitoring dialog box. fractional IMA links. choose Monitor > Common Monitoring > BERS Monitoring. l Only one BER monitoring test can be started for a board at a time. Reference for Performance Monitoring This section describes the parameters used for performance monitoring. AOUa board supports this function. you must close one task window before starting a new task. Context l Using this function interrupts IMA groups. click Monitor. Step 3 In the BER Monitoring dialog box. PEUc. choose Monitor > Common Monitoring > BER Monitoring. services on the corresponding port are interrupted. A maximum of six monitoring tasks can be started simultaneously on the LMT. run the LST FRALNK command and set Link type to FRAATM. run the LST UNODEB command. Ping Peer IP Address AAL2 Path Adjacent Node ID AAL2 PATH Symbol FE/GE FE/GE Port No. IP Path Adjacent Node ID Indicates the number of the adjacent node of the IP path. To query the number of the FE/GE port. run the LST UNILNK command. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Indicates the number of the PPP link. MLPPP Group MLPPP Group No. Indicates the number of the SCTP link. To query the PPP link. PPP Link PPP Link No. To query the SCTP link. IP PATH Symbol Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Indicates the ID of the adjacent node to an AAL2 path and the AAL2 path symbol. Indicates the number of the MLPPP group. SCTP Link SCTP Link No. To query the number of the fractional ATM link. run the LST IPPATH command. run the LST ETHPORT command. OAM NodeB ID Indicates the NodeB ID. To query the SAAL link. run the LST AAL2PATH command. run the LST IPOAPVC command. To query the adjacent node of the IP path. run the LST SCTPLNK command. run the LST MPGRP command. To query the adjacent node ID and the AAL2 path symbol. Indicates the number of the fractional ATM link. run the LST PPPLNK command. To query these IP addresses. run the LST SAALLNK command.To query the IP logical port. To query the ATM logical port. run the LST ATMLOGICPORT command. run the LST IPLOGICPORT command. Indicates the number of the FE/GE port. Indicates the number of the UNI link. To query the NodeB ID. To query the number of the MLPPP group.. Logical Port Port No.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Monitor Item Parameter Description UNI link UNI Link No. To query the UNI link. Indicates the number of a logical port. SAAL Link SAAL Link No. Fractional ATM Link FRAC Link No. Ltd. Indicates the number of the SAAL link. 160 . IPOA PVC IP Address Indicates the local and peer IP addresses of the IPOA PCV. To query the trunk group. run the LST IPPM command. run the DSP ADJNODEDIP command.. IPPM Adjacent Node ID IP Path ID Indicates the ID of the node adjacent to an IPPM and the IP path ID. To query the two. The monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. run the LST IPPOOLIP command. Based on the traffic statistics on the IMA groups at both ends. To query Currently bound SIP. locate the fault. IPPOOL LOCAL IP Local IP Address To query the local IP address. Ltd. (value range: 0-7). you can check the IE loss. In addition. PPP Link MLPPP Group Logical Port Bandwidth Peer IP Address Priority To query the peer IP address. Indicates the priority queue number.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Monitor Item Parameter Description FE/GE Priority Group No. Monitoring IMA Group Traffic This section describes how to monitor traffic on a specified IMA group in real time. run the LST IURPLNK command. run the LST ETHTRK command. IPPOOL PM Local IP Address Is the same as Currently bound SIP. run the LST OPT command. 161 . Indicates the number of the trunk group. the IP address currently bound to the adjacent node. To query the IURP Link. TRUNK Group TRUNK Group No. IURPLINK IURP Link No. The check result provides reference for adding links. To query the priority. NonChannelized ATM Optical Port Optical Port No. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the LST IPPOOLPM command and view the setting for Per-Hop Behavior. you can check whether the monitored traffic is consistent with the actual traffic processed by the IMA group and whether the bandwidth is sufficient. Indicates the number of the non-channelized ATM optical port. and evaluate transport network quality. To query the optical port. run the DSP ADJNODE command. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. ----End Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. click Submit. 162 . Then. click Monitor. set Monitor Item to UNI Link and set other parameters according to actual situations. The Monitor tab page is displayed. you can check the IE loss.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Context NOTICE The IMA group must be successfully set up and connected to the peer link before this task is performed. Then. choose Monitor > Common Monitoring > Link Performance Monitoring. click Monitor. This task is stopped if the monitored link is deleted. Step 3 In the Link Performance Monitoring dialog box. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. The monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. Based on the traffic statistics on the UNI links at both ends. locate the fault. Context NOTICE The UNI link must be successfully set up and connected to the peer link before this task is performed. set Monitor Item to IMA Group and set other parameters according to actual situations. click Submit. The Link Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. you can check whether the monitored traffic is consistent with the actual traffic processed by the UNI link and whether the bandwidth is sufficient. ----End Monitoring UNI Link Traffic This section describes how to monitor traffic on a specified UNI link in real time. The Link Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. The Monitor tab page is displayed. For example. and evaluate transport network quality. change the link configuration mode to the IMA mode to support more traffic.. choose Monitor > Common Monitoring > Link Performance Monitoring. This task is stopped if the monitored IMA group is deleted. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. Step 3 In the Link Performance Monitoring dialog box. The check result provides reference for changing the link configuration mode. In addition. locate the fault. you can check whether the monitored traffic is consistent with the actual traffic processed by the link and whether the bandwidth is sufficient. you can check the packet loss. click Submit. In addition. The Monitor tab page is displayed. The Link Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. The monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. Step 3 In the Link Performance Monitoring dialog box. you can observe the link traffic and check whether link congestion occurs based on the configured link bandwidth. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. This task is stopped if the monitored link is deleted. This task is stopped if the monitored link is deleted. you can check the IE loss. ----End Monitoring SAAL Link Traffic This section describes how to monitor traffic on a specified SAAL link in real time. In addition. For example. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. Context NOTICE The fractional ATM link must be successfully set up and connected to the peer link before this task is performed. locate the SAAL disconnection or intermittent disconnection. The check result provides reference for changing the link configuration mode. Based on the TX/RX statistics on the SAAL links to a subsystem. Based on the traffic statistics on the fractional ATM links at both ends.. click Monitor. The monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. and evaluate transport network quality. Ltd. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. change the link configuration mode to the IMA mode. choose Monitor > Common Monitoring > Link Performance Monitoring. Context NOTICE The SAAL must be successfully set up and connected to the peer link before this task is performed.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Monitoring Fractional ATM Link Traffic This section describes how to monitor traffic on a specified fractional ATM link in real time. 163 . Then. set Monitor Item to Fractional ATM Link and set other parameters according to actual situations. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. you can check the packet loss and evaluate the traffic condition. In addition. Step 3 In the Link Performance Monitoring dialog box. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The Monitor tab page is displayed. set Monitor Item to SAAL Link and set other parameters according to actual situations. this function helps you locate base station startup and load problems and helps you observe the traffic and bandwidth utilization. If the IPoA PVC link works as an IP path over the Iu-PS interface. 164 . click Submit. Then. choose Monitor > Common Monitoring > Link Performance Monitoring. Ltd. set Monitor Item to IPOA PVC and set other parameters according to actual situations. The monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. The Link Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. The Link Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. click Monitor. Context NOTICE The IPOA PVC link must be successfully set up and connected to the peer link before this task is performed. The Monitor tab page is displayed. click Monitor. Based on the layer-2 TX/RX statistics in the CDT data. this function helps you observe the link traffic and locate connection and congestion problems of upper-layer links. ----End Monitoring IPOA PVC Link Traffic This section describes how to monitor traffic on a specified IPOA PVC link in real time. If the IPOA PVC link works as an OML for the ATM-based base station.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. ----End Monitoring AAL2 Path Traffic This section describes how to monitor traffic on a specified AAL2 path in real time. choose Monitor > Common Monitoring > Link Performance Monitoring. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. Then. you can observe the link traffic and check whether link congestion occurs based on the configured link bandwidth. click Submit. Step 3 In the Link Performance Monitoring dialog box. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. This task is stopped if the monitored link is deleted. The monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts.. In addition. and check whether the bandwidth is sufficient. if the physical port carries a logical port and Monitor Type is set to QoS for this task. The monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. Based on the traffic statistics on the FE/GE port. Step 3 In the Link Performance Monitoring dialog box. choose Monitor > Common Monitoring > Link Performance Monitoring. Then. 165 . The Monitor tab page is displayed. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For FG2c. The Link Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. This task is stopped if the monitored link is deleted. GOUc. you can check whether the monitored traffic is consistent with the actual traffic on the port. click Monitor. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. locate the fault..BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Context NOTICE The AAL2 path must be successfully set up and connected to the peer link before this task is performed. choose Monitor > Common Monitoring > Link Performance Monitoring. The Monitor tab page is displayed. check the port utilization. and evaluate transport network quality. Context NOTICE The FE/GE port must be successfully configured and connected to the peer port before this task is performed. click Submit. ----End Monitoring FE/GE Port Traffic This section describes how to monitor traffic on a specified FE/GE port in real time. This task is stopped if the monitored link is deleted. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. GOUe boards. set Monitor Item to AAL2 Path and set other parameters according to actual situations. you can check the packet loss. The Link Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. Ltd. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. The check result provides reference for migrating services to prevent congestion. click Monitor. the queue statistics of the physical port does not include the service data traffic on the logical port but includes only the service data traffic on the physical port. Context NOTICE The PPP link must be successfully set up and connected to the peer link before this task is performed. set Monitor Item to PPP Link and set other parameters according to actual situations.. choose Monitor > Common Monitoring > Link Performance Monitoring. and evaluate transport network quality. locate the fault. you can check whether the monitored traffic is consistent with the actual traffic processed by the link and whether the link bandwidth is sufficient. The check result provides reference for adding links. The monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. locate the fault. ----End Monitoring MLPPP Group Traffic This section describes how to monitor traffic on a specified MLPPP group in real time. The Link Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. Ltd. ----End Monitoring PPP Link Traffic This section describes how to monitor traffic on a specified PPP link in real time.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Step 3 In the Link Performance Monitoring dialog box. Based on the statistics on MLPPP groups at both ends. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you can check the packet loss. click Submit. the queue statistics of the physical port does not include the service data traffic on the logical port but includes only the service data traffic on the physical port. 166 . In addition. This task is stopped if the monitored link is deleted. In addition. you can check the packet loss. The Monitor tab page is displayed. Step 3 In the Link Performance Monitoring dialog box. and evaluate transport network quality. Then. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. Then. click Monitor. The monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. you can check whether the monitored traffic is consistent with the actual traffic processed by the MLPPP group and whether the bandwidth is sufficient. click Submit. set Monitor Item to FE/GE and set other parameters according to actual situations. Based on the traffic statistics on the PPP links at both ends. if the physical port carries a logical port and Monitor Type is set to QoS for this task. For POUc boards. The check result provides reference for adding PPP links or changing the link configuration mode to MLPPP. The Link Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. the queue statistics of the physical port does not include the service data traffic on the logical port but includes only the service data traffic on the physical port. click Submit. This task is stopped if the monitored MLPPP link group is deleted. Based on the monitored traffic. The Monitor tab page is displayed. and check whether link congestion occurs. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. click Submit. For POUc boards. click Monitor. ----End Monitoring SCTP Link Traffic This section describes how to monitor data packet traffic on a specified SCTP link in real time. Then. choose Monitor > Common Monitoring > Link Performance Monitoring.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Context NOTICE The MLPPP group must be successfully configured and connected to the peer link before this task is performed. The monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. 167 .. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. Step 3 In the Link Performance Monitoring dialog box. if the physical port carries a logical port and Monitor Type is set to QoS for this task. This task is stopped if the monitored link is deleted. choose Monitor > Common Monitoring > Link Performance Monitoring. set Monitor Item to SCTP Link and set other parameters according to actual situations. ----End Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Then. The Link Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. you can check the packet loss. click Monitor. The Monitor tab page is displayed. locate SCTP link intermittent disconnection. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. Step 3 In the Link Performance Monitoring dialog box. Context NOTICE The SCTP link must be successfully set up and connected to the peer link before this task is performed. set Monitor Item to MLPPP Group and set other parameters according to actual situations. If Monitor Type is set to Port. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. choose Monitor > Common Monitoring > Link Performance Monitoring. In addition. In addition. set Monitor Item to IP Path and set other parameters according to actual situations. you can check the packet loss and user data traffic. Then. Step 3 In the Link Performance Monitoring dialog box. Ltd. click Submit. The check result provides reference for increasing the bandwidth configured on the logical port. The Monitor tab page is displayed. This task is stopped if the monitored link is deleted. 168 . You can set Monitor Type to Port or QoS for this function. Then.. choose Monitor > Common Monitoring > Link Performance Monitoring. you can observe link traffic and check whether link congestion occurs. the real-time traffic is shown in the monitoring result. Based on the layer-2 statistics in the CDT data. set Monitor Item to Logical Port and set other parameters according to actual situations. ----End Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Monitoring IP Path Traffic This section describes how to monitor IP traffic on a specified IP path over an interface board in real time. click Submit. Based on the traffic statistics on the logical port. The Link Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. ----End Monitoring Logical Port Traffic This section describes how to monitor traffic on a specified logical port. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. check the port utilization. Context NOTICE The IP path must be successfully set up and connected to the peer link before this task is performed. the QoS-specific TX traffic on the logical port is shown in the monitoring result. you can check whether the monitored traffic is consistent with the actual traffic on the port. click Monitor. Step 3 In the Link Performance Monitoring dialog box. The Link Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. click Monitor. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. and check whether the bandwidth is sufficient. The Monitor tab page is displayed. If Monitor Type is set to QoS. you can check the packet loss on the logical port and locate the fault. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. The Link Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. locate the fault. Then. you can check whether the bandwidth is adjusted properly. This task supports IP pool performance monitoring (PM) function so that you can observe the bandwidth changes after dynamic adjustment. this function helps locate the fault in the NodeB startup and data loading processes. The monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. administration. 169 . Therefore.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Monitoring OAM Channel Traffic This section describes how to monitor RX and TX IP traffic on a specified operation. The monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. In this way. you can check the IE loss. set Monitor Item to OAM and set other parameters according to actual situations. The Monitor tab page is displayed. Step 3 In the Link Performance Monitoring dialog box. You can perform this function to observe the traffic and bandwidth usage when the NodeB is loading data. The Monitor tab page is displayed. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. and evaluate transport network quality. In addition. set Monitor Item to Logic Port Bandwidth and set other parameters according to actual situations. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. Then. Step 3 In the Link Performance Monitoring dialog box. The monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts.. The check result provides reference for increasing the bandwidth. click Submit. choose Monitor > Common Monitoring > Link Performance Monitoring. The Link Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. click Monitor. ----End Monitoring Traffic on Non-Channelized ATM Optical Port This section describes how to monitor traffic on a specified non-channelized ATM optical port in real time. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. click Monitor. and maintenance (OAM) channel over an interface board in a NodeB. ----End Monitoring Logical Port Bandwidth This section describes how to monitor the bandwidth changes in a logical port after the dynamic bandwidth adjustment. choose Monitor > Common Monitoring > Link Performance Monitoring. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Based on the traffic statistics on the non-channelized ATM optical ports at both ends. click Submit. you can check whether the monitored traffic is consistent with the actual traffic on the port and whether the bandwidth is sufficient. Ltd. you can check the packet loss and locate transmission disconnection or intermittent disconnection in IP pool networking mode. Ltd. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. Then. choose Monitor > Common Monitoring > Link Performance Monitoring. Based on the traffic statistics of the trunk groups Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The Link Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. choose Monitor > Common Monitoring > Link Performance Monitoring. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. click Monitor. set Monitor Item to Non-Channelized ATM Optical Port and set other parameters according to actual situations. The Monitor tab page is displayed. you can observe PM link traffic and check whether link congestion occurs. Context NOTICE The PM link to be monitored in the IP pool must be activated. Based on the PM link traffic statistics on the IP pool at the TX and RX ends. 170 . click Submit. The Link Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. The monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. The Monitor tab page is displayed. click Monitor. ----End Monitoring Trunk Group Traffic This section describes how to monitor traffic on a specified trunk group in real time. Then.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Context NOTICE The specified non-channelized ATM optical port must be connected to the peer port using links. click Submit. The monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. Step 3 In the Link Performance Monitoring dialog box. Step 3 In the Link Performance Monitoring dialog box. In addition.. set Monitor Item to IPPOOL PM and set other parameters according to actual situations. ----End Monitoring IP Pool PM Link Traffic This section describes how to monitor PM link traffic in a specified IP pool in real time. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. Based on the statistics on the local port. you can check the local port utilization.. In addition. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. choose Monitor > Common Monitoring > Link Performance Monitoring. you can locate the fault and evaluate transport network quality. you can check the IE loss. Ltd. The check result provides reference for adding links. click Monitor. click Submit. The Link Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. ----End Monitoring IPPM Link Traffic This section describes how to monitor traffic on a specified IPPM link in real time. The check result provides reference for migrating services on the port to prevent congestion. In addition. Then. The monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. Step 3 In the Link Performance Monitoring dialog box. you can check whether the monitored traffic is consistent with the actual traffic processed by the trunk group and check whether the bandwidth is sufficient. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. ----End Monitoring Local IP Traffic in IP Pool This section describes how to monitor traffic on a specified local port in an IP pool in real time. you can check the packet loss. you can observe link traffic and check whether link congestion occurs. choose Monitor > Common Monitoring > Link Performance Monitoring. The Monitor tab page is displayed. The Link Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. click Monitor.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring at both ends. Step 3 In the Link Performance Monitoring dialog box. set Monitor Item to TRUNK Group and set other parameters according to actual situations. set Monitor Item to IPPOOL LOCAL IP and set other parameters according to actual situations. Based on the traffic statistics on IPPM links at both ends. In addition. The monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. and evaluate transport network quality. Then. locate the fault. 171 . click Submit. Context NOTICE The trunk group to be monitored must be configured successfully. and locate the IPPM link disconnection or intermittent disconnection. The Monitor tab page is displayed. you can check the link traffic. click Submit. choose Monitor > Common Monitoring > Link Performance Monitoring. The Link Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. Ltd.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Context NOTICE The IPPM link to be monitored has been activated. This task is stopped if the monitored link is deleted. 172 . choose Monitor > Common Monitoring > Link Performance Monitoring. Step 3 In the Link Performance Monitoring dialog box. click Submit. The Monitor tab page is displayed. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. you can check the packet loss. The Link Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. The monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. Then. In addition. set Monitor Item to IURPLNK and set other parameters according to actual situations. The Monitor tab page is displayed. ----End Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Then.. and evaluate transport network quality. The check result provides reference for adding links to the Iur-p interface to prevent congestion. click Monitor. set Monitor Item to IPPM and set other parameters according to actual situations. locate the fault. Context NOTICE The Iur-p link must be configured and connected to the peer port before this task is performed. Based on the traffic statistics on the Iur-p link. ----End Monitoring Iur-p Link Traffic This section describes how to monitor traffic on a specified Iur-p link in real time. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. click Monitor. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. Step 3 In the Link Performance Monitoring dialog box. 8. Context l There is no way to avoid that some user data such as International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) will be used during problem location and resolution. – If User Identity Anonymity Switch is OFF. see U2000 Fault Management User Guide. l For details about how to obtain the HMACUtil. Based on the number of cells in the active set and signal strength of each cell. Ltd. the tracing task becomes invalid. and user IMSI data is directly entered in IMSI.4 UMTS Monitoring This section describes performance monitoring of UMTS services. This function provides an anonymous data processing method. You are recommended to comply with local laws when executing the task and take ample measures to fully protect user data. NOTE l Change the anonymous policy and cipher key on the U2000 by choosing Trace and Maintenance > Signaling Trace > Anonymous Policy Management > Anonymous Cypher Key Management (application style) or Trace and Maintenance > Monitor > Signaling Trace > Anonymous Policy Management > Anonymous Cypher Key Management (traditional style). you need to restart the tracing task. A maximum of six monitoring tasks can be started simultaneously for a monitoring item. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the anonymous policy is enabled.1 Monitoring Connection Performance This section describes how to monitor performance of physical connections of UEs during a call. such as enabling the anonymous function and deleting the folder that saves trace records after you finish processing data. the anonymous policy is disabled.. and anonymous IMSI data must be entered in IMSI. check whether IMSI data to be entered must be anonymous by running the LST USERIDANONSWITCH command and querying User Identity Anonymity Switch. 173 . – If User Identity Anonymity Switch is ON. l If you change the anonymous policy or cipher key of a started tracing task. l When entering IMSI. Monitoring P-CPICH Ec/No and RSCP This section describes how to monitor the P-CPICH Ec/No and RSCP of a cell in the active set in real time.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring 8. you can learn about whether the current connection is at the edge or the center of the cell. Otherwise. For details. contact Huawei technical support. The anonymous IMSI data is the IMSI data encrypted by the HMACUtil using the cipher key.4. BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring NOTICE Before running this monitoring task, perform either of the following operations: l Run SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to set Handover algorithm switch. Ensure that SOFT_HANDOVER_SWITCH is selected for this parameter. l Run MOD UCELLMEAS to set Intra-freq Meas Ctrl Info Ind to REQUIRE. NOTE l This task is used only to monitor connections on dedicated channels. An ongoing task is stopped if the monitored connection is released or relocated from the dedicated channel to a common channel. The task is restarted if the monitored connection is relocated from the common channel to a dedicated channel. l This task is used only to monitor the real-time data of the cells in the active set. The data of other cells is not reported. Therefore, the monitoring results reflect the changes in the number of cells in the active set in real time. l A maximum of three cells in the active set can be monitored in a task. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page, click Monitor. The Monitor tab page is displayed. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane, choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring. The Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. Step 3 In the Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box, set Monitor Item to PCPICH Ec/ No RSCP and set other parameters according to actual situations. Then, click Submit. NOTE After the monitoring task is started, a real-time monitoring window is displayed. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. In the chart, the X-coordinate represents the hour: minute: second. The Y-coordinate represents the reported PCPICH Ec/No (unit: dB) and RSCP (unit: dBm). l RSCP refers to the received signal code power measured on a P-CPICH. The reference point for RSCP measurement is at the antenna connector of a UE. If the P-CPICH uses transmit diversity, you need to measure the RSCP of each antenna and sum up all of the RSCP values to obtain the total RSCP of the PCPICH. l Ec/No refers to the ratio of received energy per chip to noise spectral density. Like RSCP/RSSI, Ec/No is also measured on the P-CPICH. The reference point for Ec/No measurement is also at the antenna connector of the UE. If the P-CPICH uses transmit diversity, you need to measure the Ec/No of each antenna and sum up all of the Ec/No values to obtain the total Ec/No of the P-CPICH. ----End Monitoring SIR Values of the Uplink RLSs This section describes how to monitor the signal-to-interference ratio (SIR) values of the uplink radio link sets (RLSs) used by a UE in real time. By performing this task, you can learn about the uplink radio link quality and quality variations. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 174 BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Context NOTE A task can be started for a UE. The monitoring result includes the number of cells in the active set and the signal strength of each cell. Based on the monitoring result, you can know whether the current connection is at the edge or the center of the cell. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page, click Monitor. The Monitor tab page is displayed. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane, choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring. The Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. Step 3 In the Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box, set Monitor Item to UL SIR and set other parameters according to actual situations. Then, click Submit. NOTE After the monitoring task is started, a real-time monitoring window is displayed. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. The monitoring result can reflect the changes in the number of the RLSs in real time. In the chart, the X-coordinate represents the hour: minute: second. The Y-coordinate represents the reported SIR of the UL RLSs (unit: dB). The SIR is calculated using the formula (RSCP/ISCP) x SF, where: l RSCP is short for Received Signal Code Power and reflects the received power on one code. l ISCP is short for Interference Signal Code Power and reflects interference to the received signal. Only the non-orthogonal interference is measured for ISCP. l SF is short for the spreading factor of a DPCCH. This task is performed on the DPCCH after radio links are combined on the NodeB. In compressed mode, the SIR is not measured during the transmit intervals. The NodeB reports the measured uplink SIR values to the BSC6900. ----End Monitoring the Outer Loop Power Control This section describes how to monitor parameter values during outer loop power control. Based on the current service type, the parameters include Number of Total Blocks, Number of Error Blocks, OLPC UL BLER, OLPC UL BER, OLPC BER Filter, OLPC SIR Target, OLPC SIR Target High Precision, E-DCH Average Transmission Number, Total Number of Transmission Times, Total Number of Discarded PDUs, Total Number of PDUs, and EDCH Residual BLER. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page, click Monitor. The Monitor tab page is displayed. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane, choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring. The Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. Step 3 In the Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box, set Monitor Item to OLPC and set other parameters according to actual situations. Then, click Submit. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 175 BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring NOTE If Monitor Period(s) is set to OLPC, the monitor period is set to the value specified by the OLPC adjustment period parameter in the ADD UTYPRABOLPC or MOD UTYPRABOLPC command. After the monitoring task is started, a real-time monitoring window is displayed. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. In charts, the X-coordinate represents the hour: minute: second. Two charts are used to describe five monitoring items. l The first chart shows the output interface of the OLPC SIR target value, OLPC UL BLER, and OLPC UL BER. The left Y coordinate represents OLPC SIR Target (range: -10 to 18; unit: dB). The right Y coordinate represents OLPC UL BLER (range: 0 to 1; unit: none) and OLPC UL BER (range: 0 to 1; unit: none). l The second chart shows the output interface of E-DCH Average Transmission Number and E-DCH Residual BLER. The left Y coordinate represents E-DCH Average Transmission Number (default value range: 0 to 16; unit: none). The coordinate value range can be dynamically adjusted based on the actual value. The right Y coordinate represents E-DCH Residual BLER (range: 0 to 1; unit: none). ----End Monitoring the SIR Error Values of UL RLSs This section describes how to monitor the SIR error values of radio link sets (RLSs) of the current connection in real time. By performing this task, you can observe whether the SIR can keep up with the variation of the target values and estimate the UL inner loop power control function. If the SIR error values change all the time but are approximate to 0 dB, the UL inner loop power control converges. Otherwise, the UL inner loop power control does not converge. Context This task is used only to monitor connections on dedicated channels. An ongoing task is stopped if the monitored connection is released or relocated from the dedicated channel to a common channel. The task is restarted if the monitored connection is relocated from the common channel to a dedicated channel. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page, click Monitor. The Monitor tab page is displayed. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane, choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring. The Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. Step 3 In the Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box, set Monitor Item to UL SIR Error and set other parameters according to actual situations. Then, click Submit. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 176 BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring NOTE After the monitoring task is started, a real-time monitoring window is displayed. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. In charts, the X-coordinate represents the hour: minute: second. The Y-coordinate represents the reported SIR error values (SIRerror) of the UL RLSs. l SIRerror (unit: dB) is reported from the NodeB to the BSC6900. The formula is as follows: SIRerror = SIR SIRtarget_ave. l Where, SIRtarget_ave represents the average of SIRtarget within a period that is equal to the time for calculating the SIR in the preceding formula for calculating SIRerror. l In compressed mode, SIRtarget equals to SIRcm_target. The SIRtarget_ave is not calculated during transmission intervals. The average of SIRtarget is an arithmetical average. The unit of SIRtarget_ave is dB. ----End Monitoring DL Code TX Power This section describes how to monitor the DL code TX power of each radio link of the current connection in real time. By performing this task, you can analyze the DL power consumption. If the DL code TX power increases and even approximates to the maximum value configured in the signaling message, DL quality deteriorates. Context This task is used only to monitor connections on dedicated channels. An ongoing task is stopped if the monitored connection is released or relocated from the dedicated channel to a common channel. The task is restarted if the monitored connection is relocated from the common channel to a dedicated channel. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page, click Monitor. The Monitor tab page is displayed. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane, choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring. The Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. Step 3 In the Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box, set Monitor Item to DL Tx Code Power and set other parameters according to actual situations. Then, click Submit. NOTE After the monitoring task is started, a real-time monitoring window is displayed. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. The monitoring results reflect the changes in the number of the radio links involved in the current connection in real time. In charts, the X-coordinate represents the hour: minute: second. The Y-coordinate represents the reported DL code TX power (unit: dBm). Code TX power refers to the NodeB TX power on one channelization code that is on one given scrambling code on one given carrier. The DL code TX power can be measured on the DPCCH of any radio link outgoing from the UTRAN and indicates the pilot bit power of the DPCCH. In compressed mode, the TX power measurement should cover all timeslots, including those during the transmit intervals. The reference point for measurement is at the antenna connector. If transmit diversity is used, the DL code TX power is the total of the code TX powers of all antennas. ----End Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 177 BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Monitoring UE TX Power This section describes how to monitor the TX power of a UE. By performing this task, you can analyze the UL radio link quality. If the UE TX power increases and even reaches the limit of the UE capability, the UL radio link quality deteriorates. Context UE TX power refers to the transmit power of a UE on a carrier. The reference point for measurement of the UE TX power is at the antenna connector of the UE. This task is used only to monitor connections on dedicated channels. An ongoing task is stopped if the monitored connection is released or relocated from the dedicated channel to a common channel. The task is restarted if the monitored connection is relocated from the common channel to a dedicated channel. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page, click Monitor. The Monitor tab page is displayed. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane, choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring. The Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. Step 3 In the Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box, set Monitor Item to UE Tx Power and set other parameters according to actual situations. Then, click Submit. NOTE After the monitoring task is started, a real-time monitoring window is displayed. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. In charts, the X-coordinate represents the hour: minute: second. The Y-coordinate represents the reported UE TX power (unit: dBm). ----End Monitoring UL Traffic Volume This section describes how to monitor the UL traffic volume, that is, the buffered data volume at the UE side, on the current connection in real time. By performing this task, you can analyze transmission performance of UL traffic volume. The UL traffic volume on transport channels is measured by the UE and reported to the BSC6900. Context Traffic volume refers to the Buffer Occupy (BO) value. BO is the number of data bytes to be transmitted or retransmitted from the RLC entity on a logical channel. If RLC is in AM mode, the BO value includes the control Protocol Data Unit (PDU) and the PDU outside the transmit window, excluding the PDUs for which no ACK is received. This task can be used to monitor the connections of PS interactive and background services on common channels or dedicated channels. As specified in protocols, UEs cannot report the UL traffic volume of HSUPA services to the RNC. Therefore, the UL traffic volume is not displayed in the LMT monitoring window. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 178 BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page, click Monitor. The Monitor tab page is displayed. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane, choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring. The Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. Step 3 In the Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box, set Monitor Item to UL Traffic Vol and set other parameters according to actual situations. Then. click Submit. NOTE After the monitoring task is started, a real-time monitoring window is displayed. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. In charts, the X-coordinate represents the hour: minute: second. The Y-coordinate represents the reported UL traffic volume on the UL physical channel (unit: byte). ----End Monitoring DL Traffic Volume This section describes how to monitor DL traffic volume, that is, the buffered data volume on the MSC side, on the current connection in real time. By performing this task, you can analyze transmission performance of DL traffic volume. The DL traffic volume on transport channels is measured on the BSC6900. Context Traffic volume refers to the Buffer Occupy (BO) value. BO is the number of data bytes to be transmitted or retransmitted from the RLC entity on a logical channel. If RLC is in AM mode, the BO value includes the control Protocol Data Unit (PDU) and the PDU outside the transmit window, excluding the PDUs for which no ACK is received. This task can be used to monitor the connections of PS interactive and background services on common channels or dedicated channels. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page, click Monitor. The Monitor tab page is displayed. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane, choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring. The Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. Step 3 In the Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box, set Monitor Item to DL Traffic Vol and set other parameters according to actual situations. Then, click Submit. NOTE After the monitoring task is started, a real-time monitoring window is displayed. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. In charts, the X-coordinate represents the hour: minute: second. The Y-coordinate represents the reported DL traffic volume (unit: byte). ----End Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 179 click Monitor. The throughput measurement involves RLC headers. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. 180 . Bandwidth refers to the maximum rate calculated based on the RLC payload.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Monitoring UL Throughput and Bandwidth This section describes how to monitor rate variations on the UL transport access stratum and non-access stratum of the current connection in real time. a real-time monitoring window is displayed.. The Y-coordinate represents the reported UL throughput and UL bandwidth (unit: bit/s). The bandwidth changes during RB reconfiguration. the X-coordinate represents the hour: minute: second. and therefore the measured peak throughput is greater than the bandwidth. Context Throughput refers to the amount of data transmitted on a transport channel in units of time and is measured on the MAC-d. If the UL bandwidth varies with the UL throughput. choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring. l Observe the variations of the UL throughput and bandwidth during verification of dynamic channel configurations. Step 3 In the Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box. Then. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The bandwidth changes during RB reconfiguration. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. Ltd. you can analyze dynamic channel configuration and service source rate variations. By performing this task. The throughput measurement involves RLC headers. ----End Monitoring DL Throughput and Bandwidth This section describes how to monitor rate variations on the DL transport access stratum and non-access stratum of the current connection in real time. This task can be used to monitor the connections of PS interactive and background services on common channels or dedicated channels. and therefore the measured peak throughput is greater than the bandwidth. Bandwidth refers to the maximum rate calculated based on the RLC payload. observe the variation of UL throughput to verify service source rate variations. The Monitor tab page is displayed. In charts. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. you can analyze dynamic channel configuration and service source rate variations. set Monitor Item to UL Throughput Bandwidth and set other parameters according to actual situations. NOTE After the monitoring task is started. dynamic channel configuration is normal. Context Throughput refers to the amount of data transmitted on a transport channel in units of time and is measured on the MAC-d. The Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. click Submit. l If dynamic channel configuration is not used. By performing this task. The Y-coordinate represents the reported DL throughput and DL bandwidth (unit: bit/s). choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring. dynamic channel configuration is normal. choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. click Submit. Context Handover delay refers to the time taken by each handover. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. Step 3 In the Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box. set Monitor Item to DL Throughput Bandwidth and set other parameters according to actual situations. and completes the handover. The Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. An ongoing task is stopped if the UE transits from the CELL_DCH state to the CELL_FACH state or idle mode. In charts. initiates the handover (including the soft handover and the hard handover). Ltd. 181 . l If dynamic channel configuration is not used. click Monitor. the BSC6900 makes a handover decision. The task is restarted if the UE transits from the CELL_FACH state or idle mode back to the CELL_DCH state. If the DL bandwidth varies with the DL throughput. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. ----End Monitoring Handover Delay This section describes how to monitor the handover delay. NOTE After the monitoring task is started. Then. A maximum of five tasks can be simultaneously started on the LMT. This task is used only to monitor the handover delay of a UE in the CELL_DCH state. Step 3 In the Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box. This task can monitor the delay of an intra-frequency or inter-frequency handover but not an inter-RAT handover. click Monitor. The Monitor tab page is displayed. the X-coordinate represents the hour: minute: second. l Observe the variations of the DL throughput and bandwidth during verification of dynamic channel configurations. The Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. observe the variation of DL throughput to verify service source rate variations. During this period of time. The Monitor tab page is displayed. Then.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring This task can be used to monitor the connections of PS interactive and background services on common channels or dedicated channels.. set Monitor Item to Handover Delay and set other parameters according to actual situations. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. a real-time monitoring window is displayed. click Submit. a real-time monitoring window is displayed. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. ----End Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The number of signaling transport channels is always 1. If the BLER decreases. This task is used only to monitor connections on dedicated channels.. By performing this task. Then. click Monitor. In charts. NOTE After the monitoring task is started. 182 . Context The BLER of the DL transport channel is measured on the UE and used for outer loop power control. The Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. The Y-coordinate represents handover delay and interval (unit: ms). set Monitor Item to DL BLER and set other parameters according to actual situations. click Submit. In charts. Step 3 In the Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box. choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring. The task is restarted if the monitored connection is relocated from the common channel to a dedicated channel.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Monitoring Results Description HO Delay(ms) Time taken by a handover HO Interval(ms) Difference between the end time of the preceding handover and the end time of the current handover NOTE After the monitoring task is started. you can analyze the DL radio link quality. a real-time monitoring window is displayed. the DL radio link quality improves. the X-coordinate represents the hour: minute: second. Ltd. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. the DL radio link quality deteriorates. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. The Y-coordinate represents the reported BLER of the DL transport channel (unit: %). The monitoring results reflect the changes in the number of traffic transport channels in real time. the X-coordinate represents the hour: minute: second. An ongoing task is stopped if the monitored connection is released or relocated from the dedicated channel to a common channel. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. If the BLER of the DL transport channel increases. ----End Monitoring DL Transport Channel BLER This section describes how to monitor block error rate (BLER) variations on all transport channels. The Monitor tab page is displayed. 65 kbit/s. 18. that is. 5. 15.25 kbit/s.2 kbit/s. The narrowband AMR has eight available rates. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. the X-coordinate represents the hour: minute: second. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. If the UL or DL EVQI value of AMR services decreases. 10. 19. the UL or DL voice quality improves.75 kbit/s.85 kbit/s. 5. set Monitor Item to AMR Mode and set other parameters according to actual situations. click Submit. the UL or DL voice quality deteriorates.7 kbit/s.2 kbit/ s. NOTE After the monitoring task is started. a real-time monitoring window is displayed.85 kbit/s.25 kbit/s. 183 . If the UL or DL EVQI value of AMR services increases. The Y-coordinate represents the maximum AMR rate in the uplink and downlink (unit: kbit/s). 8. 6. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The monitoring results are used to analyze the UL and DL voice quality of these services.05 kbit/ s. 23. nine AMR modes: 23. Step 3 In the Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box. The Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. and 6.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Monitoring AMR Mode This section describes how to monitor the variation in the configured AMR rate in real time. This monitoring task can be started only if the traced UE is processing AMR services.85 kbit/s. The wideband AMR has nine available rates. 12. The Monitor tab page is displayed. Then. 7. and 4.85 kbit/s. 7. Context This task can be started only if the traced UE is processing AMR services. choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring. ----End Monitoring AMR EVQI This section describes how to monitor the UL and DL enhanced-VQI (EVQI) of the ongoing wideband or narrowband AMR services. Ltd. click Monitor. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts.9 kbit/s.95 kbit/s.. 14.15 kbit/s. eight AMR modes: 12. In charts. that is.4 kbit/s.60 kbit/s. set Monitor Item to AMR EVQI and set other parameters according to actual situations.4. Therefore. The EVQI value ranges from 0 to 5. If UL_EVQI_SWITCH and DL_EVQI_SWITCH are set to 1 simultaneously. The DL EVQI evaluation depends on the BLER measurement on the UE side. the BLER measurement will be temporarily stopped when some tracing or monitoring tasks. l Run the SET UMRCTRL command with MrRprtCfgSwitch and MrDlBlerPeriod set to MR_DL_BLER_MEAS_SWITCH_7-1 and D4. l Run the SET URRCTRLSWITCH command with PROCESSSWITCH5 set to UL_EVQI_SWITCH-1 or DL_EVQI_SWITCH-1. Ltd.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Context NOTE Perform the following operations before stating this monitoring task. you can observe and determine whether the power is normal. a real-time monitoring window is displayed. the X-coordinate represents the hour:minute:second. However. are started. NOTE After the monitoring task is started. The Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Context You can run the LST UPCPICH command to query the automatic adjustment range of the PCPICH TX power. The power is abnormal if it is beyond the range. Monitoring Cell P-CPICH TX Power This section describes how to monitor the PCPICH TX power of a specified cell. Step 3 In the Link Performance Monitoring dialog box. you can enable the DL transport channel BLER monitoring under connection performance monitoring to measure the BLER. Then. In the performance monitoring window of the LMT.2 Monitoring Cell Performance This section describes how to monitor cell performance. click Submit. Run the command SET UMRCTRL command with MrDlBlerPeriod set to an appropriate value. such as UE transmit power tracing or Ec/No tracing under UE tracing and UE transmit power monitoring under connection performance monitoring. respectively. l Run the SET UEVQIPARA command with EVQIUplinkPeriod set to an appropriate value. ----End 8. choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring. the EVQI value is 100 times the actual value (ranging from 0 to 500). such as common measurement values and number of UEs on common channels. the EVQIs are reported at the interval specified by EVQIUplinkPeriod. As specified in protocols. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. The Y-coordinate represents the maximum UL and DL data rates of AMR services (unit: kbit/s). The Monitor tab page is displayed. enable the BLER measurement when monitoring the downlink EVQI. In charts. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. By performing this task. A maximum of six tasks can be simultaneously started for a monitoring item. 184 . In this case. click Monitor.. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. click Submit. NOTE After the monitoring task is started. The Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. you can observe the UL load in real time. The Y-coordinate represents the cell UL RTWP (unit: dBm). the X-coordinate represents the hour: minute: second. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. By performing this task. ----End Monitoring DL Carrier TX Power in a Cell This section describes how to monitor the DL carrier transmit (TX) power of a specified cell. choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring. Step 3 In the Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box. the X-coordinate represents hour: minute: second. Ltd. set Monitor Item to PCPICH TxPower and set other parameters according to actual situations. In charts. The UL RTWP is measured and reported by the NodeB. click Monitor. The Monitor tab page is displayed. Then. In charts. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. Then. ----End Monitoring Cell UL RTWP This section describes how to monitor the UL received total wideband power (RTWP) in a specified cell. The Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. 185 .Cell background noise/UL RTWP). The UL load factor is calculated using the following formula: UL load factor = 1 .. the UL RTWP can also be used to measure the relative UL load of the cell. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. The Y-coordinate represents the P-CPICH power (unit: dBm). The Monitor tab page is displayed. Step 3 In the Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box. NOTE After the monitoring task is started. The cell background noise is a constant and set using the ADD UCELLCAC or MOD UCELLCAC command. choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. click Monitor. Therefore. you can observe the DL load in real time. Context The CAC procedure measures the UL load based on the UL load factor. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. click Submit. set Monitor Item to RTWP and set other parameters according to actual situations. a real-time monitoring window is displayed. a real-time monitoring window is displayed. The DL TX power of a cell is measured and reported by the NodeB. By performing this task. 186 . ----End Monitoring Number of UEs in a Cell This section describes how to monitor the number of UEs on common channels. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. Ltd. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. click Monitor. HSDPA channels. The Y-coordinate represents the number of UEs in a cell. choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring. The Y-coordinate represents the ratio of the DL carrier TX power to the maximum TX power of the cell (unit: %). NOTE After the monitoring task is started. Step 3 In the Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box. In charts. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. click Monitor. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. Then. the X-coordinate represents the hour: minute: second. After the cell is set up. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. ----End Monitoring Node Synchronization This section describes how to monitor the time difference between RNC Frame Number (RFN) and NodeB Frame Number (BFN) of a specified cell and the time taken for node synchronization. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. The Monitor tab page is displayed. you can run ADD UCELLSETUP to set the maximum TX power. Step 3 In the Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box. and HSUPA channels in a specified cell. Then. the X-coordinate represents the hour: minute: second. a real-time monitoring window is displayed. The Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. set Monitor Item to Cell User Number and set other parameters according to actual situations. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. a real-time monitoring window is displayed. you can run MOD UCELL to modify it.. choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring. you can learn about UE distribution in cells. set Monitor Item to Cell DL Carrier TX Power and set other parameters according to actual situations. click Submit. When setting up a cell. NOTE After the monitoring task is started. In charts. By performing this task.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Context The CAC procedure uses the ratio of the DL carrier TX power to the maximum TX power of the cell to measure the cell DL load. click Submit. dedicated channels. The Monitor tab page is displayed. The Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring By performing this task. ----End Monitoring UL CAC This section describes how to monitor the UL call admission control (CAC) procedure of a specified cell. a real-time monitoring window is displayed. The Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. The Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring. Step 3 In the Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box. click Submit. Then. The monitoring results are periodically reported and reported in real time when UEs access the cell. you can observe the drift between the RFN and BFN in real time. The UL load factor is calculated using the following formula: UL load factor = 1 . Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts.. By performing this task. click Monitor. Ltd. l CAC algorithm 1 uses the UL load factor to measure the UL load. By default. The Monitor tab page is displayed. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring. 187 . If the difference between RFN and BFN varies too rapidly. you can observe the variation in the predicted values and measured values of the UL load and determine the prediction accuracy of the UL CAC algorithm. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. set Monitor Item to Node Sync and set other parameters according to actual situations. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. Then. algorithm 2 is used. Step 3 In the Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box. set Monitor Item to UL CAC Monitor and set other parameters according to actual situations.Cell background noise/UL RTWP). You can run the MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH command to set the UL CAC algorithm of a cell and run the LST UCELLALGOSWITCH command to query the UL CAC algorithm of a cell. transmission problems occur between the BSC6900 and the NodeB. The Monitor tab page is displayed. click Monitor. Context The methods for measuring the cell load vary with CAC algorithms (CAC algorithm 1 and CAC algorithm 2). The Y-coordinate represents the time difference between RFN and BFN and the time taken by the NodeB to complete node synchronization (unit: ms). click Submit. In charts. NOTE After the monitoring task is started. l CAC algorithm 2 uses the ratio of the current number of UL equivalent UEs to the maximum number of UL equivalent UEs to measure the cell load. You can run the command ADD UCELLCAC or MOD UCELLCAC to set the cell background noise. the X-coordinate represents the hour: minute: second. The Y-coordinate represents the predicted values and measured values of the load (unit: %). l CAC algorithm 2 uses the ratio of the current number of DL equivalent UEs to the maximum number of DL equivalent UEs. By performing this task. l CAC algorithm 1 uses the ratio of the DL carrier TX power to the maximum TX power of the cell to measure the DL load of the cell. ----End Monitoring the Number of UL Equivalent UEs This section describes how to monitor the number of UL equivalent UEs in a specified cell. The maximum TX power is a constant and set using the ADD UCELLSETUP command.. The Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. Context The methods for measuring the cell load vary with CAC algorithms (CAC algorithm 1 and CAC algorithm 2). you can observe the variation in the predicted values and measured values of the DL load and determine the prediction accuracy of the DL CAC algorithm. the X-coordinate represents the hour: minute: second. In charts. NOTE After the monitoring task is started. Then. You can run the MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH command to set the DL CAC algorithm of a cell and run the LST UCELLALGOSWITCH command to query the DL CAC algorithm of a cell. set Monitor Item to DL CAC Monitor and set other parameters according to actual situations. choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring. 188 . The monitoring results are periodically reported and reported in real time when UEs access the cell. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. The monitoring results are periodically reported and reported in real time when UEs access the cell. In charts. Ltd. The Monitor tab page is displayed. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring NOTE After the monitoring task is started. By default. a real-time monitoring window is displayed. click Submit. algorithm 1 is used. By performing this task. a real-time monitoring window is displayed. ----End Monitoring DL CAC This section describes how to monitor the DL call admission control (CAC) procedure of a specified cell. Step 3 In the Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box. The Y-coordinate represents the predicted values and measured values of the load (unit: %). the X-coordinate represents the hour: minute: second. you can observe the variation in the number of UL equivalent UEs. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. click Monitor. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring. The Y-coordinate represents the predicted and measured number of UL equivalent UEs. choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring. you can observe the code usage in real time. NOTE After the monitoring task is started. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. Step 3 In the Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box. ----End Monitoring the Number of DL Equivalent UEs This section describes how to monitor the number of DL equivalent UEs in a specified cell. the X-coordinate represents the hour: minute: second. choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. set Monitor Item to UL Total Equivalent User Number and set other parameters according to actual situations. The Monitor tab page is displayed. you can observe the variation in the number of DL equivalent UEs. click Submit. a real-time monitoring window is displayed.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. The Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. click Submit. The Y-coordinate represents the predicted and measured number of DL equivalent UEs. click Monitor on the LMT main page. 189 . Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. a real-time monitoring window is displayed. Step 3 In the Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box.. click Monitor. Then. In charts. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. The monitoring results are periodically reported and reported in real time when UEs access the cell. Then. The Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. click Monitor. set Monitor Item to DL Total Equivalent User Number and set other parameters according to actual situations. The Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. Ltd. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. The Monitor tab page is displayed. By performing this task. the X-coordinate represents the hour: minute: second. NOTE After the monitoring task is started. In charts. ----End Monitoring the Cell Code Tree This section describes how to monitor the DL channel OVSF code tree of a specified cell. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. By performing this task. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. The Monitor tab page is displayed. click Submit. if HSDPA_GBP_MEAS is set to 0 for the cell. By performing this task. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. set Monitor Item to Cell Code Tree Monitor and set other parameters according to actual situations. ----End Monitoring the Minimum Power Required for the HS-DSCH This section describes how to monitor the minimum power required for the HS-DSCH in a specified cell. run the MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH command to set it to 1. Run the LST UCELLALGOSWITCH command to query the value of HSDPA GBP Meas Algorithm. Ltd. The Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. ----End Monitoring the HS-DSCH Bit Rate This section describes how to monitor the HS-DSCH bit rate of a specified cell. Then. the HS-DSCH bit rate of the cell is not reported. click Monitor. a real-time monitoring window is displayed. NOTE A monitoring window is displayed.. showing the real-time monitoring results in chart. the minimum power required for the HS-DSCH is not reported. In charts. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. you can observe the variation in the HS-DSCH transmission rate in real time. you can observe the ratio of the minimum required power to the maximum TX power on the HS-DSCH in the cell. click Submit. If the value is OFF. choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring. Step 3 In the Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box. The Y-coordinate represents the ratio of the required power to the maximum TX power of the cell (unit: ‰). 190 . HSDPA_GBP_MEAS specifies whether to perform an HSDPA GBR measurement. Then. set Monitor Item to HS-DSCH Min Power Requirement and set other parameters according to actual situations. The task name is indicated in the title bar of the window. By performing this task. NOTE After the monitoring task is started. run the MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH command to set it to 1. the X-coordinate represents the hour: minute: second. If the value is OFF. Context NOTE When this task is performed. The Monitor tab page is displayed. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Step 3 In the Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box. HSDPA GBP Meas Algorithm specifies whether to perform an HSDPA PBR measurement. Context NOTE When this task is performed. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. Run the LST UCELLALGOSWITCH command to query the value of HSDPA GBP Meas Algorithm. if HSDPA GBP Meas Algorithm is set to 0. Context NOTE When this task is performed. click Monitor. the E-DCH bit rate of the cell is not reported. The Y-coordinate represents the bit rate (unit: bit/s). a real-time monitoring window is displayed. set Monitor Item to E-DCH Provided Bitrate and set other parameters according to actual situations. The Monitor tab page is displayed. Then. Run the LST UCELLALGOSWITCH command to query the value of HSUPA GBP Meas Algorithm. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. Then. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. NOTE After the monitoring task is started. a real-time monitoring window is displayed. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. By performing this task. 191 . choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring. the X-coordinate represents the hour: minute: second. The Y-coordinate represents the bit rate (unit: bit/s). the X-coordinate represents the hour: minute: second. HSUPA GBP Meas Algorithm specifies whether to perform an HSUPA PBR measurement. Step 3 In the Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. Step 3 In the Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box. you can observe the variation in the E-DCH transmission rate in real time. The Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. Throughput refers to the maximum rate that a device can reach without discarding frames. The Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. ----End Monitoring the E-DCH Bit Rate This section describes how to monitor the bit rate on an enhanced dedicated channel (E-DCH) for HSUPA services. In charts. set Monitor Item to HS-DSCH Provided Bitrate and set other parameters according to actual situations. In charts. click Submit.. run the MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH command to set it to 1. The Monitor tab page is displayed. NOTE After the monitoring task is started. If the value is OFF. Ltd. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. click Monitor. if HSUPA GBP Meas Algorithm is set to 0. ----End Monitoring Cell UL Throughput This section describes how to monitor the UL throughput of a cell. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring. click Submit. ----End Monitoring the Number of ACK Messages per Second in a Cell This section describes how to monitor the number of ACK messages that are sent from the AICH to UEs on the RACH and E-RACH in a specified cell. set Monitor Item to Cell DL Throughput and set other parameters according to actual situations. Ltd. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. 192 . NOTE After the monitoring task is started. In charts. ----End Monitoring Cell DL Throughput This section describes how to monitor the DL throughput of a cell. Step 3 In the Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box. a real-time monitoring window is displayed. Context The number of ACK messages is reported to the RNC through common measurement messages over the Iub interface. click Monitor.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. the X-coordinate represents the hour: minute: second. NOTE After the monitoring task is started. you can observe random access times in the cell in real time. set Monitor Item to Cell UL Throughput and set other parameters according to actual situations. click Submit. choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring. In charts. By performing this task. The Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. The Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. a real-time monitoring window is displayed. choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring. The Monitor tab page is displayed. Then. Step 3 In the Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Throughput refers to the maximum rate that a device can reach without discarding frames. click Monitor on the LMT main page. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. click Submit. The Y-coordinate represents the DL throughput of the cell. Then. The Y-coordinate represents the UL throughput of the cell. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts.. The Monitor tab page is displayed. the X-coordinate represents the hour: minute: second. a local cell group. set Monitor Item to Cell Credit and set other parameters according to actual situations.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. The Monitor tab page is displayed. the RNC performs admission control based on the values of Adjusted UL Local Cell Group Credit usage (Permillage) and Adjusted UL NodeB Credit used. the X-coordinate represents hour: minute: second. Ltd. Step 3 In the Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box. The Monitor tab page is displayed. a real-time monitoring window is displayed. click Monitor.. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 193 . set Monitor Item to Number of acknowledged random access and set other parameters according to actual situations. The Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Monitoring Item Description DL local cell total Credit Downlink credit capability of a local cell. and then click Submit. UL local cell group Credit used. ----End Monitoring Cell Credit This section describes how to monitor the credit conditions of a local cell. choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring. and UL NodeB Credit used. NOTE When the CE Overbooking feature is enabled. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. This function is disabled by default. choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring. NOTE l You can run the ADD UCELLALGOSWITCH and MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH commands to set whether to report the number of ACK messages per second in a cell. The Y-coordinate represents the number of ACK messages per second in a cell. ----End Result The following table lists the items shown in the monitoring result. Step 3 In the Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box. l You can run the SET ULDM command to set the report interval and filter window size. The Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. click Submit. l After the monitoring task is started. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. Then. the BSC6900 determines whether a UE can access the network. The NodeB reports the item value to the RNC using a message. In charts. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. and a NodeB. click Monitor. By performing this task. The following items are not involved in admission control: UL local cell Credit used. The NodeB reports the item value to the RNC using a message. The NodeB reports the item value to the RNC using a message. that is.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Monitoring Item Description UL local cell total Credit Uplink credit capability of a local cell. that is. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Monitoring the FDPCH SYMBOL This section describes how to monitor the F-DPCH SYMBOL usage. that is. Ltd. DL NodeB Credit used Downlink credit used by a NodeB. the X-coordinate represents the hour: minute: second. DL NodeB total Credit Downlink credit capability of a NodeB. Adjusted UL NodeB Credit used Uplink credit actually used by a NodeB. UL NodeB Credit used Uplink credit used by a NodeB. The Y-coordinate represents the values of Local Cell Credit and Local Cell Group/NodeB Total Credit of the cell. DL local cell group Credit used Downlink credit used by a local cell group. that is.. UL local cell group Credit used Uplink credit used by a local cell group.. The NodeB reports the item value to the RNC using a message. UL local cell group total Credit Uplink credit capability of a local cell group. that is. the total downlink credit used by all UEs served by the NodeB. a real-time monitoring window is displayed. After the monitoring task is started. the total uplink credit used by all UEs served by the NodeB. that is. DL local cell Credit used Downlink credit used by a local cell. the total downlink credit used by all UEs in the local cell group. DL local cell group total Credit Downlink credit capability of a local cell group. Adjusted UL Local Cell Group Credit usage (Permillage) The NodeB reports the actually used uplink credit of a local cell group per second. The NodeB reports the item value to the RNC using a message. The RNC divides this value by the value of UL local cell group total Credit and converts the specific value into a permillage. The NodeB reports the item value to the RNC per second. the total uplink credit used by all UEs in the local cell group. The NodeB reports the item value to the RNC using a message. SYMBOL No. the total downlink credit used by all UEs in the local cell. In charts. UL NodeB total Credit Uplink credit capability of a NodeB. the total uplink credit used by all UEs in the local cell. and timeslot format corresponding to the occupied SYMBOL. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. including the F-DPCH code. 194 . UL local cell Credit used Uplink credit used by a local cell. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. l In the FDPCH SYMBOL monitoring window. The Monitor tab page is displayed. The numbers in the grids indicate the timeslot formats. click Submit. a real-time monitoring window is displayed. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. NOTE After the monitoring task is started. By performing this task. a real-time monitoring window is displayed. The Y-coordinate represents the usage of the license. Step 3 In the System Resource Monitoring dialog box. Step 3 In the Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box. ----End 8. choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring. (Unit: Erl and kbit/s) ----End 8. The task name is displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. set the parameters according to actual situations.4 Monitoring Iur-p Delay This section describes how to monitor and specify the delay of an Iur-p link between two external nodes.. set Monitor Item to FDPCH SYMBOL monitoring and set other parameters according to actual situations. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. and click Submit. NOTE After the monitoring task is started.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Context The F-DPCH carries the Transport Power Control (TPC) information of HSDPA services and uses the spreading factor SF256. click Monitor. click Monitor. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. The Monitor tab page is displayed. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > System Resource Monitoring. The System Resource Monitoring dialog box is displayed. Then. The Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed.4.3 Monitoring System Resources This section describes how to monitor the licensed Erlang value and the PS user plane throughput of the system in real time. In charts. you can view the usage of the SYMBOL corresponding to the F-DPCH code. the X-coordinate represents the hour: minute: second.4. 195 . you can observe and determine whether the Iur—p link delay is normal in real time. The task name and related parameters are displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. and click Submit.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 8 Performance Monitoring Context l When RNC in Pool Load Sharing is enabled. the X-coordinate represents the hour: minute: second. The Monitor tab page is displayed. the Iur-p delay is too large. The task name and related parameters are displayed in the title bar of the window and the monitoring result is displayed in lists and charts. the Iur-p one-way transmission delay must be less than or equal to 10 ms.. a real-time monitoring window is displayed. (Unit: 0. Step 2 On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. The Y-coordinate represents the Iur. click Monitor. l When RNC in Pool Node Redundancy is enabled.125 ms) ----End Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The Iur-p Monitoring dialog box is displayed. the Iur-p one-way transmission delay must be less than or equal to 100 ms. 196 . Step 3 In the Iur-p Monitoring dialog box. l If the delay exceeds either of the preceding values. In charts. Ltd.delay. set the parameters according to actual situations. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Iur-p Monitoring. NOTE After the monitoring task is started. and how to query the board status. ports. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. links. 9. By performing this task. and alarms. 197 .1 Device Panel Operations This section describes device panel operations of the BSC6900. Ltd.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 9 Device Panel 9 Device Panel About This Chapter This chapter describes how to manage the BSC6900 using the device and emulation panels. You can use these panels to query information about boards.2 Emulation Panel Operations This section describes the operations of the BSC6900 emulation panel. 9. you can learn about how to start and use it. including how to start and use the device panel and how to query the board status.. The eGBTS does not support this function. including how to start and use the device panel and how to query the board status. The device panel is automatically refreshed to show board status in real time. For details. the LMT provides the graphical device panel to help users maintain devices.1. click list is displayed. Figure 9-1 Device Panel Alarm indicators indicate the board alarm status. such as querying the board status. The drop-down If the tab page under Device Maintenance is not in full view.1. Ltd. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 198 . 9. You can learn about the board status based on the board indicator color and active alarm indicators.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 9 Device Panel 9.1 Device Panel Operations This section describes device panel operations of the BSC6900. Select the required item from the drop-down list to view the corresponding tab page..1 Introduction to the Device Panel In addition to MML commands. you can right-click a board in position and choose any option from the shortcut menu to perform operations.2 Starting the Device Panel This section describes how to start the device panel. l If you select Show logical function under the color descriptions of the board. On the device panel. l You can right-click the peripheral frame of a rack. see the descriptions shown in the right side of the device pane. and board indicator colors indicate the board running status. 9. l . and choose Refresh Shelf from the shortcut menu to refresh the rack. the logic functions of boards are displayed on the device panel. The Device Maintenance tab page is displayed. showing the real-time CPU/DSP usage.2 Starting the Emulation Panel).1.1. Context The OMU and SAU do not support this operation. ----End 9. Step 2 On the device panel or emulation panel.3 Querying the Status of an E1/T1 Port This section describes how to query the status of an E1/T1 port. The CPU/DSP Usage window is displayed. and choose Query E1/T1 Port Status from the shortcut menu. ----End 9. Procedure Step 1 Start the BSC device panel (see 9. Run the DSP CPUUSAGE command to query the CPU/DSP usage.1. Right-click a board in position in the device panel or emulation panel.2. Procedure l l Using menus 1. showing detailed information about the E1/T1 port.2 Starting the Device Panel) or start the emulation panel (see 9. You can query the CPU/DSP usage using menus or MML commands.2 Starting the Emulation Panel).2 Starting the Device Panel) or start the emulation panel (see 9. Ltd. and choose CPU/DSP Usage Query from the shortcut menu. 2. Prerequisites l The boards are in position. right-click the E1/T1 interface board to be queried.4 Querying the CPU/DSP Usage This section describes how to query the CPU/DSP usage of a board.1. l The boards are in position.. 199 .BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 9 Device Panel Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. The device panel is displayed in the BSC Device Panel tab page. The Query E1/T1 Port Status dialog box is displayed. Using MML commands 1. Start the BSC device panel (see 9. ----End Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. click Device Maintenance.2. Prerequisites l You have logged in to the LMT. choose BSC Maintenance > Maintain Device > Query BSC Board Clock Status. 200 .5 Querying BSC Board Clock Status This section describes how to query the clock status of a BSC board. 2. and click Query. set the parameters according to actual situations. Ltd. Procedure l l Using menus (1) 1. and choose Query BSC Board Clock Status from the shortcut menu. 2. In the Query BSC Board Clock Status dialog box. The query result is displayed.2 Starting the Device Panel) or open the emulation panel (see 9. and click Query.1. On the LMT main page. The Query BSC Board Clock Status dialog box is displayed. Context You can query the clock status of a BSC board using menus or MML commands. In the Query BSC Board Clock Status dialog box.1.2 Starting the Emulation Panel). set the parameters according to actual situations.2. click Device Maintenance. Figure 9-2 Query results of BSC Board Clock Status Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. On the BSC Maintenance tab page. Right-click a board in position in the device panel or emulation panel.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 9 Device Panel 9. Open the device panel (see 9.. 3. Using menus (2) 1. The Query BSC Board Clock Status dialog box is displayed. 3. The Device Maintenance tab page is displayed. as shown in Figure 1. showing the detailed board information. Run the DSP CLK command to query the board clock status. 2.2. Figure 9-3 Query results of board status Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2. Procedure l l Using menus (1) 1. The query result is displayed. click Device Maintenance. Using menus (2) 1. ----End 9. The Query BSC Board Information dialog box is displayed. Prerequisites l The boards are in position.1. Start the device panel (see 9. On the LMT main page. 201 .2 Starting the Emulation Panel). The Device Maintenance tab page is displayed.6 Querying the BSC Board Information This section describes how to query the status of a BSC board. In the Query BSC Board Information dialog box. as shown in Figure 1. choose BSC Maintenance > Maintain Device > Query BSC Board Information. 3.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 9 Device Panel l Using MML commands 1. and click Query.1. Ltd. set the parameters according to actual situations.2 Starting the Device Panel) or start the emulation panel (see 9. The Query BSC Board Information dialog box is displayed. On the BSC Maintenance tab page. Context You can query the status of a board using menus or MML commands. Right-click a board in position in the device panel or emulation panel. and choose Query BSC Board Information from the shortcut menu.. l Resetting the CPU An SPUa board has four CPUs numbered from 0 to 3. Therefore. SPUb/SPUc boards support resetting only CPU O. l Resetting the Board Board reset is mandatory during software upgrade and software loading. Therefore.1. Procedure l Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Using menus (1) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Other types of boards have one CPU each. administrator-level. Context NOTICE l If the standby board is not available or is faulty. – A DEUa board has 48 DSPs numbered from 0 to 47. and the DSP on a DPU board. operator-level. l Resetting the DSP DSPs can be reset separately: – A DPUb board has 22 DSPs numbered from 0 to 21. and then the standby board (the original active board) resets after the switchover. and authorized custom-level users can perform this operation. you are advised to perform this operation during off-peak hours. If an SCUa/SCUb board resets while its standby board is not available or is faulty. An SPUb/SPUc board has four CPUs numbered from 0 to 3. Board reset will reload the programs and data files.7 Resetting a BSC Board This section describes how to reset a boardthe CPU on an SPUa/SPUb/SPUc board. resetting the board will interrupt the ongoing services. l Resetting the board may affect the ongoing services. in the early morning. ----End 9. 202 . The admin. the board will reset. Run the DSP BRD command to query the board information. – A DPUe board has 28 DSPs numbered from 0 to 27.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 9 Device Panel l Using MML commands 1. perform this operation with caution. user-level. If the active board resets and the standby board is running properly. Prerequisites l The boards are in position. services processed by the active board will be switched over to the standby board. the entire subrack resets.. for example. Ltd. If you reset any CPU on the SPUa or SPUb/SPUc board. and authorized custom-level users can perform this operation. click Device Maintenance.8 Switching Over BSC Boards This section describes how to switch over boards. Figure 9-4 Resetting a board l Using MML commands 1. Using menus (2) 1. 2. Right-click a board in position in the device panel or emulation panel.2 Starting the Device Panel) or start the emulation panel (see 9. operator-level. set the parameters according to actual situations. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. user-level. 2. On the LMT main page. Run the RST BRD command to reset a board.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 9 Device Panel l 1. Ltd. as shown in Figure 1. set the parameters according to actual situations. administrator-level. Start the device panel (see 9. and click Reset to reset the board.1. The Device Maintenance tab page is displayed. choose BSC Maintenance > Maintain Device > Reset BSC Board. In the Reset BSC Board dialog box. In the Reset BSC Board dialog box. On the BSC Maintenance tab page..1. 3. The Reset BSC Board dialog box is displayed. The operation result is displayed. ----End 9. and click Reset. 3. and choose Reset BSC Board from the shortcut menu.2. The admin.2 Starting the Emulation Panel). you can switch all services from the active board to the standby board to ensure the normal system operation. 203 . When the active board is faulty. Right-click a board in position in the device panel or emulation panel. and choose Switch BSC Board from the shortcut menu.2 Starting the Device Panel) or start the emulation panel (see 9. l Board switchover may affect the ongoing services. and then click Switch to switch over the boards. for example. except the OMU board. Start the device panel (see 9. set the parameters according to actual situations. you are advised to perform the switchover during off-peak hours. You can switch over a board using menus or MML commands.2 Starting the Emulation Panel). Therefore. On the BSC Maintenance tab page. Therefore.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 9 Device Panel Prerequisites l Before you perform a board switchover. 204 . in the early morning. click Device Maintenance. Context NOTICE l If the board switchover fails.. and click Switch to switch over the boards. In the Switch BSC Board dialog box. The Device Maintenance tab page is displayed. the board configuration data is not lost but services on the board will be interrupted. On the LMT main page. Using menus (2) 1.2. The Switch BSC Board dialog box is displayed. The operation result is displayed. 2. l All boards configured in active/standby mode support switchover operations. set the parameters as required. Only the active board can initiate the switchover. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ensure that the standby board is available and properly running without any critical or major alarms. Ltd. 3. choose BSC Maintenance > Maintain Device > Switch BSC Board. perform this task with caution.1. In the Switch BSC Board dialog box. 2. The OMUU board supports switchover initiated by the standby board. as shown in Figure 1. Procedure l l Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Using menus (1) 1. 3. Procedure Step 1 Start the device panel (see 9. 9. Run the SWP BRD command to switch over boards. 205 . Step 2 Right-click a board in position in the device panel or the emulation panel.2 Starting the Device Panel) or start the emulation panel (see 9. The alarm information is displayed.9 Querying the BSC Board Alarm This section describes how to query the board alarm.2 Emulation Panel Operations This section describes the operations of the BSC6900 emulation panel. The emulation panel has the same ports as those of the real subrack and helps you learn about the board port status. and how to query the board status. Prerequisites l The boards are in position.2 Starting the Emulation Panel).1. you can learn about how to start and use it.2. ----End 9.1. Ltd. ----End 9. By performing this task.2.. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1 Introduction to the Emulation Panel The LMT provides the emulation panel for each subrack.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 9 Device Panel Figure 9-5 Switching over boards l Using MML commands 1. and choose Query Board Alarm from the shortcut menu. . click Device Maintenance. Ltd. 206 . 9. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Provides right-click menus for users to query the board status and port status. l Uses the Tip window to show the information about built-in NE that occupies resources of boards marked with b. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page.2. l Uses the mark b to show which board is used by the built-in NE. as shown in Figure 9-6.2 Starting the Emulation Panel This section describes how to start the emulation panel. Figure 9-6 Emulation panel The emulation panel provides the following functions: l Displays the operating status of the device.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 9 Device Panel The emulation panel displays the operating status of the ports on each board and provides rightclick menus. The Device Maintenance tab page is displayed. showing detailed information about the E1/T1 port. ----End Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. 207 . Procedure Step 1 Start the BSC device panel (see 9. The BSC Device Panel is displayed on the right pane. Step 2 On the device panel or emulation panel. Prerequisites l You have logged in to the LMT.2. Step 3 Select the corresponding rack and double-click the peripheral of the subrack to view the emulation panel of a subrack. l The boards are in position.2.1. as shown in Figure 9-7. and choose Query E1/T1 Port Status from the shortcut menu.3 Querying the Status of an E1/T1 Port This section describes how to query the status of an E1/T1 port.2 Starting the Device Panel) or start the emulation panel (see 9. The Query E1/T1 Port Status dialog box is displayed.2 Starting the Emulation Panel). Figure 9-7 Subrack peripheral ----End 9. Ltd.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 9 Device Panel Step 2 Click BSC6900 under Device Navigation Tree. right-click the E1/T1 interface board to be queried. 2. The Device Maintenance tab page is displayed. Procedure l l Using menus (1) 1. Prerequisites l The boards are in position. You can query the CPU/DSP usage using menus or MML commands. showing the real-time CPU/DSP usage.1. Using menus (2) 1. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) On the LMT main page. and choose CPU/DSP Usage Query from the shortcut menu. Using MML commands 1. click Device Maintenance. Open the device panel (see 9. Start the BSC device panel (see 9.2 Starting the Device Panel) or open the emulation panel (see 9.2 Starting the Emulation Panel). and choose Query BSC Board Clock Status from the shortcut menu. and click Query.2. 3. 2. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 9 Device Panel 9. Procedure l l Using menus 1. The Query BSC Board Clock Status dialog box is displayed. Run the DSP CPUUSAGE command to query the CPU/DSP usage.2.2. Right-click a board in position in the device panel or emulation panel. In the Query BSC Board Clock Status dialog box. Right-click a board in position in the device panel or emulation panel.2 Starting the Device Panel) or start the emulation panel (see 9. 208 . set the parameters according to actual situations.5 Querying BSC Board Clock Status This section describes how to query the clock status of a BSC board.1. 2.2 Starting the Emulation Panel). Ltd. ----End 9. The CPU/DSP Usage window is displayed.. Context You can query the clock status of a BSC board using menus or MML commands.4 Querying the CPU/DSP Usage This section describes how to query the CPU/DSP usage of a board. Context The OMU and SAU do not support this operation. Context You can query the status of a board using menus or MML commands. Run the DSP CLK command to query the board clock status. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Prerequisites l The boards are in position. Figure 9-8 Query results of BSC Board Clock Status l Using MML commands 1.2 Starting the Device Panel) or start the emulation panel (see 9.2 Starting the Emulation Panel). choose BSC Maintenance > Maintain Device > Query BSC Board Clock Status. The query result is displayed.. ----End 9. 3.2. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Start the device panel (see 9.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 9 Device Panel 2. and click Query. On the BSC Maintenance tab page. Procedure l Using menus (1) 1. Ltd. as shown in Figure 1. set the parameters according to actual situations. The Query BSC Board Clock Status dialog box is displayed. In the Query BSC Board Clock Status dialog box.1. 209 .6 Querying the BSC Board Information This section describes how to query the status of a BSC board.2. 2. 3. The Device Maintenance tab page is displayed. Figure 9-9 Query results of board status l Using MML commands 1. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2. showing the detailed board information. The admin. ----End 9. user-level.7 Resetting a BSC Board This section describes how to reset a boardthe CPU on an SPUa/SPUb/SPUc board. Ltd. and authorized custom-level users can perform this operation. and click Query. Using menus (2) 1. In the Query BSC Board Information dialog box. On the BSC Maintenance tab page. Prerequisites l Issue 02 (2015-05-08) The boards are in position. The Query BSC Board Information dialog box is displayed. operator-level. l Right-click a board in position in the device panel or emulation panel. as shown in Figure 1. administrator-level.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 9 Device Panel 2. and the DSP on a DPU board. click Device Maintenance. On the LMT main page.. set the parameters according to actual situations. 210 . Run the DSP BRD command to query the board information. The Query BSC Board Information dialog box is displayed. The query result is displayed. choose BSC Maintenance > Maintain Device > Query BSC Board Information. and choose Query BSC Board Information from the shortcut menu. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If the active board resets and the standby board is running properly. as shown in Figure 1. l Resetting the Board Board reset is mandatory during software upgrade and software loading. the entire subrack resets. On the BSC Maintenance tab page. and choose Reset BSC Board from the shortcut menu. Start the device panel (see 9. in the early morning. Board reset will reload the programs and data files.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 9 Device Panel Context NOTICE l If the standby board is not available or is faulty. and then the standby board (the original active board) resets after the switchover. choose BSC Maintenance > Maintain Device > Reset BSC Board. services processed by the active board will be switched over to the standby board.1. Ltd. 211 . If you reset any CPU on the SPUa or SPUb/SPUc board. perform this operation with caution. l Resetting the CPU An SPUa board has four CPUs numbered from 0 to 3. the board will reset.2. – A DEUa board has 48 DSPs numbered from 0 to 47. In the Reset BSC Board dialog box..2 Starting the Device Panel) or start the emulation panel (see 9. The Device Maintenance tab page is displayed. 3. Procedure l l Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Using menus (1) 1. On the LMT main page. In the Reset BSC Board dialog box. set the parameters according to actual situations. Therefore.2 Starting the Emulation Panel). If an SCUa/SCUb board resets while its standby board is not available or is faulty. set the parameters according to actual situations. and click Reset to reset the board. Therefore. An SPUb/SPUc board has four CPUs numbered from 0 to 3. – A DPUe board has 28 DSPs numbered from 0 to 27. click Device Maintenance. l Resetting the DSP DSPs can be reset separately: – A DPUb board has 22 DSPs numbered from 0 to 21. SPUb/SPUc boards support resetting only CPU O. and click Reset. for example. you are advised to perform this operation during off-peak hours. The operation result is displayed. resetting the board will interrupt the ongoing services. 2. The Reset BSC Board dialog box is displayed. Right-click a board in position in the device panel or emulation panel. Other types of boards have one CPU each. l Resetting the board may affect the ongoing services. 2. Using menus (2) 1. 3. in the early morning. and authorized custom-level users can perform this operation. you can switch all services from the active board to the standby board to ensure the normal system operation. Prerequisites l Before you perform a board switchover. ----End 9. administrator-level. Only the active board can initiate the switchover. operator-level. Ltd. except the OMU board. for example. l All boards configured in active/standby mode support switchover operations. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The OMUU board supports switchover initiated by the standby board. Context NOTICE l If the board switchover fails. Run the RST BRD command to reset a board. 212 . The admin. perform this task with caution. the board configuration data is not lost but services on the board will be interrupted. l Board switchover may affect the ongoing services. you are advised to perform the switchover during off-peak hours.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 9 Device Panel Figure 9-10 Resetting a board l Using MML commands 1.2. Therefore. Therefore. user-level..8 Switching Over BSC Boards This section describes how to switch over boards. When the active board is faulty. ensure that the standby board is available and properly running without any critical or major alarms. Run the SWP BRD command to switch over boards. 2. as shown in Figure 1. Start the device panel (see 9. set the parameters according to actual situations. The Switch BSC Board dialog box is displayed..2 Starting the Emulation Panel).BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 9 Device Panel You can switch over a board using menus or MML commands. Using menus (2) 1. 3. set the parameters as required. The operation result is displayed. The Device Maintenance tab page is displayed. Procedure l l Using menus (1) 1. ----End 9. and then click Switch to switch over the boards. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2. On the BSC Maintenance tab page. click Device Maintenance.2.9 Querying the BSC Board Alarm This section describes how to query the board alarm. Figure 9-11 Switching over boards l Using MML commands 1. 2. choose BSC Maintenance > Maintain Device > Switch BSC Board. 213 . On the LMT main page. 3.2 Starting the Device Panel) or start the emulation panel (see 9. and choose Switch BSC Board from the shortcut menu. and click Switch to switch over the boards. In the Switch BSC Board dialog box. In the Switch BSC Board dialog box. Ltd.1. Right-click a board in position in the device panel or emulation panel. Start the emulation panel (see 9. ----End 9.2.2 Starting the Device Panel) or start the emulation panel (see 9. Using MML commands – Run the DSP ETHPORT to query the FE/GE port status of interface boards. On the emulation panel of the subrack. and choose Query Board Alarm from the shortcut menu. ----End 9. AOUa/AOUc/POUa/POUc/UOIa/ UOIc boards support this function. – Run the DSP GEPORT command to query the GE port status of SCU boards..BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 9 Device Panel Prerequisites l The boards are in position. right-click the FE/GE port to be queried.1. Prerequisites l You have logged in to the LMT.2.2 Starting the Emulation Panel). 2. Procedure l l Using menus 1. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l The boards are in position. showing the FE/GE port status.2.2. Ltd. and choose Display Ethernet Port Status from the shortcut menu.2 Starting the Emulation Panel).11 Querying the Optical Port Status This section describes how to query the optical port status. The alarm information is displayed. Context You can query the FE/GE port status using menus or MML commands.10 Querying the FE/GE Port Status This section describes how to query the FE/GE port status. Step 2 Right-click a board in position in the device panel or the emulation panel. l The boards are in position. The Display Ethernet Port Status window is displayed. Procedure Step 1 Start the device panel (see 9. Prerequisites l You have logged in to the LMT. 214 . 12 Querying the DPU DSP Status This section describes how to query the DPU DSP status. Run the DSP OPT to query the optical port status.2. l The board has been installed in a specified slot. 2. Start the emulation panel (see 9.13 Querying Alarm LED Information This section describes how to query the detailed information about alarms indicated by an alarm LED. 215 .2.. Run the DSP DSP command to query the DPU DSP status. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Using MML commands 1. The displayed Query DSP Status window shows the DSP status. Procedure l l Using menus 1.2. Start the emulation panel (see 9. ----End 9. 2. set parameters according to actual situations. Procedure l l Using menus 1. Prerequisites l Issue 02 (2015-05-08) You have logged in to the LMT. and click Submit to query the optical port status.2. right-click the required DSP.2 Starting the Emulation Panel). Ltd. In the Query Optical Port Status and Performance window. On the emulation panel. ----End 9. Using MML commands 1.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 9 Device Panel Context You can query the optical port status using menus or using MML commands. On the emulation panel. and choose Query Optical Port Status and Performance from the shortcut menu. Context You can query the DPU DSP status using menus or MML commands. and choose Query DSP Status from the shortcut menu.2 Starting the Emulation Panel). Prerequisites l You have logged in to the LMT. right-click the optical port to be queried. 2. ----End Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. showing the detailed information about alarms indicated by the alarm LED. and choose Query Alarm Indicator Info from the shortcut menu. right-click the alarm LED to be queried.2 Starting the Emulation Panel). Procedure Step 1 Start the emulation panel (see 9. 216 . Step 2 On the emulation panel.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 9 Device Panel l The boards are in position. Ltd. The Query Alarm Indicator Info window is displayed.. BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 10 FMA 10 FMA About This Chapter This function helps users handle network faults. Hierarchical Delimitation and Information Collection.. 217 . – Administrators – Operators – Users – Customers that have rights to execute the commands in command groups G2 and G9. l The following rights are required to perform the fault information collection. It includes the following functions: Fault Diagnosis. l The following figure shows the fault handling process using this assistant: Figure 10-1 Fault handling process Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. – Administrators – Customers that have rights to execute the commands in command groups G2. The fault diagnosis and hierarchical delimitation functions analyze faults only within eight hours from the fault rectification to the current time. G8. and G9. Ltd. l The following rights are required to perform the fast fault diagnosis and hierarchical delimitation. When faults cannot be identified using fault diagnosis. – Rectify the faults. – Use the information collection function to collect logs of faults that cannot be identified by the preceding two methods. This function can be used when faults occur and persist at a site and site maintenance personnel cannot directly use the counters. 218 . However. l Only one Web LMT can perform an online FMA function at a time. Ltd.1 Fault Overview Fault overview provides visualized illustration of operating status and fault information of RNC network.4 Recovery Confirmation After service recovery solutions are implemented. 10.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 10 FMA – Determine whether services are affected. thereby helping users identify the faulty NE or board. When Information Collection is executed. – Use the fault diagnosis function to identify partial of the faults. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and logs for fault analysis.3 Hierarchical Delimitation This function is used to analyze faults.5 Information Collection This function can be used to quickly and accurately collect onsite information. 10.2 Fault Diagnosis This function is used to quickly diagnose common network faults. For details. 10.. see Fault Overview. 10. – Check that services are recovered. thereby shortening the event recovery period. 10. Fault Diagnosis and Hierarchical Delimitation cannot be executed simultaneously. do not run the COL LOG command. alarms. onsite O&M engineers can view on the fault summary page the operating status of the GSM and UMTS networks to check whether a fault has been rectified. this function can be used. l This function does not support the analysis of an eGBTS. and use the offline analysis tool to analyze these faults. – Use the hierarchical delimitation function to analyze faults that cannot be fast identified. NOTE l Information Collection can be simultaneously executed with Fault Diagnosis or Hierarchical Delimitation. Table 10-1 Information that O&M engineers can obtain using the fault overview function Category Details UMTS KPI l Trends in the RRC l Trends in the CS RAB l Trends in the PS RAB l Trends in CS Erlang l Trends in PS throughput l Trends in the CS call drops l Trends in the PS call drops l Trends in paging Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. The FMA tab page is displayed. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. wait for viewing the KPI trend.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 10 FMA 10.1 Fault Overview Fault overview provides visualized illustration of operating status and fault information of RNC network. ----End Result Successful operation l The KPI trend chart is displayed in the Fault Overview window. 219 . Step 2 In the Fault Overview window.. Context This function allows field O&M engineers to quickly obtain fault information and start fault troubleshooting when a network fault occurs. click FMA. BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 10 FMA Category Details KPI trend chart l KPI and counter change trend chart that contains three curves illustrating KPI and counter changes in the latest eight hours. For example. if the measurement state was DISABLED last Wednesday and changed to ENABLED this Monday. in the same hours on the day before. If no counters are measured. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The Y-coordinate represents the counter value in units of each counter or the KPI value in percentages. Ltd. performance data generated during a sampling period is not available if the current measurement state is different from that used in the sampling period. The X-coordinate represents the measurement time (expressed in the form of HH:MM). l When fault diagnosis is used to collect performance data. 220 . and in the same hours on the same day last week. performance measurement is DISABLED. KPI trend value l Automatically displays the KPI value or counter value corresponding to a point on the KPI and counter change trend curves when you move the mouse pointer to that point. l Provides KPI filtering on the right of the fault summary interface to allow viewing the change trend of the selected KPI. only two curves illustrating KPI and counter changes in the latest eight hours of this Wednesday and in the same hours of this Tuesday are displayed on the trend chart. with the one for the KPI and counter changes in the latest eight hours of last Wednesday missing. Unsuccessful operation l Issue 02 (2015-05-08) A dialog box is displayed with the failure cause. NOTE Performance measurement has two states in short measurement periods: ENABLED and DISABLED.. respectively. decrease its priority. thereby shortening the fault recovery period. Step 4 Click Start and wait for the diagnosis report. alarm. run the SET FMATH command to set the threshold. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Procedure Step 1 Optional: Run the SET FMATH command to set the fault diagnosis threshold. increase its priority. When the CPU usage of this task is higher than the minimum threshold (10%). Step 3 Select the fault scenarios requiring fault management on the Fault Diagnosis tab page. it is recommended that you use this function to analyze the fault and then run the COL LOG command to collect logs.. NOTE When a fault occurs. this function comprehensively analyzes the counters. This function can be used when faults occur and persist at a site and site maintenance personnel cannot directly use the counters. Ltd. the operating systems schedules processes on the OMU by priority. To query the specified fault diagnosis threshold. /bam/version_x/ftp/fma_data/ FaultDiagnosis /201501010101. Step 2 On the LMT main page. click FMA. l This function is implemented on the OMU and can be used with tracing and monitoring functions on the LMT. l When the OMU CPU usage reaches 100%. 221 . It helps users perform recovery operations. NOTE A folder named by the operation date and time is generated in the bam/version_x/ftp/fma_data/ FaultDiagnosis directory each time this function is implemented. and logs for fault analysis. The FMA tab page is displayed. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Sub-Folder Description alarm_data Contains the active alarms and cleared alarms for the last 24 hours. for example. l This function is stopped when more than 95% of OMU memory is occupied and this function occupies more than 200 MB OMU memory. NOTE When the default fault diagnosis threshold is not used. When the CPU usage of this task is lower than the minimum threshold (10%). This folder contains four sub-folders which are described in the following table. and logs related to the fault and provides analysis reports to users.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 10 FMA 10. thereby helping users identify the faulty NE or board. Context According to the diagnosis rules. opt_data Contains the operation data for the last 24 hours.2 Fault Diagnosis This function is used to quickly diagnose common network faults. run the LST FMATH command. alarms. The initial priority of the fault analysis task using the fault diagnosing function is set to low. CS RAB Setup Success Rate The initial direct transmission flow control rate of CS services is abnormal. Therefore. the system deletes the earliest folder. The location update success rate is abnormal. The Iu-CS SCCP setup success rate is abnormal.. 222 . Ltd. and the corresponding 8 hours 7 days ago. you must save required historical analysis results in a timely manner. the corresponding 8 hours in the yesterday. The CS security mode success rate is abnormal. If the size exceeds 500 MB. The CS service rejection rate is abnormal. The number of successful CS RAB setups is 0. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. All historical folders are stored in the bam/version_x/ftp/fma_data/FaultDiagnosis directory. The number of RRC connection setup requests decreases significantly. stat_data Contains the performance data for the last 8 hours. Table 10-2 UMTS fault analysis scenario options Scenario Options KPI Items RRC Success Rate The number of RRC connection setup requests is 0.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 10 FMA Sub-Folder Description report Contains the analysis report generated using the fault diagnosis function. The CS service redirection rate in a multi-operator core network (MOCN) is abnormal. The RRC connection setup success rate is abnormal. The maximum size of these folders is 500 MB. The PDP context activation success rate is abnormal. The PS security mode success rate is abnormal. The number of successful PS RAB setups is 0. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The attach success rate is abnormal. Paging The paging success rate is abnormal.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 10 FMA Scenario Options Items The CS RAB setup success rate is abnormal. The PS service rejection rate is abnormal. The number of CS RAB setup requests decreases significantly.. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) PS Service Drop Rate The PS service drop rate is abnormal. The PS RAB setup success rate is abnormal. The PS service redirection rate in a multi-operator core network (MOCN) is abnormal. Ltd. PS RAB Setup Success Rate The initial direct transmission flow control rate of PS services is abnormal. 223 . CS Service Drop Rate The CS service drop rate is abnormal. The number of PS RAB setup requests decreases significantly. The Iu-PS SCCP setup success rate is abnormal. The RA update success rate is abnormal. . Ltd. The number of successful CS RAB setups of the overflow RNC is 0. The number of successful PS RAB setups of the overflow RNC is 0. The RRC connection setup success rate of the overflow RNC is abnormal. Transmission Site Break Down A large number of cells are unavailable. 224 . The CS service drop rate of the overflow RNC is abnormal. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Others Equipment health check Health check on the interface boards Health check on the userplane boards and subsystems Health check on the controlplane boards and subsystems Analysis on system configuration errors Control-plan Iu-CS and IuPS interface status check Iur-p interface status check Flow control of the board RNC in Pool Load Sharing The number of RRC connection setup requests of the overflow RNC is 0. CS Erlang The CS Erlang decreases significantly.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 10 FMA Scenario Options Traffic Items PS throughput The PS throughput decreases significantly. The CS RAB setup success rate of the overflow RNC is abnormal. Table 10-3 RNC in Pool fault analysis scenario options Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Scenari o Option s RNC in Pool Load Sharing RNC in Pool Redundancy RNC in Pool Load Sharing and Redundancy Load Sharing Type= MASTE R Load Sharing Type= OVERF LOW Host Status= MASTE R Host Status= BACK UP Load Sharing Type= MASTE R and Host Status= MASTE R Load Sharing Type= OVERF LOW and Host Status= BACK UP Load Sharing Type= OVERF LOW and Host Status= MASTE R RRC connecti on setup √ × √ × √ × √ CS service setup √ × √ × √ × √ CS call drop √ × √ × √ × √ Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 10 FMA Scenario Options Items The PS RAB setup success rate of the overflow RNC is abnormal. 225 . RNC in Pool can be used in different scenarios. The PS service drop rate of the overflow RNC is abnormal.. You can query the load sharing type by running the LST URNCBASIC command and query the host status by running the DSP UHOSTRNC command. The CS Erlang of overflow RNC decreases significantly. The PS throughput of overflow RNC decreases significantly. Ltd. The system automatically determines the application scenario based on the load sharing type. and host status. redundancy type. as shown in Table 10-3. Ltd. 226 ..BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 10 FMA Scenari o Option s RNC in Pool Load Sharing RNC in Pool Redundancy RNC in Pool Load Sharing and Redundancy Load Sharing Type= MASTE R Load Sharing Type= OVERF LOW Host Status= MASTE R Host Status= BACK UP Load Sharing Type= MASTE R and Host Status= MASTE R Load Sharing Type= OVERF LOW and Host Status= BACK UP Load Sharing Type= OVERF LOW and Host Status= MASTE R PS service setup √ × √ × √ × √ PS call drop √ × √ × √ × √ CS Erlang √ × √ × √ × √ PS throughp ut √ × √ × √ × √ Paging √ × √ × √ × √ A large number of unavaila ble cells √ × √ × √ × √ Equipme nt health check √ √ √ √ √ √ √ RNC in Pool Load Sharing √ × × × √ × × ----End Result l Successful operation – A new browser window is displayed with the fault analysis report presented on a web page. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. On the saved html page. and Iu-PS interfaces. Iur.. RNC name. click this button to save the diagnosis report as an html page. A fault diagnosis report covers the following: Table 10-5 Contents of the diagnosis report Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Item Description RNC Basic Information Containing RNC in Pool networking information and RNC basic configuration information. transmission modes over the Iub. Iu-CS. 227 . Download Source Data Download the original data of the diagnosis report that is generated by the NE. there will be no Save Report button and you can use the save function of the browser itself to save the diagnosis report. the log GUI does not provide the query or filtering function. When using the FireFox browser. Ltd. and the load-sharing type of RNC in Pool Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. such as RNC ID.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 10 FMA Table 10-4 Button Functions Button Name Description Save Report When using the IE browser. For example. if the measurement state was DISABLED during a sampling period last Wednesday and the measurement state changed to ENABLED on this Monday. 228 . and last week. If no counters are measured. performance statistics during a sampling period of eight hours cannot be obtained if the measurement states are different in a short measurement period during the sampling period and in the current short period. the Y-coordinate represents the counter value in the unit of the corresponding counter or the KPI value in percentages. Ltd.. CS Call Drop Trend. The X-coordinate represents hour:minute. l Containing the threshold used in the rules of the fault management assistant analysis. CS RAB Trend. yesterday. Iu-CS SCCP Trend. You can set the threshold value by running the MML command SET FMATH. CS Erlang Trend. PS RAB Trend. Iu-PS SCCP Trend. respectively. When the Fault Management Assistant function for rapid fault diagnosis is enabled to analyze performance statistics. PS Throughput Trend. only two curves illustrating KPI and counter changes that occurred during the same eight hours of this Tuesday and Wednesday are displayed in the KPI and counter change trend chart of this Wednesday. l Containing three curves illustrating KPI and counter changes that occurred during the eight hours of today.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 10 FMA Item Description KPI Trend l Containing KPI and alarm trend figures. Active alarms on the Iu-CS/Iu-PS/ Iur-p interface. PS Call Drop Trend. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NOTE Performance measurement has two states in short measurement periods: ENABLED and DISABLED. RNC Alarm Quantity Trend and Alarms of last 24 hours are included. performance measurement is in DISABLED state. RRC Trend. In the displayed dialog box. Ltd. l In the change trend chart. and alarms and operation logs generated at this time will be displayed. This function displays the KPI trend and associates KPI trend. and operation logs by time points so that the faults are located quickly and services are restored in a short period of time. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 229 . – KPI and counter change trend chart: A line is displayed for each KPI or counter indicating its change trend in the last 8 hours. click Solution to view the alarm handling suggestion described in the alarm reference. respectively. – Alarm log: Alarms are displayed from the earliest one. number. click a certain time. Information such as the executed MML commands. NOTE When you enter the time to query alarms: l If the entered time is the same as Alarm raised time of a single alarm in alarm logs. operating time. information about the alarm will be contained in query results. alarm report time. and the KPIs for the corresponding time will be displayed.. left Y axis. Click an alarm or an operation log. information about the first alarm generated at the time will be contained in query results. Information such as alarm ID. The X axis. and ratio. and execution results are displayed. l If the entered time is the same as Alarm raised time of multiple alarms. – Operation log: The executed MML commands are displayed from the earliest one. l If the entered time is different from Alarm raised time of all alarms in alarm logs. alarms. and right Y axis indicate the time. and location information are displayed. Double-click an alarm log to open the Detail info of alarm log dialog box. information about alarms generated at the most approximate time to the entered time will be contained in query results.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 10 FMA Item Description FMA DashBoard l The dashboard function supports association analysis and graphical user interface (GUI) display of KPI trend measured 8 hours before the rapid fault diagnosis function starts and alarms and key operation logs generated 24 hours before the rapid fault diagnosis function starts. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. status. The latest one alarm log is highlighted.. this function can be used. click Dashboard without selecting the fault scenario. alarms. Step 3 Set parameters on the Hierarchical Delimitation tab page. click Hierarchical Delimitation. see Table 1. – Query historical records of analysis reports. click FMA. 10. and operations of these objects are displayed and identified to provide a fault analysis report for users.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 10 FMA Item Description l The dashboard function has two startup modes. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page. – If the report. The Hierarchical Delimitation tab page is displayed. select the fault scenario and click Start. until the smallest identifiable objects are obtained. Context This function decomposes faults based on standard protocol layers from the KPIs of the faulty network. a dialog box indicating that the file is not found is displayed. The FMA window is displayed. l Unsuccessful operation – A dialog box is displayed with the failure cause. – In the Scenario Options dialog box.3 Hierarchical Delimitation This function is used to analyze faults. and recommend option in the fault diagnosis scenario selected by a user. The counters. Fault analysis report Includes the fault description. Operation logs of last 24 hours Running the MML command EXP LOG to export the operation log. Ltd.xml file in not stored under the bam/version_x/ftp/fma_data/ FaultDiagnosis/report directory. – In the Scenario Options dialog box. – Click the Query Result button to list the latest 200 alarm logs around the specified query time on the current page. When faults cannot be identified using fault diagnosis. diagnose result. For details about fault diagnosis scenarios. Compared with the first startup mode. 230 . Step 2 On the FMA tab page. the fault analysis report is displayed in addition to the KPI trend and FMA dashboard. click this button to save the diagnosis report as an html page. On the saved html page.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 10 FMA Step 4 Click Analyze and wait for the fault analysis report. The following table lists information in a fault analysis report.. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. the log GUI does not provide the query or filtering function. Table 10-7 Button Functions Button Name Description Save Report When using the IE browser. and click Query. History Analyze In the drop-down list. Download Source Data Download the original data of the diagnosis report that is generated by the NE. there will be no Save Report button and you can use the save function of the browser itself to save the diagnosis report. select the time of saving historical analysis reports. ----End Result l Successful operation – A new browser window is displayed with the fault analysis report presented on a web page. 231 . When using the FireFox browser. Table 10-6 GUI parameter description Parameter Description Select the KPI items Set this parameter based on the abnormal KPIs by observing the KPI trend curve. Ltd. l Cell ID: ID of the problematic cell l Failure rate: Proportion of the number of failures in a problematic cell to that in an RNC related to a specific counter l Fault counter: Proportion of the number of failures in a problematic cell to the number of attempts in this cell related to a specific counter l Attempt number: Number of attempts in this cell related to a specific counter l NodeB name: Name of the NodeB to which the problematic cell belongs l INT board: Interface board where the problematic cell is configured l Subsystem: Subsystem where the problematic cell is configured Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 10 FMA Table 10-8 Information in a fault analysis report Item Description Fault cells Cells that are affected by faults. 232 . thereby shortening the event recovery period. such as ETHPORT. – Transmission layer object. – Device layer object. For details. – Device layer object. – Device layer object. – User plane – Wireless layer object. such as Abis protocol. – Transmission layer object. 10.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 10 FMA Item Description Scenario selection The smallest identifiable objects obtained after faults are decomposed based on standard protocol layers.4 Recovery Confirmation After service recovery solutions are implemented. such as NBAP protocol. 10.5 Information Collection This function can be used to quickly and accurately collect onsite information.. such as MTP3LINK. l Unsuccessful operation – A dialog box is displayed with the failure cause. such as INT board. such as INT board. such as RANAP protocol. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.SCTPLINK and ETHPORT. l The interface between BSC and CN – Control plane – Wireless layer object. – Device layer object. and the corresponding KPI and alarm is displayed on the right. such as SCTPLINK and ETHPORT. Ltd. such as ETHPORT. such as INT board and control plane subsystem. The fault object is displayed below. – Transmission layer object. such as IUUP and GTPU. see Fault Overview. 233 . – Transmission layer object. onsite O&M engineers can view on the fault summary page the operating status of the GSM and UMTS networks to check whether a fault has been rectified. The fault object can be selected on the left. such as INT board and control plane subsystem. l The interface between BSC and BSS – Control plane – Wireless layer object. – User plane – Wireless layer object. there are various types of BSC logs. the progress bar may fail to show the progress. the information needs to be collected at the site. The Information Collection tab page is displayed. Click Collection to start collecting fault information. Procedure Step 1 Information Quick-Collection 1. it is easy to make mistakes in collecting logs. 3. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and the procedure for collecting these logs is complex.. operator-level. You can obtain the failure time point within the counter measurement period (15 minutes) after the inflection point of the abnormal KPI in the FMA main interface. The collection consists of two batches. Set parameters on the Information Quick-Collection tab page. Subrack Number of the subrack. and this status lasts for several minutes. 2. Second Progress Second batch of log files start to be collected only after the connection of the first batch completes. On the LMT main page. On the FMA tab page. In this situation. Ltd. Log files are collected in two batches so that the first logs can be viewed while the second batch is being collected for fast troubleshooting. Fault information can be collected in one-click mode. or user-level account. such as the file name. 234 . NOTE This function can be enabled only by the system administrator admin and an administrator-level. File Path Save path of log files to be collected Result Information about collected log files. Specify Failure Time and File Path. and file size. This function is introduced to simplify the procedure for collecting logs. However. save path. 4.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 10 FMA Context When faults occur. Table 10-9 GUI parameter description GUI Parameter Description Failure Time Time when a fault occurs. click FMA. The FMA window is displayed. which leads to repeated collection of logs at the site and prolongs fault troubleshooting. click Information Collection. NOTE After you click Collection. First Progress Log file collection progress. Month. even if the whole data collection is incomplete. the collected data can be obtained from the directory specified by the user. 3G CHR log file. the directory specified by the user is E:\DATA. historical alarm files (12 hours) indicates historical alarm files collected for 12 hours including the time when the fault occurs. For example. l Collecting customized information After the collection is complete. Ltd.. the first and second batches of collected data will be saved in E:\DATA \BATCH1_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS and E:\DATA \BATCH2_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS. respectively. 235 . and Second. the data collection progress can be viewed according to the progress bar and the file collection progress in the Result box.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 10 FMA l In the first batch. Each batch of data is automatically saved in a sub directory of the specified directory. l In the second batch. For example. Hour. BSC data configuration files. Data collected each time is automatically saved in a sub directory of the specified directory. Hour. NOTE The time in the brackets following the collected files indicates the time during which the files are collected in the specific fault diagnosis scenario. YYYYMMDDHHMMSS indicates the time when data collection starts. Date. respectively. data collected each time will be saved in E:\DATA\COLDAT_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS. For example. this function collects performance counter result file (6 hours). this function collects operation logs. the collected data can be obtained from the directory specified by the user. Month. Date. and the collected data can be obtained and retransmitted. ----End Result l Quickly collecting information After the collection is complete. This improves the data collection efficiency. YYYYMMDDHHMMSS indicates the time when data collection starts. the directory specified by the user is E:\DATA. Minute. and UKPI snapshot generated when the problem occurs. and Second. In this manner. historical alarm files (12 hours). respectively. The letters stand for Year. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The letters stand for Year. historical alarm files (7 days). common debug log file (15 min). call fault log files generated when the problem occurs. Minute. Such files can be generated by the CME or manually generated by operators.ecf formats can be browsed. Ltd. The system data includes configuration data. but only files in the . Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 11. Such files can be in the . back up and restore data. . alarm configuration data..txt format. and implement fast fault diagnosis.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 11 BSC Maintenance 11 BSC Maintenance About This Chapter This chapter describes how to maintain BSC equipment. 11.3 Batch Configuration This section describes how to browse and deliver batch configuration script files. and counter configuration data.ecf. 11.2 Restoring Data This section describes how to restore configuration data on the OMU.xml and . or .1 Backing Up Data This section describes how to back up system data on the OMU. 236 .xml. In the Backup Data dialog box. 2. informing the user of whether to encrypt the file before backing up it. Context l When the database system crashes or an upgrade fails.bak" is an illegal file name. The system data includes configuration data. the file is named BKPDB_#_*.161. With the latest backup data. 237 . it will be created automatically. In the Device Navigation Tree. right-click BSC and choose Backup Data from the short-cut menu. If this save path does not exist. NOTE Click Refresh to refresh backup files saved in the OMU active workspace installation directory \data\backup directory in the Backup Data dialog box. Ltd. %% +++ = .. you can recover the system. l If you need to recover only OMU configuration data.25. l Using MML commands 1. The Backup Data dialog box is displayed with information about backup files saved in the OMU active workspace installation directory\data \backup directory. and counter configuration data. On the LMT main page. ----End Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the earliest backup file is automatically deleted. 4. blank character l Backup files cannot be saved in a network path. Run the LST BKPFILE command to query data backup files saved in the OMU active workspace installation directory\data\backup directory. select a backup file and click Download to download the backup file to a local path on the LMT PC. 3. In the Backup Data dialog box. "BK2009 09 08. NOTE l A dialog box is displayed by clicking Backup Data. For example. l Using menus Procedure 1.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 11 BSC Maintenance 11. start the tool used for backing up and restoring system data in the mbsc\bam\common\services\omu_backup_linker directory. click Device Maintenance. When the number of backup files in the backup directory exceeds 30.1 Backing Up Data This section describes how to back up system data on the OMU. If you select Yes. l If the name of a backup file is not typed. The Device Maintenance tab page is displayed. click Backup to back up system data on the OMU. 2. "#" stands for the detailed version information of the working OMU and "*" stands for the current system time when the backup is performed.bak automatically.162. alarm configuration data. run the RTR DB command and select the corresponding data backup file for data recovery. for example. Here. \\10. l The following special characters are forbidden in the file name: \\ / : * ? \" < > | ( ) & $ . l No space is allowed in the file name or the saving directory. Run the BKP DB command to back up system data on the OMU. enter a password. l The default save path of backup files is OMU active workspace installation directory\data \backup. l After restoring OMU data. Under Device Navigation Tree. enter a password to restore the backup file. 238 . Run the LST BKPFILE command to query data backup files saved in the OMU active workspace installation directory\data\backup directory. ----End Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In the Restore Data dialog box. Optional: In the displayed Restore Data dialog box. On the LMT main page.2 Restoring Data This section describes how to restore configuration data on the OMU. right-click the BSC node and choose Restore Data from the short-cut menu. Procedure l Using menus 1. 4.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 11 BSC Maintenance 11. click Restore Data to restore configuration data on the OMU.ecf encrypted file is selected after you click Restore Data.. 3. Their data remains unchanged. l Alarm information and operation logs are not restored. run the RST BSC command to reset the BSC. Run the RTR DB command to restore configuration data on the OMU. l Using MML commands 1. l Versions of data backup files must be the same as the OMU version. NOTE Click Refresh to refresh backup files saved in the OMU active workspace installation directory \data\backup directory in the Restore Data dialog box. The Device Maintenance tab page is displayed. 2. Context NOTICE l Restore data with caution because data restore will overwrite OMU data. click Device Maintenance. Ltd. NOTE If an . 2. The Restore Data dialog box is displayed with information about data backup files saved in the OMU active workspace installation directory\data\backup directory. click Upload to upload a backup file on the LMT PC to the OMU. BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 11 BSC Maintenance 11. It is also used to validate configuration scripts on the NE. – Activate includes the check functions of Preactivate. The Device Maintenance tab page is displayed. The validating speed of batch configuration is the same as that of the RUN BATCHFILE command. – You can browse. and save the batch configuration files in the XML Browse area. batch configuration can validate configuration scripts in a shorter time. Procedure Step 1 On the LMT main page.txt format. 239 . Prerequisites l You have logged in to the LMT.xml and . Step 3 In the Batch Configuration dialog box.ecf file is selected. or ..3 Batch Configuration This section describes how to browse and deliver batch configuration script files. The Batch Configuration dialog box is displayed.ecf. The execution results of the batch configuration files are also displayed in this area. but only files in the . right-click BSC and choose Batch Configuration from the short-cut menu.ecf formats can be browsed. Such files can be in the . the BSC is managed independently and the MML commands from other LMT cannot be executed. Activate and Browse functions. NOTE If an . click Device Maintenance. .xml. ----End Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. enter a password to import files for batch configuration. select a batch configuration script file. Ltd. l Batch configuration is based on the functions of the CME script executor and aims at quickly validating and browsing patch configuration files. This helps users rectify script problems in advance and prevents activation failures. l Compared with batch processing. l During batch configuration. Such files can be generated by the CME or manually generated by operators. l The LMT properly communicates with the BSC. Step 2 In the Device Navigation Tree. Context – Preactivate is used to check whether the data in the configuration scripts is valid and whether the data conflicts with that on the live network before data activation. Step 4 Click Activate or Preactivate and wait until the configuration command takes effect on the BSC. modify. l Batch configuration includes the Preactivate. – The execution results of the batch configuration files are displayed in the message area. 240 . l Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Failed operation: The failure cause is displayed in the message area. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 11 BSC Maintenance Result l Successful operation: – The progress of the activation and pre-activation related commands are displayed in the progress bar.. Ltd. Ltd.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ 12 FAQ About This Chapter This chapter describes some frequently asked questions (FAQs) and the corresponding solutions. 12. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3 Other FAQs This section describes common problems.. 241 . 12.2 Java-related FAQs This section describes Java-related common problems that hinder the normal use of the LMT and corresponding handling procedures.or browser setting-related problems. that hinder the normal use of the LMT and corresponding handling procedures.1 Browser-related FAQs This section describes browser setting-related common problems that hinder the normal use of the LMT and corresponding handling procedures. except Java. 12. Step 4 In the Internet Options dialog box. check whether the add-on extension Live Margins is installed.1. In this case. check the color settings of the browser. or the background color of the LMT is not differentiated from that of the IE browser. it takes about 30 seconds to maximize the window of a trace task in the Trace tab page.1. JavaScript and Applet cannot be run. For example. In this case. ----End 12. The message "Restart Firefox to complete your changes" is prompted. ----End 12. Step 2 In the Extensions tab page.1 Browser-related FAQs This section describes browser setting-related common problems that hinder the normal use of the LMT and corresponding handling procedures.1 Slow Responses in the Firefox Browser Running in the Firefox browser. Step 3 Click Restart Firefox to validate the changes. The Internet Options dialog box is displayed. Ltd. check the settings related to the protected mode of the browser.3 Verification Code Cannot Be Displayed on the LMT Login Page The verification code cannot be displayed when you try to log in to the LMT using an Internet Explorer (IE) browser in Windows Server 2008 or Windows Vista. For example. and then click OK. 242 . Procedure Step 1 Start the Firefox. click Accessibility.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ 12. Step 2 On the General tab page. and click Disable. The Add-ons window is displayed. Context If the protected mode is enabled for the IE browser in Windows Server 2008 or Windows Vista. the LMT gives slow responses. select Live Margins. The Accessibility dialog box is displayed. 12.1. Procedure Step 1 Choose Tool > Internet Options on the tool bar of the IE browser. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 3 In the Formatting area. When this problem occurs. the colors are not properly displayed. the colors indicating the status of the boards and alarms are not displayed.2 LMT Colors Cannot Be Displayed When the LMT is started in the IE browser. many security restrictions are imposed.. click OK to exit the dialog box. For example. choose Tool > Add-ons. deselect Ignore colors specified on Web pages. select Display all websites in Compatibility View. Permission Denied or Access Denied.. In this case. or click Go next to the address bar to display the login window of the BSC6900. In the displayed Compatibility View Settings dialog box. when you click the menu bar or buttons or right-click the web page. set the proxy server when necessary. click OK to exit the dialog box. The external virtual IP address of the OMU is added to the Trusted sites list. Click Sites. Step 7 In the Internet Options dialog box. Before you log in to the LMT. l If yes. go to Step 3. The Internet Options dialog box is displayed. there is no response or a dialog box is displayed. If IE9 is used. Ltd. in addition to the previous settings. Step 3 Choose Tool > Internet Options on the tool bar of the IE browser. The Trusted sites dialog box is displayed. Step 6 Type the external virtual IP address of the OMU in the Add this website to the zone text box. Context Do not modify the settings of the browser when you have logged in to the LMT. l If no. Step 4 On the Security tab page. indicating a script error. 243 . Step 2 Check whether "Internet | Protected Mode: Off" is displayed in the bottom right corner of the window.4 No Response When Clicking the Menu Bar on the LMT When you browse the LMT web page. and then click Add. select Trusted sites in the Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings area. add the IP address of the U2000 to the Trusted sites list. NOTE Restart the browser to validate the modifications. you must disable the protected mode. for example. NOTE If the U2000 proxy server is used for the login to the LMT. there is no response or a script error dialog box is displayed. Step 5 Clear Enable Protected Mode in the Security level for this zone area. the LMT web page cannot be displayed. choose Tools > Compatibility View Settings. check the proxy settings in the browser. Procedure Step 1 Enter the external virtual IP address of the OMU in the address box of the IE browser. Press Enter on the keyboard.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Therefore. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. To be specific. ----End 12. Otherwise.1. the task is complete. On the Network tab page. including the setting of the browser proxy server and the HTTP 1. The Options dialog box is displayed. click Settings. select Use a proxy server for your LAN (These settings will not apply to dial-up or VPN connections). In the Exceptions area. We therefore recommend setting the browser using the script. Choose Tools > Options on the tool bar of the Firefox browser. 2. Ltd. 4. click Advanced. The following procedure uses Internet Explorer (IE) as an example. select Manual proxy configuration. type the external virtual IP address of the OMU in the text box. If either setting is wrong. In the Connection Settings dialog box. The Internet Options dialog box is displayed. Then select Use this proxy server for all protocols. Firefox 1. On the Connections tab page. the script automatically sets the browser. In the No Proxy for area. The Local Area Network (LAN) Settings dialog box is displayed. With the script. 3. ----End 12. check the browser settings. each time the user visits the server.1. In the Options dialog box. click LAN Settings. Context You can set the browser under Citrix farm networking in the following ways: l Script setting: An automatic setting script is placed on the domain control server. The proxy server of the browser therefore may need to be set again and again. When these problems occur. or initialization of the MML navigation tree may fail. 2. l Manual setting: The browser is set manually. type the OMU external virtual IP address and click OK. 3. Close the Internet Options dialog box.5 How to Set the Browser Under Citrix Farm Networking Under Citrix farm networking.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Procedure l l IE 1. automatic setting of the browser is performed. and then click Advanced. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The Proxy settings dialog box is displayed. 4. when you use the U2000 proxy server to log in to the LMT on a Citrix client. In the Proxy server area. Type the IP address and port number of the proxy server in the corresponding text boxes. the server in use may vary. the primary Citrix server and secondary Citrix servers work in cooperation to achieve load balancing. When a Citrix user logs in to the Citrix server on a Citrix client.1 setting. The Citrix server works in the farm mode. Choose Tool > Internet Options on the tool bar of the IE browser. and then click OK. The Connection Settings dialog box is displayed. 244 . Type server address and port number in the HTTP proxy area. reset it. After a Citrix user logs in to the server. the verification code may be unavailable. Then close the Options dialog box.. In farm mode. the LMT may be suspended. citrixtest. NOTE The default installation path on the domain control server is C:\WINDOWS\SYSVOL\sysvol \citrixtest.121. 245 .. @echo off setlocal ENABLEDELAYEDEXPANSION set uu="HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion \Internet Settings" reg add %uu% /v EnableHttp1_1 /t REG_DWORD /d "1" /f >nul reg add %uu% /v ProxyHttp1.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Procedure l Script Setting 1. Prepare a script. 2. The actual domain name may be different.49.121. as shown in Figure 12-1. 3.213:80" /f >nul reg add %uu% /v ProxyOverride /t REG_SZ /d "<local>" /f >nul reg add %uu% /v ProxyEnable /t REG_DWORD /d "1" /f >nul NOTE The IE-unset. The path changes if you install the file elsewhere. Start Active Directory Users and Computer and double-click hongtest in the left-side pane.bat file in the C:\WINDOWS\SYSVOL\sysvol \citrixtest. Apply the script to the domain user. For details about how to create a domain user.bat script file implements automatic setting of the browser for the domain user. In the right-side pane. all users in the hongtest unit are displayed.bat. Assume that there is a user named hong01 in the hongtest unit of the citrixtest.com domain.1 /t REG_DWORD /d "1" /f >nul setlocal ENABLEDELAYEDEXPANSION set uu="HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion \Internet Settings" reg add %uu% /v ProxyServer /t REG_SZ /d "10. a. 4.213:80 in reg add %uu% /v ProxyServer /t REG_SZ /d "10. refer to the Citrix Access Solution User Guide.com is an example of the domain name. Ltd.213:80" /f >nul in the script to the actual IP address of the proxy server and the actual port number. Here. The domain user can change 10. Log in to the primary or a secondary domain control server with the user name of administrator and place the IE-unset.49. Type the following script content in a notepad and save it as IE-unset.com\scripts.49. Figure 12-1 Active Directory Users and Computers Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.121.com\scripts path on the server. right-click hong01.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ b. Figure 12-3 shows the window.. click the Profile tab. and then click OK. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) In the hong01 Properties dialog box. The hong01 Properties dialog box shown in Figure 12-2 is displayed. Figure 12-2 Displayed hong01 Properties dialog box c. 246 .bat in Logon script. In the right-side pane. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. click Apply. Ltd. Type IE-unset. click Apply. On the Advanced tab page. Choose Tools > Internet Options on the tool bar of the IE. 247 . On the Connections tab page. Ltd. The Local Area Network (LAN) Settings dialog box is displayed. c. click LAN Settings. Choose Tools > Internet Options on the tool bar of the IE. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Check the proxy server setting of the browser. b. Set Address of the proxy server to the IP address of the U2000 and Port to 80. b. The Internet Options dialog box is displayed.. Figure 12-4 shows the window. a. a. The Internet Options dialog box is displayed. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2.1 through proxy connections under HTTP 1.1 settings of the browser. select Use a proxy server for your LAN (These settings will not apply to dial-up or VPN connections). select Use HTTP 1. Check HTTP 1.1 settings.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Figure 12-3 Applying the script in the hong01 Properties dialog box l Manual Setting 1. In the Proxy server area. and then click OK. Ltd..BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Figure 12-4 HTTP 1. the following web page will be displayed for your wanted page is out of the trusted site list.6 Unable to Log In To LMT Because IE Default Security Level Is Too High In a Windows Server operating system (including Windows Server 2003 and Windows Server 2008). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the IE blocks Web programs of sites that are out of the trusted site list to improve system security.1. you may fail to log in to the LMT. As a result.1 settings ----End 12. Context l Issue 02 (2015-05-08) When you try to log in to the LMT by entering the IP address in the IE address bar. 248 . Therefore. you may fail to log in to the LMT. bat. Prepare a script.149.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ l According to the acceptable IE security level.141. – Script setting for a single Windows server Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.193" /f >nul in the script to the IP address of the network element or the peer IP address of the network elements that need to be visited.193 in reg add %uu% /v :Range REG_SZ /d "10.141. Internet Explorer Enhanced Security Configuration. 2. Procedure l Setting a configuration startup script 1.bat script file implements automatic setting of IE trusted sites for Citrix domain users. Load the startup script. 249 .1 /t REG_DWORD /d "1" /f >nul setlocal ENABLEDELAYEDEXPANSION set uu="HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion \Internet Settings\ZoneMap\EscRanges\Trust" reg add %uu% /v :Range /t REG_SZ /d "10. there are the following two solutions: – When lowering the IE security level on the Windows server is unacceptable. @echo off setlocal ENABLEDELAYEDEXPANSION set uu="HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion \Internet Settings" reg add %uu% /v EnableHttp1_1 /t REG_DWORD /d "1" /f >nul reg add %uu% /v ProxyHttp1. you can add the LMT site to the trusted sites of the IE by using a configuration startup script. Ltd. Type the following script content in a notepad and save it as IE-unset.149. l The domain user can change 10. – When lowering the IE security level on the Windows server is acceptable.141. multi-scripts need to be prepared and loaded separately.193" /f >nul reg add %uu% /v http /t REG_DWORD /d "2" /f >nul NOTE l The IE-unset.. The system automatically loads the script and configures the IE after a Citrix user logs in.149. l Trust in "HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Internet Settings\ZoneMap\EscRanges\Trust" can be named as you wish. you can remove the Windows component. l If the user needs to set multi-network elements and the network elements don't exist in a same peer IP address. choose User Configuration > Windows Settings > Scripts(Logon/Logoff). Click Show Files and copy the prepared script to the displayed directory. The Group Policy Object Editor dialog box is displayed. c. Figure 12-5 Script d. Type gpedit.msc in the displayed dialog box. b. 250 . Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Log in to the Windows server with the account of administrator. Then click OK. Ltd. In the Group Policy Object Editor dialog box shown in Figure 12-5. Choose Start > Run. The Logon Properties dialog box is displayed. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Double-click Logon. Then close the dialog box displaying the directory. as shown in Figure 12-6.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ a.. Click Add in the dialog box. as shown in Figure 12-7. Ltd. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Figure 12-7 Adding a script f. 251 . click Browse to select the prepared script and click OK.. The Add a Script dialog box is displayed.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Figure 12-6 Logon Properties e. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) In the Adding a script dialog box. Then close the dialog box. choose User Configuration > Windows Settings > Scripts(Logon/Logoff). Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Double-click Logon. NOTE l If the organization unit has been set. Click Show Files and copy the prepared script to the displayed directory. NOTE The users need to log in to the Citrix client to validate the configuration in the single Citrix network. Figure 12-8 Script c. In the Logon Properties dialog box.. Log in to the primary or secondary Citrix domain control server with the account of administrator. l You can rename the group policy object. 252 . – Script setting in a Citrix Farm network a. The Logon Properties dialog box is displayed. Restart the IE to validate the configuration. Select an organization unit and then right-click Properties. Select the created group policy object and click Edit. click Apply and confirm to load the prepared script.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ g. b. Ltd. the users which belong to the organization unit can all succeed in logging in to the LMT. In the displayed dialog box shown in Figure 12-8. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. h. Then close the dialog box displaying the directory. Click the Group Policy tab page in the displayed dialog box and click New to create a group policy object. Choose Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Active Directory Users and Computer. as shown in Figure 12-9. Then close the dialog box. as shown in Figure 12-10. Ltd.. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Click Browse to select the prepared script and click OK. click Add. 253 .BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Figure 12-9 Logon d. In the Logon Properties dialog box. Figure 12-10 Adding a script e. The Add a Script dialog box is displayed. l In the Logon Properties dialog box.. click Apply and confirm to load the prepared script. click Details. 254 . Select Internet Explorer Enhanced Security Configuration in the displayed dialog box shown in Figure 12-11. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) In the Windows Components Wizard dialog box. Removing Internet Explorer Enhanced Security Configuration 1. Choose Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ f. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. as shown in Figure 12-12. Ltd. and deselect For administrator groups and For all other user groups. Figure 12-11 Windows components wizard 2. Log in to the Windows server with the account of administrator. Click OK and then click Next to remove Internet Explorer Enhanced Security Configuration. 4.. To solve the problem. Ltd. ----End 12. an error message displays when they are downloading or installing a Java or Flash plug-in. click Finish.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Figure 12-12 Internet Explorer Enhanced Security Configuration 3. 255 . Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Restart the IE to validate the configuration. Context SmartScreen Filter is a new function of IE8 and later versions. After the removal is complete. disable SmartScreen Filter of IE8. In addition.1. SmartScreen Filter causes an error message to be displayed when users are downloading the Java or Flash plug-in during login to the LMT. two file manager windows displays after clicking File Manager.7 Unable to Download or Install the Java or Flash Plug-in and Two File Manager Windows Displayed Windows IE8 or Any Later Version Is Used If users log in to the LMT in IE8 or later versions. or two file manager windows are displayed. It prevents users from visiting phishing websites and prevents plug-ins from being installed automatically. is entered in the Address bar of the browser. To correct this error. Figure 12-13 Dialog box showing "There is a problem with this website's security certificate" (IE7 or later versions) Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.141. In such a scenario. the There is a problem with this website's security certificate dialog box or Security Alert dialog box is displayed. 256 . as shown in Figure 12-13 and Figure 12-14.. This section describes how to correct the error Certificate Invalid displayed during a login to the LMT through HTTPS.8 The Error "Certificate Invalid" Is Displayed During an HTTPS Login The LMT certificate and the certificate used to access the LMT through the U2000 proxy with dual IP addresses are not granted by any commercial organization. they are not trusted by a browser such as IE by default. Step 2 In the displayed Microsoft SmartScreen Filter dialog box. This error does not impair the LMT functions. If the organization for issuing the current certificate is not in the default trust list of Microsoft. Context l Using an IE browser 1. for example. Ltd. ----End 12. choose Safety > SmartScreen Filter > Turn Off SmartScreen Filter.219.115. select Turn off SmartScreen Filter and click OK to turn off the SmartScreen filter.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Procedure Step 1 On the menu bar of the IE browser. https:// 10. Therefore. After https://the external virtual IP address of the OMU. the SSL certificate negotiation is performed when you visit the LMT in HTTPS mode. the Certificate Invalid error is displayed on the browser. add the root certificate of the certificate in use to the Trusted Root Certification Authorities list.1. Click Continue to this webpage(not recommended) in the There is a problem with this website's security certificate dialog box or Yes in the Security Alert dialog box to enter the LMT login page. 3. the This Connection is Untrusted dialog box. The dialog box varies with browser versions but has the same information. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) After https://the external virtual IP address of the OMU.0 as an example.) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.141. as shown in Figure 12-15.219. the Certificate Invalid dialog box is shown. After clicking Certificate Error. https:// 10. Ltd. 257 . Using a Firefox browser 1.115. is entered in the Address bar of the browser. In the Address bar of the browser.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Figure 12-14 Dialog box showing "Security Alert"(IE6) l 2.. for example. (The following figure uses Firefox3. the Certificate Error message is shown. Ltd. click View certificates to view the current certificate. as shown in Figure 12-16. perform the following steps: Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If the certificate displays Issued to: MBSC Certificate and Issued by: Huawei Wireless Network Product CA.. After connecting through the U2000 with both IP addresses. the Certificate Invalid dialog box is shown. Procedure Step 1 Using an IE browser In the Certificate Invalid dialog box.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Figure 12-15 Dialog box showing "This Connection is Untrusted" l Connection Through the U2000 1. 258 . zip file is saved.. Decompress the ca. Ltd. On the login interface.zip file is decompressed into two files: ne. 259 . Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Figure 12-16 MBSC Certificate 1. The ne. After the download is complete.cer. the ca. click Save.cer file is the root certificate of Huawei certificate predefined for the LMT and the oss. NOTE The ca.zip file. click Download CA Certificate. 2. In the displayed dialog box.cer and oss.cer file is the root certificate predefined for the U2000 proxy server. Repeat steps 3 to 6 to import the oss. If the certificate displays Issued to: server and Issued by: hwca. 5.cer. 6. Step 2 Using an IE browser In the Certificate Invalid dialog box.cer or oss. 7. 4. Click Next. Double-click ne. 260 .cer file.. then click Finish and confirm that the ne. A Select Certificate Store dialog box is displayed. choose the Place all certificates in the following store option button. Click Install Certificate. as shown in Figure 12-17. perform the following steps: Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ 3. Choose Trusted Root Certification Authorities and click OK. click View certificates to view the current certificate. then a Certificates dialog box is displayed. and click Browse. Click Next. Ltd.cer file has been imported. then a Certificate Import Wizard dialog box is displayed. . 261 . Ltd.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Figure 12-17 Server Certificate 1. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Click Install Certificate and Next. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. A dialog box shown in Figure 12-18 is displayed. Then click Next. The Add Security Exception dialog box is displayed. select Place all certificates in the following store and click Browse. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. select Trusted Root Certification Authorities and click OK. import the root certificate of the current certificate. In the Certificate Import Wizard dialog box. Step 4 Using a Firefox browser 1.. as shown in Figure 12-19. Choose Trusted Root Certification Authorities and click Next to import the certificate file. and OK. 2. In the menu of the IE browser. the Certificate Import Wizard dialog box is displayed. click Next. 262 . In the displayed Certificate Import Wizard dialog box. Step 3 Using an IE browser In the Certificate Invalid dialog box. Perform the following steps: 1. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Click Add Exception shown in Figure 12-15. Restart the browser to make the reconfiguration takes effect. choose Tools > Internet Options > Content tab and click Certificate on this tab page. the Certificate dialog box is displayed. Obtain the root certificate from the organization issuing the current certificate. Restart the browser so that the reconfiguration can take effect. 3. Finish. and then click Browse. click View certificates. 5. 4. click Next to import the certificate file. If the displayed information about the current certificate is different from the information in the preceding conditions. choose Place all certificates in the following store.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Figure 12-18 Certificate Import Wizard dialog box 2. In the Certificates > Personal tab. In the displayed dialog box. and click Import on this tab page. 4. 3. Ltd. In the Certificate Import Wizard dialog box. Restart the browser to make the reconfiguration takes effect.. Click Confirm Security Exception. Ltd. 3.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Figure 12-19 Add Security Exception dialog box 2. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. no security error will be displayed during a login to the LMT using Firefox. Step 5 Connection Through the U2000 The certification path of the U2000 is shown as Figure 12-20. After the website is added as a security exception. 263 . Click Finish. 264 . Then choose Place all Certificates in the following store. Choose General > Install Certificate in the Certificate dialog box. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the Completing the Certificate Import Wizard dialog box is displayed. 5.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Figure 12-20 Certification Path of the U2000 1. the Security Warning dialog box is displayed. Click Browse. Click OK.. 2. 4. Click Next in the Certificate Import Wizard dialog box and Certificate Store dialog box is displayed. Ltd. the Select Certificate Store dialog box is displayed. 3. And Certificate Import Wizard dialog box is displayed. Then choose Trusted Root Certification Authorities. BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ 6. Context 1.1. as shown in Figure 12-21 and Figure 12-22. Restart the browser to make the reconfiguration takes effect. ----End 12. To correct this error. Therefore. Ltd.115. Figure 12-21 Dialog box showing "There is a problem with this website's security certificate"(IE7 or later versions) Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. https:// 10. 265 . Choose Yes in the Security Warning dialog box. This error does not impair the LMT functions. Enter https://the external virtual IP address of the OMU. The import was successful message is displayed. 7. the Mismatched Address error is displayed on the browser during an HTTPS login. The There is a problem with this website's security certificate or Security Alert dialog box is displayed. Then click OK. in the Address bar of the browser.. deselect the Warn about certificate address mismatch* option.141.219. for example. This section describes how to correct the error "Mismatched Address" displayed during a login to the LMT through HTTPS.9 The Error 'Mismatched Address' Is Displayed During an HTTPS Login A user uses an IP address rather than a domain name to access the LMT. Click the Advanced tab in the displayed dialog box shown in Figure 12-23. an Certificate Error message is shown. 3. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Click Certificate Error. 266 . Click Continue to this webpage(not recommended) in the There is a problem with this website's security certificate dialog box or Yes in the Security Alert dialog box to enter the LMT login page..BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Figure 12-22 Dialog box showing "Security Alert"(IE6) 2. Procedure Step 1 Choose Tools > Internet Options on the Menu bar of the browser. In the Address bar of the browser. The Mismatched Address error dialog box is displayed. ----End 12. check that Do not save encrypted pages to disk is cleared. Therefore. deselect Warn about certificate address mismatch* and click OK.1. perform the following operations: Procedure l Issue 02 (2015-05-08) If you use HTTPS to log in to the LMT. Ltd. 267 . NOTE The reconfiguration takes effect after the browser is restarted. clear this option as follows: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.10 File Manager Functions are Improperly When the file manager functions improperly or cannot be used. Selecting this security option causes the file manager to be unavailable..BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Figure 12-23 Internet Options dialog box Step 2 In the Internet Options dialog box. Select Keep temporary files on my computer shown in Figure 12-25. If they are not. 2. The Java Control Panel dialog box is displayed. the file manager functions improperly. and clear Do not save encrypted pages to disk. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Figure 12-24 shows the dialog box. Ltd. click the Advanced tab. The Temporary Files Settings dialog box is displayed. Figure 12-24 Internet Options dialog box l Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Check that temporary Java files are saved on the computer. Perform the following operations: 1. In the displayed Java Control Panel dialog box. Open the Internet Options dialog box. click Setting. 268 .. Open Control Panel in the Windows operating system and double-click Java.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ 1. deselect Use a proxy server for your LAN(These settings will not apply to dial-up or VPN connections) and Bypass proxy server for local addresses. 3. Using FireFox browser l 1. Ltd. choose Connections > LAN settings. Using IE browser 1. If there are invalid characters. In the displayed Internet Options dialog box. Click OK. check whether the file names or folder names under the /mbsc directory contain invalid characters. 269 . The Internet Options dialog box is displayed. Choose Options > Advanced > Network > Settings. In the bottom left corner of the IE browser. Click OK. In the displayed Connection Settings dialog box. 3. a yellow error icon is Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The setting is complete. eliminate the setting. 2. 2.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Figure 12-25 Temporary Files Settings dialog box l Check whether the browser agency has been set. ----End 12.1. rename the files or folders. If the file manager fails to be opened and the message Fail to parse response is displayed. Choose Tools > Internet Options.11 Message 'Class doesn't support Automation' Displayed in an IE Browser After clicking Login in an Internet Explorer (IE) browser. In the displayed Local Area Network(LAN) Settings dialog box.. If yes. 4. select No proxy. you find a blank window displayed and login unable to continue. The Connection Settings dialog box is displayed. The setting is complete. After successfully logging in to the first LMT. This is because all browser windows opened by the same user share the same session under the session sharing mechanism of IE8 or IE9 and Firefox enabled by default. As a result. the user logs in to the second LMT of the NE. the system determines a repeated login of the same user session. Context To enhance system security.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ displayed. register the following components again: – msscript. perform the following steps: Context l This problem occurs because some registration components are missing from the IE browser. This is because the previous session information remains valid due to an abnormal exit from LMT. To register the other components again. 270 . the client browser uses Cookie to store the session information of users who have successfully logged in.dll – vbscript.dll Procedure Step 1 In Windows. choose StartRun and enter RegSvr32 msscript. when the user attempts to repeatedly log in to the LMTs of the same NE.dll – urlmon.ocx. the user desires to log in to multiple LMTs. Ltd. l Problem 2: The LMT interface displays the error "this user session already exists". Solve the problem by using the method described in the procedure part.. replace the typed component in italics. As a result. and the interface displays "this user session already exists". the user encounters the following problems when using LMT: l Problem 1: For the same NE. while the user has not carried out the operation described in Problem 1. this problem does not arise. Step 3 Log in to the LMT again.ocx – dispex. This problem arises when the browser automatically recovers from breaking down during Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Due to the session Cookie mechanism. For the IE6/7 browser in which each browser window uses independent sessions. the LMT determines a repeated login attempt when the same user tries to login to the LMT. The icon says "Class doesn't support Automation".dll – scrrun. clear the cache memory of the IE browser. ----End 12. To solve the problem.12 Error Message"This user session already exists" Upon Login to LMT The interface displays an error message "This user session already exists" upon login to LMT. To solve this problem.1. Step 2 After registering all the components again. ----End 12. click File > New Session.. Procedure l For Problem 1. perform the following steps. Click Advanced.1. ----End 12. Context The grids in the tables are not clear in MML online help. or when the pop-up LMT window is blocked by the browser pop-up blocker enabled. The IE6/7 browser user needs to close the browser window of the current LMT login interface. NOTE This method applies only to the IE8 or IE9 browser. 271 . and then choose Tools > Internet Options from the menu bar. the following method is used: 1. To solve the problem. the following method is used: 1. Restart the browser and log in to LMT. Step 2 Restart the browser and log in to LMT again. 2. If the pop-up blocker is enabled for the browser. l For Problem 2. and uncheck Automatic Recovery from Page Layout Error. disable it. the "are you sure you want to quit the page?" dialog box is displayed when the alarm feature is enabled. Ltd. The Internet Options dialog box is displayed. Solve the problem by using the method described in the procedure part. 3.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ use of the LMT. to start a new IE browser window and log in to the LMT. and the IE8/9 and Firefox users need to close all opened browser windows to invalidate the old sessions.1. as shown in Figure 12-26. not Firefox. Procedure Step 1 Open the Internet Explorer.14 Unclear Grids in the Tables in the MML Online Help The grids in the tables are not clear in MML online help when users log in to the LMT by some computers. In the menu bar of the IE browser. Users of the Firefox browser can log in to only one LMT of a single NE.13 The "Are You Sure You Want to Quit the Page" Dialog Box Is Displayed After successful login to the LMT in the IE8 or IE9 browser. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ----End 12. disable the App Center on the Add-ons Manager page.1. Ltd. In this case. The App Center will be disabled if you restart Firebox message is displayed. a Permission Denied or Access Denied message is displayed. choose Tools > Compatibility View Settings. Step 2 On the Extensions tab page. locate App Center and click Disable.. Step 3 Click Restart now. The problem is solved. ----End 12.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Figure 12-26 Unclear Grids in the Tables in the MML Online Help Procedure Step 1 In the menu of the IE browser. The Add-ons Manager page is displayed. the App Center web page is automatically displayed. if you press F1 or click FTP Tool on the LMT web page. Step 2 Restart the browser and log in to the LMT to check the MML online help.1. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In the displayed Compatibility View Settings dialog box. The settings will take effect after the restart.15 The "App Center" Web Page Is Automatically Displayed When Firefox Is Used to Browse the LMT When you use Firefox to browse the LMT. choose Tools > Add-ons. 272 . Procedure Step 1 On the Firefox browser.16 "Permission Denied" or "Access Denied" is Displayed When IE Is Used to Browse the LMT When you log in to the LMT through IE. select Display all websites in Compatibility View. . If Automatic configuration is enabled. Figure 12-27 Error message in IE Double-click the error message. such as the settings of the proxy. Context The causes are as follows: l The IE settings are modified when you log in to the LMT through IE. 273 . some uniform resource locators (URLs) will be allocated to other security domains. as shown in Figure 2. as shown in Figure 1.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Prerequisites The LMT cannot be visited due to errors in IE. access failures occur. An error message is displayed in the status bar. As a result. l Automatic configuration in the Local Area Network (LAN) Settings dialog box is enabled. Figure 12-28 Automatic configuration enabled Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In this case. the access rights to the LMT page files are changed. A Permission Denied or Access Denied message is displayed. Ltd. Different security domains have different restrictions on access rights. leading to access failures. ----End 12. l Method 2: Log out of the LMT when the Permission Denied or Access Denied message is displayed. the system displays a Please check the MML macro configure file! message when an MML command is executed. Step 3 In the Delete Browsing History dialog box. The Temporary Internet Files and History Settings dialog box is displayed. or there is no response after tracing tasks are created.. you need to manually remove cache files and cookies. 274 .17 MML Command Failed to Be Executed or No Response to Tracing Tasks After the Browser Is Upgraded to IE8 After the browser is upgraded from IE6 to IE8. choose Tool > Internet Options. To solve this problem. The Delete Browsing History dialog box is displayed. Step 4 Select Cookies and Temporary Internet files. Figure 12-29 System message "Please check the MML macro configure file!" l There is no response after tracing tasks are created. Step 5 Click the General tab and click Setting in Browsing history.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Procedure l Method 1: Don't modify IE settings when you log in to the LMT through IE. Context l When MML commands are executed. Restart IE and log in to the LMT again. Procedure Step 1 On the menu bar of the IE browser. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the system displays a Please check the MML macro configure file! message. Step 2 Click General > Browsing history and click Delete. as shown in Figure 12-29. As a result. deselect the Preserve Favorites website data. some cache files cannot be removed. Ltd. The Internet Options dialog box is displayed.1. and then click Delete and close the Delete Browsing History dialog box. select the Cache. To delete the cookies. do not take effect. perform the following steps: Procedure Step 1 To clear the cache and cookies in the browser. 2.1. To solve this problem. 275 . In the Delete Browsing History dialog box.18 Settings on the LMT Failing to Take Effective After a successful login to the LMT. In the displayed Clear Private Data dialog box. 3. and Offline Website Datacheck boxes. On the General tab page. The Internet Options dialog box is displayed. The Delete Browsing History dialog box is displayed. such as system settings. Browser Type Handling Procedure Firefox 1. Internet Explorer 7 1. ----End 12. click OK and close the Internet Options dialog box. and choose Tools > Internet Options from the menu bar. and click Clear Private Data Now.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Step 6 Click View files in the Temporary Internet Files and History Settings dialog box.. Ltd. perform the steps shown in the following table. the previous settings. and close the Internet Options dialog box. 2. Open the Firefox browser. Open the Internet Explorer. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. click Delete Files and then click OK in the displayed dialog box. click Delete. To delete the files. Cookies. click Delete Cookies and then click OK in the displayed dialog box. and choose Tools > Clear Private Data from the menu bar. remove all displayed files. 4. On the General tab page. To solve the problem. 3. The Internet Options dialog box is displayed. clear Turn on Pop-up Blocker in the Pop-up Blocker pane. The Options dialog box is displayed. 2. Click OK. click Delete. Choose Tool > Options on the tool bar of the FireFox browser. The Delete Browsing History dialog box is displayed. ----End 12. perform the following operations. and choose Tools > Internet Options from the menu bar.19 LMT Login Window Being Stopped by the Browser The LMT login window is stopped by the browse. and the login stills fails even though the user selects Allow popups. 276 . On the Content tab page. Ltd. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Close the browser and log in to the LMT again. perform the following steps: Procedure l l IE browser 1. Or.1.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Browser Type Handling Procedure Internet Explorer 8 or 9 1. ----End 12. The Internet Options dialog box is displayed. 3. 2. select Turn on Pop-up Blocker.. Close the browser and log in to the LMT again. click Delete and close the Internet Options dialog box. Choose Tool > Internet Options on the tool bar of the IE browser. Clear the Preserve Favorites website data check box and select the Cookies and Temporary Internet files check boxes. When the preceding problem occurs. 2.1. 3. On the Privacy tab page. clear Block popup windows. Or. Click OK.20 The LMT login page of a host NE or built-in NE fails to be opened If a user visits the LMT through a browser. the LMT login page is being loaded for a long period of time after the user clicks the icon of the host NE or built-in NE. Open the Internet Explorer. select Turn on Pop-up Blocker. and click Exceptions to add allowed websites. Then. FireFox browser 1. and click Settings to add allowed websites. click Delete. Ltd. The Internet Options dialog box is displayed. Internet Explorer 8 or 9 1. 277 . The operations take effect after the browser restarts. 3. Cookies. 3. 2. select the Cache. On the General tab page. To delete the cookies. In the Delete Browsing History dialog box.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Procedure l To clear the cache and cookies in the browser. click Delete Cookies and then click OK in the displayed dialog box. and click Clear Private Data Now. click Delete and close the Internet Options dialog box. and choose Tools > Internet Options from the menu bar. and choose Tools > Internet Options from the menu bar. The Delete Browsing History dialog box is displayed. click Delete Files and then click OK in the displayed dialog box. 2. In the displayed Clear Private Data dialog box. 5. Internet Explorer 7 1. Open the Firefox browser. The operations take effect after the browser restarts. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. To delete the files.. The operations take effect after the browser restarts. perform the steps shown in the following table. 4. and choose Tools > Clear Private Data from the menu bar. 2. 4. Open the Internet Explorer. click Delete. click OK and close the Internet Options dialog box. Open the Internet Explorer. and Offline Website Datacheck boxes. Clear the Preserve Favorites website data check box and select the Cookies and Temporary Internet files check boxes. Then. The Internet Options dialog box is displayed. 3. On the General tab page. Browser Type Handling Procedure Firefox 1. The Delete Browsing History dialog box is displayed. The following problems may occur when a user logs in to or use the LMT: 1. click View. 278 . Trace.2.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ ----End 12. and click the Java icon to display the Java control panel.. they may be incompatible. Therefore. You are advised to uninstall the java plug-ins of versions that are not required and use the recommend version. On the windows system. and Device Maintenance. Trace. Enter java -version in the run window and press the Enter key to view the current java plug-in version. and Device Maintenance. 2. 12. You can install or uninstall Java plug-ins on the Windows control panel. and Device Maintenance cannot be used. You can obtain the Java plug-in from the official website of Java. but LMT modules. l For the first problem. You need to install the Java plug-in before using these modules. Context When a user logs in to the LMT. NOTE You may view the Java plug-in version on the Java control panel even when this plug-in has been uninstalled. Monitor. Trace. A tooltip with the message "java plug-in is not found" is displayed on the login interface. the current active Java plug-in version can be viewed on the Java control panel. Ltd. If Java plug-ins of multiple versions are installed on the computer. You can try the following methods to solve problems about installing or using Java plug-in. ensure that the selected Java plug-in version is available. and press the Enter key. is the Java runtime environment(JRE). LMT modules. it checks the version of the installed java plug-in.2 Java-related FAQs This section describes Java-related common problems that hinder the normal use of the LMT and corresponding handling procedures. perform the following steps to check whether the java plug-in is successfully installed: Procedure 1. Select the Java tab page. enter CMD in the text box. cannot be used even after the java plug-in of a recommend version is installed. Monitor.1 Help for Installing and Using the Java Plug-in The Java plug-in used by LMT modules. including Batch. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. A tooltip with the message "please download and install the recommended Java plug-in" is displayed on the login interface. NOTE You can log in to the LMT even if the Java plug-in is not installed. 3. When Java plug-ins of more than one version are installed on the computer. Monitor. and click the User tab page in the displayed window to view and select the Java plug-in version. Select Control PanelJava. including Batch. click StartRun. 2. including Batch. The Temporary Files Settings dialog box is displayed.7 are installed simultaneously on the computer. l As for the third problem. you can reconfigure Java security level or Exception Site List. and log in to the LMT again. – Restart the browser..0 LMT.0. select the Plugins tab page. NOTE The Java plug-in of version 1. l The second problem indicates that you have installed a Java plug-in not supported by the LMT. click Toolbars and Extensions. If the SRAN7. first uninstall the one of the later version. you can try to delete temporary java files. Some tooltips will also be displayed before the applet is executed. JRE 1. You can try the following methods to solve this problem: – Click the Java icon in the Windows control panel and select the Security tab page in the Java control panel. Monitor. – If you are using Firefox browser.0 LMT also supports JRE 1. The SRAN10.0 LMTs are used simultaneously. ----End 12. – If the Application Blocked by Security Settings dialog box is displayed. open the Add-ons window.6. Close all running LMT windows and click Delete Files. select the Advanced tab page.2 LMT Fails to Function Properly When Error Occurs in Mixed Code Security Verification of JRE This section describes how to solve the problem that the LMT does not respond or responds incorrectly when users perform a function on the LMT. select All add-ons in the Show combo box and ensure that the plug-ins Deployment Toolkit and isInstalled Class are enabled. and ensure that the installed Java plug-in is enabled. Tooltips with the message "please download and install the recommended Java plug-in" will also be displayed on the login interface even if the earlier version is supported by the LMT. You can also try to clear the tooltips using the following methods: – If you are using IE browser. – If JRE 1. and click Settings. Open the Java Control Panel dialog box. Ltd.0.27 is recommended. – When other exceptions occur. choose ToolsManage Add-ons.0. a java plug-in of an earlier version installed afterward will not be activated.6. You can continue using the LMT. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If the Java plug-in is successfully installed and you are using the IE browser.0. NOTE If the Java plug-in is enabled in the IE browser and the tooltips still exist. the Java applet is forbidden by default because the security is enhanced in JRE 1. SRAN9.65 is recommended for the SRAN10. A dialog box may be displayed for selecting the appropriate Java plug-in version to execute the applet. In the displayed window.0. but some modules. When a Java plug-in of a later version has been installed. SRAN8.7. and click Reset. Trace. including Batch. You are advised to install the Java plug-in of a recommended version. select the General tab page. If you need to activate the Java plug-in version of the earlier version.6 and JRE 1. Set Security Level to Medium or add the current website to Exception Site List.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ 3.7. 279 .2. may become abnormal. or an error message is displayed on the LMT interface. and Device Maintenance. and SRAN10. you can ignore the tooltips and continue using the LMT. choose ToolsInternet Options . . Ltd.ClassLoader.java:807) at java.0_19 of JRE.lmt... or perform monitoring. users find that the following error is reported: java. With the function.mml. trace messages. Viewing the displayed message on the Java control panel. If codes are found to be untrustable.lang. Context Java Runtime Environment (JRE for short) is a compulsory third-party component for the LMT to run.ClassLoader.6. Figure 12-30 Java control panel Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. process MML commands in batches.SecurityException: class "com.java:488) . Mixed code security verification is introduced in version 1. codes are verified. four operation options displayed in Figure 12-30 are provided.. 280 .preDefineClass(ClassLoader.checkCerts(ClassLoader.util.lang.swimap. Changing the default option as described below solves the previous problem.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Prerequisites The LMT does not respond or responds incorrectly when users manage progress.MMLHandler"'s signer information does not match signer information of other classes in the same package at java.lang... perform steps 1 and 2. Solve this problem by using the following methods. The Java Control Panel dialog box is displayed. Click for details" is displayed and the Application Error dialog box is displayed. Step 2 In the Advanced tab page. ----End 12. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Figure 12-31 Application Error After clicking Details.3 Tracing and Monitoring Functions Cannot Be Used Tracing and monitoring functions cannot be used after a successful login to the LMT.. Step 3 Click OK to save the new setting. 281 . an error message "Error.lang. Ltd.ClassNotFoundException" error is displayed. trusted) security verification and click Disable verification (not recommended). You need to correct the error based on the error type as follows: l Issue 02 (2015-05-08) If the "java. Context When a tracing or monitoring function is performed on the LMT.2.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Procedure Step 1 Open Control Panel in the operating system and double-click JAVA. as shown in Figure 12-31. choose Security > Mixed code (sandboxed vs. detailed error information is displayed. JSException" error is displayed. you need to perform related steps on the Citrix Farm server rather than on the local PC.NullPointerException" error is displayed. In the Java Control Panel dialog box. Select Enable the next-generation Java Plug-in (requires browser restart) by referring to step a and click OK. visit http:// bugs. If you have no permission to log in to the Citrix Farm server. l If the "netscape. you cannot directly access Windows Control Panel on the Citrix Farm server. uninstall and reinstall Java.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ l If the "java. 1. The Java Control Panel dialog box is displayed. click the Advanced tab. 282 . The following figure shows the window: l If this problem cannot be solved by performing the following steps. right-click the Java icon on Windows system tray on the local PC and choose Open Control Panel from the short-cut menu.com/bugdatabase/view_bug.lang. Procedure Step 1 Enable the next-generation Java plug-in again. clear Enable the next-generation Java Plug-in (requires browser restart) under Java Plug-in and click OK.sun. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.do?bug_id=6967414. perform steps 2. Figure 12-32 shows the window. l This problem is caused by a Java defect. Ltd. 2. l If this problem occurs in Citrix Farm networking.javascript.. For details about this defect. perform step 3. To access it. Open Control Panel in the Windows operating system and double-click Java. Step 2 Delete temporary Java files. In the displayed Java Control Panel dialog box. Ltd.. If this problem persists after performing step 1. 1. 2. Open Control Panel in the Windows operating system and double-click Java. delete temporary Java files. click Setting. 283 . Check the amount of disk space set for storing temporary files. 3. Restart the browser to enable the new setting to take effect. as shown in Figure 12-33. The Temporary Files Settings dialog box is displayed. The Java Control Panel dialog box is displayed.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Figure 12-32 Enabling the next-generation Java plug-in 3. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Figure 12-34 Directory where temporary Java files are saved Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Check the amount of disk space used for storing temporary Java files in the directory where temporary Java files are saved. This amount is greater than the preset one.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Figure 12-33 Checking the amount of disk space set for storing temporary files 4. The part marked in red frame in Figure 12-34 shows the directory. 284 .. . Check the amount of disk space set for storing temporary files. Delete folders in this directory manually or by clicking Delete Files shown in the figure above. 1. In the displayed Java Control Panel dialog box. 12. Open Control Panel in the Windows operating system and double-click Java. Log in to the LMT again to check whether this problem is solved.4 Chinese Characters Displayed in the Tracing and Monitoring Windows When users successfully log in to the LMT after an upgrade. 2.3.1 Installing OS Patches ----End 12. as shown in Figure 12-35. Step 3 Install Windows operating system patch KB960714. If this problem persists after performing step 1. click Setting.2. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ 5. NOTE Before deleting folders in this directory. 285 . To solve this problem. Ltd. 1. The Temporary Files Settings dialog box is displayed. perform the following steps: Procedure Step 1 Close all browsers that are opened at the moment. 6. they can see Chinese characters in the tracing and monitoring windows and in the saved files. delete temporary Java files. close all running LMT clients. The Java Control Panel dialog box is displayed. 3. Step 2 Clear temporary Java files. 286 .. This amount is greater than the preset one. Figure 12-36 Directory where temporary Java files are saved Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The part marked in red frame in Figure 12-36 shows the directory. Ltd. Check the amount of disk space used for storing temporary Java files in the directory where temporary Java files are saved.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Figure 12-35 Checking the amount of disk space set for storing temporary files 4. 5 LMT Fails to Function Properly during the tracing/ monitoring/batch processing After you log in to the LMT and perform operations on it for a while. batch processing operations may suddenly fail without any error messages. Step 2 In the displayed Java Control Panel dialog box. There is no response when you click saving files in the tracing or monitoring interface. 6. The Java Control Panel dialog box is displayed. There is no response or any error message. Delete folders in this directory manually or by clicking Delete Files shown in the figure above. trusted) security verification.2. ----End 12. Log in to the LMT again to check whether this problem is solved. There is no response when you right-click the window for displaying tracing or monitoring results. close all running LMT clients. There is no detailed parsing information when you double-click a tracing or monitoring message. There is no response when you rightclick the window for displaying tracing or monitoring results and choose Save All Messages and Save Selected Messages from the shortcut menu.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ 5. The NE task list shows that this task has been successfully created. the task nevertheless can be successfully created. If either of the previous problems occurs. NOTE Before deleting folders in this directory. Figure 12-37 shows the dialog box. Alternatively. choose SecurityMixed code (sandboxed vs. Ltd. perform the following operations: Procedure Step 1 Open Control Panel in the Windows operating system and double-click Java. If you open a new browser and log in to the LMT again. after a tracing or monitoring task is created. 287 . and select Disable verification (not recommended). click the Advanced tab.. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the task page is not opened. To delete Java temporary files.. 288 . perform the following operations: 1.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Figure 12-37 Java Control Panel dialog box Step 3 Close all opened browsers and delete Java temporary files. The Java Control Panel dialog box is displayed. Ltd. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Open Control Panel in the Windows operating system and double-click Java. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. as shown in Figure 12-38. .BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Figure 12-38 Java Control Panel dialog box 2. In the Java Control Panel dialog box. 289 . Figure 12-39 Temporary Files Settings dialog box Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. as shown in Figure 12-39. click Settings. The Temporary Files Settings dialog box is displayed. Ltd. 7 Java Installation Fails During Java installation. Step 4 Log in to the LMT again. ----End 12.2.. interfaces (stacked in the Java Applet) for performing tracing and monitoring tasks blink. In the Temporary Files Settings dialog box. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2. click Delete Files to delete Java temporary files and click OK. Ltd. Use the Firefox browser to avoid this problem. Step 3 Reinstall Java. This problem occurs only on the IE browser. Context Java Applet in the IE browser is incompatible with HTML elements when they are stacked together. This problem occurs only on Java later than the version of 1. Visit www. ----End 12. As a matter of fact. This problem does not affect the function but deteriorates user experience. 2. The default installation path is C:\Program Files \Java\jre6\. The following figure shows the message: To solve the problem. Procedure l To avoid this problem. Step 2 If step 1 fails because files are locked or in use. you are prompted with a message indicating that the changing fails because one or more browsers are running.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ 3. use the following methods: 1." is displayed.com and download Java SE Runtime Environment 6u21 or an earlier version to avoid this problem.6 Interfaces for Performing Tracing or Monitoring Tasks Blinking Interfaces for performing tracing or monitoring tasks blink. 290 . restart the system and repeat step 1. no browser is running.8 Changing Settings for the Next-Generation Java Plug-in Fails When changing settings for Enable the next-generation Java Plug-in.oracle. perform the following steps: Procedure Step 1 Delete all files in the Java installation path. perform the following steps.21. ----End 12. As a result. the message "Error 25099. Unzipping core files failed.6. To solve the problem.2. as shown in the following figure: Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Procedure Step 1 Log in to the operating system (OS) using an administrator-level account authorized for the administrator's operations. Step 2 In the Computer Management window. To change the settings. The setting changing fails not because browsers are running but because the user has no permission to perform the operation. Figure 12-40 Unable to change Java Plug-in settings This problem is caused by a Java defect. choose System toolsLocal Users and GroupsGroups and double-click Power Users in the right pane of the window. 291 . the error message is shown in Figure 12-40. Right-click My computer and choose Manage from the shortcut menu. Ltd. the user must belong to the Power Users group or have more rights.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Context Changing Settings for Next-Generation Java Plug-in Fails.. Perform the following steps to grant the user more rights. Ltd.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Step 3 In the displayed window. click Add. as shown in the following figures: Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and click OK. 292 .. add the user account to the Power Users group. BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Step 4 Use an administrator-level account to delete the Windows folder in C:\Documents and Settings \User account\Local Settings\Application Data\Microsoft\Windows shown in the following figure: Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. 293 .. any of the following cases will result in the inconsistency between the LMT displayed in the browser and the actual LMT. 3.. A JavaScript error message is displayed on the status bar in the browser. l The preceding files are damaged during the use of the LMT.9 How to Handle a Web Page Error or Java Error Displayed on the LMT Any of the following occurs during the login to the LMT: the controller version displayed on the LMT is not the actual version after a controller upgrade or rollback. you can restore the user rights. Context When the browser cache or Java Applet cache is insufficient.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Step 5 Use the user account to log in the OS again after the previous steps are complete. As a result. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. A Java error message is displayed. Cookies. an exclamation mark is displayed at the bottom left corner of the status bar. Procedure Browser Type Handling Procedure Firefox 1. the browser fails to obtain the new Javascript. The error message Problems with this Web page might prevent it from being displayed properly or functioning properly . To restore the user rights. 2. perform the steps shown in the following table. and click Clear Private Data Now. the browser uses the preceding files saved before the controller version upgrade or rollback. In the displayed Clear Private Data dialog box. l To clear the cache and cookies in the browser. Ltd. The change of the user rights does not affect settings for Enable the next-generation Java Plugin. JAR files. select the Cache. ----End 12. In other words. log in to OS using an administrator-level account again and remove the user account from the Power Users group by referring to steps 1 through 3. The operations take effect after the browser restarts. l After a controller version upgrade or rollback. and other files from the LMT server. and Offline Website Datacheck boxes. NOTE After changing the settings.2. Open the Firefox browser. The user account now has permission to change settings for Enable the next-generation Java Plug-in. 294 . and choose Tools > Clear Private Data from the menu bar. CAUTION Before you clear the Java Applet. 4. l To clear the Java Applet. To delete the cookies. 295 . The Delete Browsing History dialog box is displayed. On the General tab page. 4. click Delete and close the Internet Options dialog box. In the Delete Browsing History dialog box. exit the LMT. Ltd. Choose Start > Control Panel. The Delete Browsing History dialog box is displayed. and choose Tools > Internet Options from the menu bar. The operations take effect after the browser restarts. some loaded data will be lost and unexpected errors will occur. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) 1. click Delete Files and then click OK in the displayed dialog box. On the General tab page. click Delete. perform the following steps. Then. Open the Internet Explorer. The JAVA Control Panel is displayed. Double-click Java in the displayed window. click OK and close the Internet Options dialog box. Otherwise. 3. and choose Tools > Internet Options from the menu bar.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Browser Type Handling Procedure Internet Explorer 7 1. Clear the Preserve Favorites website data check box and select the Cookies and Temporary Internet files check boxes. The Internet Options dialog box is displayed. click Delete. The Internet Options dialog box is displayed. 2. Internet Explorer 8 or 9 1. The Control Panel is displayed. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 3. 2.. click Delete Cookies and then click OK in the displayed dialog box. The operations take effect after the browser restarts. To delete the files. 5. 2. Open the Internet Explorer. 4. and click Show Options. click OK. To solve this problem. Therefore. or monitoring function on the LMT. The Temporary Files Settings dialog box is displayed. the Jar package execution requires OM identity authentication on the NE.7. The certificate for system check is a general certificate. 296 . the error message is displayed. Ltd.6. click Settings. l For Java 1. The operations take effect after the browser restarts.10 Displaying the Java Security Warning The Java security warning is displayed during the use of the progress management. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. tracing. Then. ----End 12.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ 3. The Web LMT is a terminal software and does not contain any key information.2. As a result. and click OK. In addition.. select the Applications and Applets and Trace and Log Files check boxes. and click Run. perform the following steps: Procedure l Issue 02 (2015-05-08) To clear the cache and cookies in the browser. Click Delete Files. click I accept the risk and want to run this application.2. ----End 12. However. If this problem needs to be resolved. 5. Procedure Step 1 The error message Are you sure you want to continue this operation? The connection to the website is unreliable. the message "Enter a correct verification code" is displayed even though the user enters the correct verification code for many times.11 Failure in Verifying the Verification Code During the Login to the LMT The verification code needs to be entered when a user logs in to the LMT. 6. It is the same on all Huawei MBSCs and the certificate issuer is MBSC Certificate. enable the PKI system to allocate unique certificates to all MBSCs by IP addresses. is displayed in the Security Warning dialog box. the certificate issuer is inconsistent with the equipment ID. On the General tab page. This problem is riskless and can be ignored. Therefore. Solve this problem by using the following methods. In Java Control Panel. Step 2 The error message Do you want to run this application? is displayed in the Security Warning dialog box. In the displayed Delete Temporary Files dialog box. However. l For Java 1. perform the steps shown in the following table. click Always trust content from this publisher. and click Run. batch processing. the device IP address is allocated by the network. this problem is riskless and can be ignored. click Always trust content from this publisher. You can click Continue to proceed with the subsequent operations. 297 . Clear the Preserve Favorites website data check box and select the Cookies and Temporary Internet files check boxes. click Delete and close the Internet Options dialog box. 4.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Browser Type Handling Procedure Firefox 1. click Delete. The operations take effect after the browser restarts. click OK and close the Internet Options dialog box. click Delete. Ltd. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and choose Tools > Internet Options from the menu bar. Cookies. 2. The Internet Options dialog box is displayed. and Offline Website Datacheck boxes. On the General tab page. 2. 2. 3. Open the Firefox browser. Then. Internet Explorer 8 or 9 1. Open the Internet Explorer. and choose Tools > Internet Options from the menu bar. To delete the files. and click Clear Private Data Now. The Internet Options dialog box is displayed. click Delete Cookies and then click OK in the displayed dialog box. 3. 3. perform the following steps. To delete the cookies. and choose Tools > Clear Private Data from the menu bar. 5. In the Delete Browsing History dialog box. Open the Internet Explorer. On the General tab page. Internet Explorer 7 1. The Delete Browsing History dialog box is displayed.. click Delete Files and then click OK in the displayed dialog box. The operations take effect after the browser restarts. select the Cache. 4. The Delete Browsing History dialog box is displayed. The operations take effect after the browser restarts. l Issue 02 (2015-05-08) To clear the Java Applet. In the displayed Clear Private Data dialog box. On the displayed Security tab page. The Control Panel is displayed. If this method is used. and click OK. For example. Otherwise. monitoring. select the Applications and Applets and Trace and Log Files check boxes. In the displayed Delete Temporary Files dialog box.30. The default security level is set to High.33 or http:// 10. click Settings. The Temporary Files Settings dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Specify Enable the next-generation Java Plug-in(requires browser restart). or device maintenance is open. indicating that the batch processing. tracing.20.. and then click Apply. click OK. Click Delete Files. or device maintenance function is unavailable. The untrusted Java application refers to an application with digital signature applied by an unknown issuer or without a certificate issued by a trusted certificate authority.7. and the The application cannot be run dialog box is displayed. click Security. click Edit Site List on the Security tab page in the Java Control Panel dialog box to add the sites accessing the LMT to the site list. 4. or Device Maintenance Is Enabled After the JRE is installed or upgraded. some loaded data will be lost and unexpected errors will occur. Double-click Java in the displayed window. mark whether the access to the LMT through HTTPS or HTTP. In Java Control Panel.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ CAUTION Before you clear the Java Applet. ----End 12. For the sites added in the site list. indicating that the untrusted Java applications will be blocked. The JAVA Control Panel is displayed. In the displayed Java Control Panel dialog box. 298 . the Java security level does not need to be reconfigured. Tracing. 2. https://10. Ltd. Context A function is introduced to the JRE later than Java 1. Procedure Step 1 Reconfigure the Java security level or add Exception Site List. 1.192. click Java. The operations take effect after the browser restarts.12 The Application Blocked by Security Settings Dialog Box Is Displayed When Batch Processing. the Application Blocked by Security Settings dialog box is displayed when the tab page related to batch processing. 5.2. Monitoring.60. Choose Start > Control Panel. On the General tab page. select Enable Java content in the browser. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. exit the LMT. 3. 10 to control when and how to run untrusted Java applications contained in a web page.198. l Alternatively. 6. tracing. set Security Level to Medium. monitoring. Click OK. l On the Control Panel page. Context The JRE installed on the computer is not of the latest version and an upgrade to the latest version is recommended by Java. click General. ----End 12.3 Other FAQs This section describes common problems. Close all running LMT windows and click Delete Files. 3. To continue to use the WebLMT and update the JRE later. On the displayed Advanced tab page. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and then click OK.2. 2. that hinder the normal use of the LMT and corresponding handling procedures. 12.13 What Do I Do If A Message Your Java version is out of date Is Displayed? If you are prompted with the message that Your Java version is out of date when logging in to the WebLMT. ----End 12.or browser setting-related problems. click Settings. clear Enable the next-generation Java Plug-in(requires browser restart). Restart the browser to make the settings take effect. 2. Select Enable the next-generation Java Plug-in(requires browser restart) according to operations in step 2. select Java Plug-in. and device maintenance functions. The Temporary Files Settings dialog box is displayed.1 Installing OS Patches In a Microsoft Windows operating system (OS). click Advanced. If the Do you want to continue? dialog box is displayed. In the Java Control Panel dialog box. 299 . Step 4 Log in to the LMT again. When enabling any of the batch processing. it is good practice to perform the procedure described below. 1. follow instructions provided in this session.3. except Java. On the displayed General tab page. Step 3 Delete temporary Java files. select the Do not ask again until the next update is available check box. Procedure Step 1 In the Your Java version is out of date dialog box. and click OK. click Continue.. Ltd. monitoring. In the Java Control Panel dialog box.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ 1. Step 2 Click Later. you need to install patch KB944338. KB938397 or KB960714 if the OS and IE are in a certain version.a. select I accept the risk and want run this application on the displayed do you want run this application? dialog box and click Run. tracing. After the service pack is installed. Double-click the Add or Remove Programs icon. l Patch KB944338 improves the performance of the LMT by increasing the speed of visiting a web page. Therefore. l When the Windows 2008 OS and Internet Explorer 7 or later are used. the LMT can work properly. the service pack KB938397 needs to be installed. NOTE l To download patch KB944338 or KB960714. the task is complete. l When the Windows 2003 operating system is used.com/?kbid=938397.microsoft. Ltd. 300 . Therefore. the Java application can be loaded successfully on the LMT. go to http://www. l To download patch KB938397. Step 2 In the displayed Add or Remove Programs window. l If Windows 7 operating system is used. select Show updates. KB938397 and KB960714 are present in the list of Currently installed programs. Windows patches do not need to be installed.microsoft. go to http://support.. l If the patches are not present.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Context l Patch KB960714 solves the problem of Java console output error. the LMT running rate can be increased. open the Control Panel window. l If the patches are present. This service pack ensures that the Windows 2003 operating system supports the SHA256 algorithm.com/downloads. Check whether patches KB944338. ----End Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. go to Step 3. the OS patch does not need to be installed. l Download a suitable patch according to the OS version and IE version. l Patch KB960714 needs to be installed when the OS version and IE version are combined in the following ways: OS Version IE Version Windows 2000 SP4 IE5/IE6 SP1 Windows XP SP3 IE6/IE7 Windows Server 2003 SP1/SP2 IE6/IE7 Windows Vista IE7 l Patch KB944338 needs to be installed when the OS version is Windows 2000 SP4 or Windows Server 2003 SP1/SP2. Step 3 Determine whether a Windows patch needs to be installed according to the OS version and IE version. Procedure Step 1 In the Windows OS. . Select 65001:Unicode(UTF-8) in File origin. 12.3. Then the Text Import Wizard .BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ 12. Changing the computer time causes some functions of the LMT to stop functioning normally.3. open the csv file by using the import method in Excel. 301 . Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3 Corrupted Characters Appearing When the csv File Is Opened in UTF-8 Coding If a csv file in UTF-8 coding is saved on the LMT with non-English characters in it and the csv file is opened in the Excel format by using the regular method.2 Changing the Computer Time During the LMT Use Prohibited Changing the computer time during the LMT use is prohibited. Then the Select Data Source dialog box is displayed. progress management fails to refresh normally. Ltd. all the non-English characters are displayed as corrupted characters. For example. tracing data and monitoring data fail to refresh normally. Procedure l If the Excel version is earlier than Office 2007. Figure 12-41 shows the dialog box. the OMU time fails to refresh normally. In this case. Figure 12-41 Operation interface for importing data in Excel 2. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) In the Select Data Source dialog box. perform the following operations: 1. Figure 12-42 shows the dialog box. select the csv file in UTF-8 coding. On the menu bar of Excel.Step 1 of 3 dialog box is displayed. choose Data > Import External Data > Import Data. Then the Import Data dialog box is displayed. Select Comma under Delimiters. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Click Finish.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Figure 12-42 Text import wizard-step 1 3. Click Next.. Figure 12-44 shows the dialog box. Ltd. Figure 12-43 shows the dialog box. Then the Text Import Wizard . 302 . Figure 12-43 Text import wizard-step 2 4.Step 2 of 3 dialog box is displayed. Figure 12-45 Operation interface for importing data in Excel 2. If the Excel version is Office 2007 or later. In the Import Text File dialog box. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Click Next.Step 1 of 3 dialog box is displayed. perform the following operations: 1. Ltd. 303 . Select 936:Chinese Simplified(GB2312) in File origin. On the menu bar of Excel. Then the Import Text File dialog box is displayed. select the csv file in UTF-8 coding..Step 2 of 3 dialog box is displayed. choose Data > From Text. Figure 12-46 Text import wizard-step 1 3. Select Comma under Delimiters. Figure 12-42 shows the dialog box. Figure 12-41 shows the dialog box.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Figure 12-44 Interface after data importation is finished 5. Then the Text Import Wizard . l Click OK. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Then the Text Import Wizard . Then the file is displayed properly. Figure 12-43 shows the dialog box. Figure 12-44 shows the dialog box. affects maintenance performance. Ltd. a PC does not support 32 LMT clients to be started simultaneously. ----End 12. the maximum number of LMT clients that can be simultaneously started on one PC is as follows: Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In normal maintenance. Then the Import Data dialog box is displayed. however. Then the file is displayed properly.4 Maximum Number of LMT Clients That Can Be Started on One PC Simultaneously You can have multiple LMT clients started on one PC.3. As being limited by the PC memory and maximum number of dialog boxes that can be opened on the IE browser.. Starting too many LMT clients simultaneously. Figure 12-48 Interface after data importation is finished 5. Click Finish.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Figure 12-47 Text import wizard-step 2 4. 304 . Click OK. .6 Configuring the HTTPS Login Mode This section describes how to configure the HTTPS login mode and a security certificate. To put it simply. perform the following operations to add an environment variable. If you restart the function.5 Any Further Operation Performed When Some LMT Web Pages Fail to Update Causes the Web Pages to Turn Blank Some LMT Web pages fail to update when batch processing. To enter the HTTPS login mode. The default port No. enter https://Website to be visited + Port No in the Address bar of the browser.3. Step 5 In the Environment Variables dialog box. is 443. HTTPS is a combination of HTTP and SSL. HTTPS introduces SSL (or TLS) to ensure transmission security. To prevent this problem. l One PC with 1 GB memory supports 8 LMT clients to be started simultaneously. The Environment Variables dialog box is displayed. select My Computer and right-click Properties from the shortcut menu.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ l One PC with 2 GB memory or larger supports 16 LMT clients to be started simultaneously. Use the default port No. to enter the LMT login page. the Web page returns to normal. Step 2 In the System Properties dialog box. click New. l One PC with 512 MB memory supports 4 LMT clients to be started simultaneously. Any further operation causes the Web pages to turn blank. The System Properties dialog box is displayed. ----End 12. Based on HTTP. Step 4 In the New User Variable dialog box. 12. set Variable name to JPI_PLUGIN2_NO_HEARTBEAT and Variable value to 1. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. click OK. The login mode is configurable. Step 3 In the Environment Variables dialog box. tracing. click the Advanced tab and click Environment Variables. Then click OK. Step 6 In the System Properties dialog box. Users can log in to the LMT through either HTTP or HTTPS. Ltd. 305 . Procedure Step 1 On the LMT PC.3. Context HTTPS is Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure. Prerequisites l You have logged in to the LMT using a Built-In Administrator Account or External User Accounts. or monitoring is in use. click OK to finish adding the environment variable. The New User Variable dialog box is displayed. as shown in Figure 12-49.7 Unable to Save Tracking and Monitoring Data When a tracking or monitoring task (such as the UE tracking task) is running on the LMT. the restart is complete within 5 seconds. In this step. After the restart is complete. select Disable System Recovery on All Drivers.. and click Submit. Ltd. set TG to ACTIVE and MNAME to weblmt. 306 . NOTICE 1. Context This problem arises when the operating system enables the system recovery function that monitors changes of the files on the hard disk and consumes some hard disk space. 2. In this step. Procedure Step 1 Log in to the operating system (OS) using an administrator-level account authorized for the administrator's operations.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Procedure Step 1 Change the login mode 1. the change take effect when users log in to the LMT again. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. click System Recovery. Solve the problem by using the method described in the procedure part. Step 2 Run the MML command RST OMUMODULE to restart the LMT so that the change take effect. Right-click My computer and choose Properties. and if a tracking or monitoring task is running on the LMT. it is possible that the vast amounts of tracking or monitoring data cannot be saved even with sufficient hard disk space. Log in to the LMT through HTTPS. Step 2 In the "System Properties" window. Normally. With insufficient hard disk space. set POLICY to HTTPS. Running this command disconnects all online users from the LMT. the system displays "Insufficient hard disk space".3. ----End 12. Run the MML command SET WEBLOGINPOLICY. 2. it is likely that the tracking or monitoring data cannot be saved. 307 .8 BTS Nodes Cannot Be Displayed Under Device Navigation Tree After a successful login to the LMT. as shown in Figure 12-50. Solve this problem by using either of the following methods. Context BTS nodes cannot be displayed under Device Navigation Tree.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Figure 12-49 System properties dialog box ----End 12. Ltd. you find that the nodes can be displayed normally. This problem occurs because data under Device Navigation Tree on the LMT is compressed whereas Internet Explorer 6 SP2 does not support compression of chunked data.3. you may find that BTS nodes cannot be displayed under Device Navigation Tree. After upgrading the browser.. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the page may become white with an exclamation mark displayed in the center. as shown in the following figure: Solve this problem by using the following methods.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Figure 12-50 BTS nodes cannot be displayed Procedure l Method 1: For the operating system Windows XP Service Pack 2 or 3.. install the KB982381 patch.3. as shown in Figure 12-51. ----End 12. visit http://www. The exclamation mark is circled in gray. Context The page of alarm/event function become white.9 Alarm/Event Function Becomes Unavailable When starting or using the Alarm/Event function after a successful login to the LMT. You are advised to upgrade it to Internet Explorer 8.com/downloads. Ltd. Figure 12-51 Alarm/Event Function Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.microsoft. l Method 2: Upgrade the browser. 308 . To download this patch. 1. 309 .BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Procedure l Method 1:Disable the alarm or event module. Navigate to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Macromedia\FlashPlayer \SafeVersions. If it is occupied by a process with the PID of 4.102 is available on the LMT login web page. For later versions. the problem occurs due to the cause. ----End 12.102 or later. Internet Explorer or Firefox. delete the item with the DWORD value of 10. see 2. To confirm the cause. perform the following steps: l 1. and reinstall the flash player. the LMT login web page cannot be opened.1 Configuration Requirements of the LMT PC. This process is a system process and therefore cannot be closed directly. the LMT process cannot be found in the task manager.0. as shown in the following figure. Choose StartRun and enter regedit to open Registry Editor. run the netstat —naop tcp command at the Windows 7 command prompt to check whether port 80 is occupied. 2. To close it. l Method 2: Check that the flash player is of a version supported by the LMT.com.10 LMT Login Web Page Cannot Be Opened with the PC OMU Installed With the PC OMU installed in Windows 7. If the problem persists after you reopens the page. Context Port 80 is the default port for LMT login. Method 3: Check that the browser type is supported by the LMT. In addition.1. This problem occurs because port 80 is occupied by a default HTTP service in Windows 7.. Flash Player 11. If installing the flash player fails and a message saying that the version is not the latest one is displayed. use method 2 to resolve the problem. Ltd. Download and install the flash player of the latest version. perform the following steps: Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3. Flash Player 11. visit http://adobe. For details about the supported browser versions. . the Windows Components Wizard dialog box is displayed.3. and then click Add/Remove Programs. ----End 12. Then click Next to complete the modification. perform the following steps: Procedure Step 1 In the Windows 2003 and Windows XP operating system (OS). Step 2 In the Windows Components Wizard dialog box.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Procedure Step 1 In Windows. Ltd. Step 2 Navigate to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\HTTP. as shown in the following figure. 310 . deselect Upload Root Certificates. ----End Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 4 Restart the PC and log in to the LMT again. choose Start > Control Panel. choose StartRun and enter regedit to open Registry Editor.11 Slow Response During an LMT Login The LMT responses slowly when the users are trying to log in to the LMT. Step 3 Change the DWORD value of Start to 0. To solve the problem. the MML commands fail to be executed. Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. When logging in to the LMT through a web page. command execution fails. Procedure Step 1 Check all running programs on the PC. The unpaired CRs or LFs cannot be deleted. As a result. copy these commands back to Batch and execute them again. Find the program using the same shortcut key settings as the LMT. you may fail to use the corresponding function by pressing a shortcut key. A redundant carriage return (CR) 0x0D stays at the LF location of the MML command each. See Figure 12-52. Figure 12-52 Viewing an MML command in the binary format using UltraEdit In the Windows operating system (OS). Procedure Step 1 Copy the MML commands failing to the executed to an UltraEdit or notepad file and delete all LFs and CRs. ----End 12. click to view these MML commands in the binary format. you cannot stop pinging by pressing Ctrl+Q in the MML Command window. 311 . the shortcut key becomes invalid. For example.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ 12. Then. Ltd.13 How to Handle Shortcut Key Invalidation Shortcut keys are defined on the LMT.. the CR 0x0D and LF 0x0A must be used pairwise.3. In this case. In UltraEdit. Context Copy the MML commands failing to be executed to an UltraEdit file. This is because the same shortcut key is preferentially used by another running program on the PC. It is found that these MML commands are displayed in two lines. which leads to a shortcut key conflict.3.12 Batch Execution of MML Commands Fails Because Some MML Commands Contain Invisible Carriage Returns or Line Feeds After line feeds (LF) are deleted from MML command scripts copied to Batch. 3.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Step 2 Modify the program shortcut key settings which are the same as those on the LMT or stop the program when you use the LMT. ----End 12. the tracing result file being generated cannot be uploaded to the specified directory. perform the following steps: Procedure Step 1 1. Procedure Step 1 In the Trace Navigation Tree. Step 3 3. and the files cannot be removed. Debug is selected and Trace Mode is set to Report File.. ----End 12. The generated tracing files can be uploaded. The preceding settings enable the tracing result file being generated to be uploaded to the specified directory. To solve this problem. Step 2 2. Uninstall the Google chrome frame plug-in. the last tracing file cannot be uploaded to the specified directory. select a task. To solve the problem. Clear the IE browser cache. which depends on the traced messages. Log in to the LMT again ----End 12.15 Error Dialog Box Displayed When Online Help Is Opened When Online Help is opened on the LMT.3. and click Delete.14 Tracing File Not Being Uploaded to the Specified Directory If you close the UE Trace or IOS Trace dialog box during the UE tracing or IOS tracing. perform the following steps: Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. This problem occurs in the following scenario: In the UE Trace or IOS Trace dialog box. a dialog box is displayed with the following information: An error on this web page disables the proper running of the web page. perform the steps in Procedure. Ltd. Step 2 Query the UE tracing or IOS tracing task being performed. The last tracing file refers to the one being generated. To solve the problem.3. double-click Manage Trace Task. Online Help cannot be used. they can see garbled characters in the Chinese names of the files. As a result. If you close the trace dialog box. The Manage Trace Task tab page is displayed. Context A tracing task may generate multiple tracing files.16 Garbled Characters Displayed in the Chinese Names of Files in the File Manager and These Files Failing to Be Removed When users view the files on the OMU using the LMT file manager. 312 . such as the FileZilla. upload the file. to upload a file to the OMU. and click Connect. Set the FileZilla as follows: Choose FileSite Manager. ----End Issue 02 (2015-05-08) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. A Site Management dialog box is displayed. the file manager can manage this file. Before uploading this file. and you can see a normally displayed file name. select Use custom charset. and click OK. 313 . Use a third-party tool. Open the file manager to view the file. specify the file name using the gb2312 coding and save the file. The file can be removed now. The encoding is modified. On the Charset tab page. Select Chinese in Language. Step 2 On the LMT. In this way. Select the corresponding site from My Sites. Ltd. set Encoding to gb2312. Then.BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide 12 FAQ Procedure Step 1 1.. click System Settings.